Welcome to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager (“Connector”). This is the connector between Adobe Experience Manager and the Lionbridge Translation Services. The Connector enables you to automate sending and retrieving content from Adobe Experience Manager, which dramatically reduces the effort required to create, maintain, and publish Web content in multiple languages. If the Connector’s add-on for Lionbridge is enabled, you can automate sending and retrieving content from Adobe Experience Manager directly to and from the Lionbridge Translation Services. The connector supports installation into AEM On Premise (including Adobe Managed Service) and AEM as a Cloud Service (AEMaaCS or “AEM Cloud”).

1.1.1 - Terminology


Asset	Any content or document being sent for translation, including metadata. Assets are created by the Connector.
Content API Platform	The hosted connectivity platform that receives and routes content from content systems, including content management systems (CMSs), to translation providers and back during implementation. The Lionbridge Connector Team configures the Platform based on the number and nature of systems involved in your system architecture.
Freeway	The name of the Lionbridge translation portal for submitting content to and retrieving content from the Lionbridge translation provider.
FTP Server	File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a standard network protocol used to transfer files from one host to another host over a TCP-based network, such as the Internet. Translation providers may receive and send files for translation using an FTP server.
Keys	The Connector uses keys to establish a secure, discrete connection between the Connector instance and the Platform. Very important Do not use the same account keys on multiple instances, because this is a violation of the License Agreement. Using the same account keys on multiple instances will cause the Connector to behave unexpectedly, which can result in lost translation content, orphaned projects, and inaccurate translation status reports. The Lionbridge Connector team will support technical issues caused by duplicating or incorrectly installing CMS address keys only on a time and materials basis.**
Lionbridge	The publisher of the Freeway translation portal and a translation provider. Users connect to the Freeway translation portal to submit content to and retrieve content from the Lionbridge translation provider.
Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager (Connector)	The connector software that Clay Tablet Technologies has developed and provides, which plugs into your Adobe Experience Manager installation to provide connectivity to our hosted Platform. In this document it is referred to as the Connector. This is the software you are installing and configuring as you work through this document.
MT	Machine translation. The translation provider can be a machine translation service, such as Bing.
Producer	CMS or another system that sends content or documents out for translation. In this case, this is your Adobe Experience Manager.
Provider	provider of translation services. The delivery of assets to the provider may be via an FTP server or a TMS connector.
Support Asset	Supporting documents and their metadata. Support assets are not translated by the translation provider, but they provide helpful context for the translator.
TMS	Translation management system that the translation provider uses.

1.1.2 - About the Content API Platform

About the Content API Platform

The Content API translation-connectivity platform is the easiest, most flexible way to integrate content systems, including content management systems (CMSs) and other content producers, with translation providers and translation technologies.

Content API Platform is the hosted (IaaS) connectivity platform that receives and routes content from content management systems to translation providers and back, including to Lionbridge via Freeway. During implementation, the Lionbridge Connector Team configures the Platform for your translation solution, based on the translation providers or systems you use.

1.1.3 - How the Connector Works with Adobe Experience Manager

The Lionbridge Connector (“Connector”) is an important part of the Content API translation solution.

The Connector is installed on your system as an add-on to Adobe Experience Manager. Its functionality is displayed to the users as part of Adobe Experience Manager.

Your translation systems architecture might look like the configuration above. It may have additional CMSs or translation providers, but the core concepts remain the same. If your translation provider is Lionbridge, it is accessed via Freeway.

During implementation, Lionbridge Connector Support works with you and your translation providers to configure and test the other elements of your translation solution, which are the Content API Platform’s connections to your translation providers' systems.

1.1.4 - Using this Guide

Purpose of this guide

This guide describes everything you need to know to install and configure the Lionbridge Connector (“Connector”) for Adobe Experience Manager. It describes the delivery package contents, system requirements, installation instructions, and configuration procedures.

Note: This guide describes using both the Adobe Experience Manager Touch-Optimized UI and the Classic UI. The terminology in this guide is for classic devices, such desktops and laptops, although it is also relevant to mobile devices, such as tablets. For detailed information about the UIs and views, as well as differences in terminology depending on device types, refer to the Adobe Experience Manager documentation, available at http://helpx.adobe.com/marketing-cloud/experience-manager.html?t2.

Recommendation: Review the user guide to fully understand the powerful features of the Connector.

Who should use this guide

This guide is intended for Adobe Experience Manager administrators and system integrators.

What you should already know

This document assumes that your company already has an installed instance of Adobe Experience Manager. It assumes that you have a strong working knowledge of Adobe Experience Manager and its features. If Lionbridge is your company’s translation provider, it assumes that Freeway is already set up for your company.

How to find out more about the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager

For information on using the Lionbridge Connector to send and receive content for translation from Adobe Experience Manager, read the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager User Guide.

To access all Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager documentation:

Log into Adobe Experience Manager.
Do one of the following:
- In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click the Tools icon and then click Lionbridge Connector in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. (This opens the Connector in a new browser tab.)
- In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, scroll down and click Lionbridge Connector in the right pane.
- In your Web browser, navigate to /content/ctctranslation/status.html on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.
In the Lionbridge Connector rail, click Admin Tools.
- This displays the Admin Tools menu options.
Click Help.
- A new Web page opens, displaying links to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager documentation.

Documentation conventions

This guide uses the following conventions:

Convention	Description
Bold	Highlights screen elements such as buttons, menu items, and fields.
Courier	Highlights input, file names, and paths.
Italics	Highlights terms for emphasis, variables, or document titles.
>	Indicates a menu choice. For example, Select Admin Tools > Configuration.

1.1.5 - How to Contact Lionbridge Connector Support

How to Contact Lionbridge Connector Support

You can submit a support ticket either:

by emailing connectors@lionbridge.com
from the Lionbridge Connector Zendesk page https://lionbridge-connectors.zendesk.com/

1.2 - Before You Install

Before you begin to install the Lionbridge Connector (“Connector”) for Adobe Experience Manager, please review the system requirements, described in System Requirements, and perform the following pre-installation procedures (Note: This requirement doesn’t apply to AEM Cloud):

Setting Your System Date, Time, and Time Zone Correctly.
Downloading the Delivery Package for On-Premise.
Or, Deploying the connector through the Cloud Manager CI/CD Pipelines. Note: This following requirements only apply to AEM On-Premise:
Creating or Updating a Connector Database on your Database Server Instance.
Optional. Creating the Connector Folders. These are the folders where the Connector stores data for manual translation updates and shared configuration files. It may also store log files.

Very important: Do not use the same account keys on multiple instances, because this is a violation of the License Agreement. Using the same account keys on multiple instances will cause the Connector to behave unexpectedly, which can result in lost translation content, orphaned projects, and inaccurate translation status reports. The Lionbridge Connector team will support technical issues caused by duplicating or incorrectly installing CMS address keys only on a time and materials basis.

Note: If you are installing the Connector in a clustered environment, see Installing the Connector in a Clustered Environment.

Note: If you are installing on Java version 8 or above, make sure you specify the JVM option -Djava.locale.providers=COMPAT under the AEM startup script, as described in the next image:

1.2.1 - System Requirements

Note: This section is not applicable for the AEM Cloud Connector.

The Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager must be installed on the Adobe Experience Manager Author server. The Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager supports Adobe Experience Manager versions 6.3 and higher.

The Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager has no additional hardware or software requirements beyond those of Adobe Experience Manager. For detailed requirements, refer to the appropriate version of the Adobe Experience Manager Technical Requirements.

1.2.2 - Setting Your System Date, Time, and Time Zone Correctly

The Connector sends content to and receives content from the Content API Platform, which is hosted in the Lionbridge environment and requires any machines that connect to its applications to have the correct system time and date settings.

Important: Before proceeding, ensure that the system date, time, and time zone are set correctly on any systems that will run the Connector. If these settings are incorrect, the following error message is displayed: Error. The difference between the request time and the current time is too large.

1.2.3 - Downloading the Delivery Package

Download the Lionbridge Connector (“Connector”) delivery package from the link that Lionbridge Connector Support sends you. This is a .zip file, and it contains the following folders:

Folder Name	Description
Lionbridge connector for Adobe Experience Manager a.v-x.y.z-<datetimestamp>	The installation package that you will install into your Adobe Experience Manager system using the Package Manager tool. This has the following format: Lionbridge connector for Adobe Experience Manager a.v-x.y.z-yyyy-MMddkkmm.zip, where a.v is the supported Adobe Experience Manager version number, and x.y.z is the Connector version number, for example, Lionbridge connector for Adobe Experience Manager 6.3-4.0.0-2019-03141609.zip. Note about upgrading from a previous version of the Connector: There is a single package for both new installations and upgrades from previous installations. This redesigned package prevents overwriting your configuration settings while upgrading.
Freeway support package	Lionbridge connector addon - Freeway Support.zip, which is the Freeway-support add-on installation package that you will install into your Adobe Experience Manager system using the Package Manager tool. This package supports all versions of Adobe Experience Manager On-Premise (Doesn’t apply for AEM Cloud), and all versions of the Connector. Note: This is required only if you are using the Connector’s add-on for Lionbridge Freeway.
CTC Data	The Connector Data folder zip archive, CTCData.zip. Note: This folder is optional.
Documents	1. Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide (this document) 2. Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager User Guide
Key Client ID for CTCConfig UI	This is the file containing the license for the configuration UI if the Clay-Tablet Platform, used only by connector versions below 5.0.0. The file name is License_ID.txt.

Unzip the delivery package file you downloaded, and save its contents to a convenient location.

1.2.4 - Deploying the connector through the Cloud Manager CI/CD Pipelines

In order to deploy the Lionbridge connector for AEM Cloud, it’s required to include the Lionbridege Maven repository connector references in your Adobe Cloud Manager CI/CD Pipeline configuration. For more details on how to integrate customizations into AEM Cloud, please refer to Adobe’s official Cloud Manager CI/CD Pipelines documentation, or contact your Adobe’s Support Agent through the Adobe’s Support Channels.

To include the connector Maven references into the POM.xml AEM Cloud project:

Add Lionbridge repo to POM.xml of project:

<repository>
<id>ctctranslation-libs-release</id>
<name>ctctranslation-libs-release</name>
<url>https://lionbridge-artifactory.eastus.cloudapp.azure.com/artifactory/ctctranslation-libs-release/</url>
<releases>
<enabled>true</enabled>
<updatePolicy>daily</updatePolicy>
</releases>
<snapshots>
<enabled>false</enabled>
</snapshots>
</repository>

Embed Lionbridge cloud connector package to “All” package of the project. Edit your POM.xml of ‘all’ package:

<plugin>
<groupId>org.apache.jackrabbit</groupId>
<artifactId>filevault-package-maven-plugin</artifactId>
<extensions>true</extensions>
<configuration>
...
<embeddeds> <embedded> <groupId>com.adobe.cloud.translation.connector</groupId> <artifactId>lionbridge-connector.all</artifactId> <type>zip</type> <target>/apps/lionbridge-connector-packages/container/install</target> </embedded> 
</configuration>
</plugin>

Also add the following dependency and then edit the filter.xml to allow path: /apps/lionbridge-connector-packages:


<dependency>
<groupId>com.adobe.cloud.translation.connector</groupId>
<artifactId>lionbridge-connector.all</artifactId>
<version>5.0.1.2</version>
<type>zip</type>
</dependency>

After performing the steps, a sample cloud site is generated with Adobe Archetype, which has Lionbridge Cloud Connector which includes all the packages. You can download it and do Maven build to test how to embed Lionbridge Cloud Connector.

Note If you want to do dev with reference to Lionbridge Cloud connector, then you need to add two dependencies:

<dependency>
<groupId>com.adobe.cloud.translation.connector</groupId>
<artifactId>lionbridge-connector.api</artifactId>
<version>5.0.1.2</version>
<scope>provided</scope>
</dependency>
<dependency>
<groupId>com.adobe.cloud.translation.connector</groupId>
<artifactId>lionbridge-connector.core</artifactId>
<version>5.0.1.2</version>
<scope>provided</scope>
</dependency>

For more information, see Deploying to AEM as a Cloud Service.

1.2.5 - Creating the Connector Folders

Note: This section is not applicable to the AEM Cloud Connector.

This section describes how to create a data folder that the AEM On-Premise Connector uses to store licensing information and translation data. This step is optional. The Connector uses the sub-folders to store data for translation updates and shared configuration files. It may also store log files.

On your Adobe Experience Manager server, navigate to the file system and create a folder called CTCdata.
Unzip the CTCData.zip archive folder from the delivery package you downloaded and unzipped, as described in Downloading the Delivery Package, and extract all the included folders into the target CTCdata folder. This creates the following two subfolders in the CTCdata folder:

Sub-Folder	Folder Access Permissions	Description
update	Full	This folder will contain manually updated translated files. Note: Use this feature only if translation providers have edited XML files that were already returned into Adobe Experience Manager, or if a file was not successfully inserted back into Adobe Experience Manager.
logs	Full	This folder may be used by the Connector to store Connector log files, if you select the Logs check box in the Folder and Permissions section of the Configuration page. For details, see Folder and Permissions.

Set the access permission for each folder according to the above table.

1.2.6 - Creating or Updating a Connector Database on your Database Server Instance

Note: This section is not applicable to the AEM Cloud Connector.

The Connector requires one of the following databases for its database engine:

MySQL version 5.0 or higher
Microsoft SQL Server version 2012 or higher
Oracle 11g and 12c
PostgreSQL

For new Connector installations, create a database container, such as CTCTRANSLATION. The Connector will automatically create all tables and columns.

When upgrading from a previous version, the Connector automatically updates all tables and columns.

Note: If the automatic upgrade of the database fails while upgrading your version of the Connector, for example, because of insufficient permissions, the Errors and SQL Scripts buttons are displayed in the JDBC SQL Connection section of the Configuration page. Click Errors to view the related error messages. Click SQL Scripts to download the generated SQL scripts. A DBA can then run the scripts. Refer to the ct_db_update.Sql file in the Adobe Experience Manager quickstart folder for the list of SQL commands required to manually update the database.

Note about MySQL: You may need to edit the mysql.ini file to add the following lines:
[mysql]
default-character-set=utf8
[mysqld]
character-set-server=utf8

Translation Database Size Requirements


Minimum size	1 GB
Recommended size	10 GB

Recommendation: Increase the database size relative to the site content.

1.3 - Installing the Lionbridge Connector

This section describes how to install the Connector installation package you downloaded earlier into your Adobe Experience Manager system, as described in Downloading the Delivery Package.

Before you install the Connector, verify that you have reviewed the system requirements and followed all the pre-installation procedures described in Before You Install.

Note: If you are installing the Connector in a clustered environment, see Installing the Connector in a Clustered Environment.

To install the Connector into Adobe Experience Manager:

Do one of the following:
- In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click Tools in the Adobe Experience Manager rail, and then click Deployment. Then, in the Navigation page, click Packages.
- In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, scroll down and click Packages in the right pane.
- In your Web browser, navigate to /crx/packmgr/index.jsp on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.
The CRX Package Manager opens.
Click Upload Package to upload the Lionbridge Connector package to the Adobe Experience Manager server.
Click the name of the package you uploaded earlier, and follow the on-screen instructions.
Optional. If you are using Connector’s add-on for Lionbridge Freeway, repeat steps 2 and 3 to upload and install the Connector Freeway Support solution package (Lionbridge connector addon - Freeway Support.zip) using the Package Manager. This package supports all versions of Adobe Experience Manager and the Connector.

Note: If you are integrating the Connector with Adobe Experience Manager’s Translation Integration Framework, return to Integrating the Connector with Adobe Experience Manager’s Translation Integration Framework, and follow the instructions.

Tip: To prevent the installed Lionbridge Connector bundle from starting automatically, you can add the adding any file called ct_bundle_stop_starting.config to the Adobe Experience Manager quickstart folder. The file can be blank or have any content. The process that activates the Lionbridge Connector bundle then throws a exception to stop activating.

1.3.1 - Installing the Add-On for SDL TMS

Note: This feature is available only when using the Clay Tablet Translation Connector for SDL TMS.

You can specify the SDL TMS configuration for submitting your content for translation. This feature requires installing the Add-On for SDL TMS, as described below:

To install the add-on into Adobe Experience Manager:

Do one of the following:
- In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click Tools in the Adobe Experience Manager rail, and then click Deployment. Then, in the Navigation page, click Packages.
- In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, scroll down and click Packages in the right pane.
- In your Web browser, navigate to /crx/packmgr/index.jsp on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

The CRX Package Manager opens.

Click Upload Package to upload the Lionbridge connector addon - SDL TMS Support.zip package to the Adobe Experience Manager server. . This package supports all versions of Adobe Experience Manager and the Connector.
Click Lionbridge connector addon - SDL TMS Support.zip, and follow the on-screen installation instructions.
In your Web browser, navigate to /content/ctctranslation/status.html# on your Adobe Experience Manager instance to display the Lionbridge Connector rail.
In the Lionbridge Connector rail, click Admin Tools > TMS GUID Config.

The TMS GUID Config page opens.

Note: A GUID is a Globally Unique Identifier, which is a unique reference number used as an identifier in software.

Click Add in the top-right corner of the page and enter the following information about your configuration:

Column	Description
Config Name	Your meaningful name for the TMS configuration, for example, Default GUID.
TMS GUID	Each translation provider can have multiple configurations, so that it can manage multiple sets of translation requirements, Each configuration in the provider’s system has its own GUID.

Note: You can enter multiple GUIDs for each TMS configuration. Repeat this step for each TMS GUID configuration.

In the Default Config dropdown list at the top of the page, select the SDL configuration you created, and click Save. For example, select Default GUID from the list.

Optional. In the Translation Status field, enter a custom translation-status value that will be displayed in the page list of the Globalization Tool for all pages translated with this TMS configuration. This value is one of the following:

A single value, such as MT (for machine translation) or HT (for human translation).
A paired value, which is a value-title pair, with the -|- separator, for example 1-|-HT, where 1 is the value stored in a custom page property, while HT is the value displayed in the Globalization Tool.

This value will be stored in a custom page property that you create. For instructions, see Creating a Page Property to Store Custom Translation-Status Values.

Optional. If you want to retrieve the workflow list from the SDL TMS server, then at the bottom of the page, enter the URL for your SDL TMS instance in the SDL TMS URL field.
At the bottom of the page, click Save Configuration.
In the Lionbridge Connector rail, click Admin Tools > LSP and Keys.

The LSP and Keys page opens. For more information about this page, see Editing a License Key.

In the LSP and License Keys section of page, click Edit beside the SDL TMS configuration.
In the LSP Type dropdown list, select SDL TMS.

At the bottom of the page, click Update to save this change.

For more information about the LSP & Keys page, see Editing a License Key.

Test this configuration by sending encrypted content for translation. For detailed instructions, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager User Guide.

Important: When you send a job for translation, in the Choose LSP list, verify that all the configurations you added on the TMS GUID Config page are displayed.

1.4 - Post-Installation Tasks

After installing the Connector, you complete the tasks below to verify that your installation was successful. Important: The Adobe Experience Manager admin user must perform the post-installation and configuration tasks for the first time after installation.

1.4.1 - Configuring the Data Folder and Database Connection

Note: This section is not applicable to the AEM Cloud Connector.

After installing the Connector, you configure the database connection and the data folder, and then you restart the Connector bundle, so that you can verify that all Connector nodes are active.

Recommended for MySQL and Microsoft SQL Server databases. Set your default database collation as follows:

MySQL and Oracle 11g/12c: utf8_general_ci
Microsoft SQL Server: SQL_Latin1_General_CP1_CI_AS

Note: This is highly recommended to ensure that content includes local characters.

Note about support for hexadecimal emoji characters: To support hexadecimal emoji characters, set your default database collation to: utf8mb4_unicode_ci. For a list of supported hexadecimal emoji characters, see http://www.unicode.org/emoji/charts/full-emoji-list.html. For complete instructions, contact Lionbridge Connector Support. For details, see How to Contact Lionbridge Connector Support.

Note: The Connector versions 4.0.3 and higher supports Microsoft SQL Server 2012 and higher versions, and does not support Microsoft SQL Server 2008 and 2008 R2 versions.

Click Admin Tools > Configuration in the Lionbridge Connector rail to open the Configuration page. For information on opening the Lionbridge Connector rail, see Configuring the Connector.
In the JDBC SQL Connection section, configure the Connector’s database connection. For detailed instructions, see JDBC SQL Connection.

In the Folder and Permissions section, configure the Connector’s data folder. For detailed instructions, see Folder and Permissions.

1.4.2 - Verifying that the Bundle and All Connector Components Are Active

Note: This section is not applicable to the AEM Cloud Connector.

You must access the Apache Felix Web Console to verify that the bundle and all 24 Connector components are installed and active.

Note: The Apache Felix Web Console is not available in the Adobe Experience Manager Cloud.

Verifying the bundle

In your browser, navigate to: /system/console/bundles on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

The Adobe Experience Manager Web Console Bundles page opens.

In the Search box in the top-left corner of the page, type clay, and click Apply Filter.

The Connector bundle is displayed.

Verify that the Connector bundle has active status.

Verifying the Connector components

In your browser, navigate to: /system/console/components on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

The Adobe Experience Manager Web Console Components page opens. This page displays all components alphabetically, by name.

Scroll down to locate the Connector components, whose names all start with com.claytablet.
Verify that all the following Connector components are installed and active:

com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.impl.CTCAlarmFieldsServiceImpl
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.impl.CTCAuthServiceImpl
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.impl.CTCacheMonitoringServiceImpl
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.impl.CTCCacheServiceImpl
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.impl.CTCConfigServiceImpl
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.impl.CTCDataServiceImpl
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.impl.CTCDownloadServiceImpl
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.impl.CTCEventServiceImpl
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.impl.CTCInitServiceImpl
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.impl.CTCJDBCPoolServiceImpl
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.impl.CTCLocalTMServiceImpl
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.impl.CTCLogServiceImpl
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.impl.CTCPageServiceImpl
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.impl.CTCPipeProcessServiceImpl
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.impl.CTCPrepareServiceImpl
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.impl.CTCQueueScheduleServiceImpl
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.impl.CTCRolloutCheckServiceImpl
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.impl.CTCStatusServiceImpl
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.impl.CTCTaskServiceImpl
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.impl.CTCUpdateTMServiceImpl
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.impl.CTCUploadServiceImpl
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.impl.CTCWordsCountServiceImpl
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.service.configMonitor.CTConfigMonitor
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.service.PublishEventHandle.PublishEventCTHandler
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.service.RolloutEventHandle.RolloutEventCTHandler
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.service.UserPermissionChangeEventHandle.UserResourceChangeListener
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.workflow.RestoreCTCUnlockedProcess
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.workflow.RolloutCTCQueueProcess
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.workflow.RolloutCTCTranslationProcess
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.translationapi.impl.config.DummyTranslationAdapterFactory
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.translationapi.impl.CTCTranslationJobManagerImpl
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.translationapi.impl.CTCTranslationServiceFactoryImpl

1.4.3 - Verifying that the Connector Nodes are Installed

Note: This section is not applicable for the AEM Cloud Connector. Refer to the Adobe’s Debugging AEM as a Cloud Service with Repository Browser documentation for AEM Cloud debugging.

After installing the Connector, you must access the CRXDE Lite interface to ensure that all 12 Connector nodes are installed.

Do one of the following:

In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click Tools in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. Then, in the Navigation page, click CRXDE Lite.
In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click CRXDE Lite in the right pane.
In your Web browser, navigate to /crx/de/index.jsp on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

CRXDE Lite opens.

In the navigation pane on the left, navigate to /etc/ctctranslation.
Verify that the following 16 nodes are present:

ctcconfig_InitFields
ctcstatus
fields4trans
ctcconfig_ContentTypes
TransOptions
UI_ShowOptions
sidekickUI
ctaddlanguages
PageOptions
profiles
ctcconfig
debug
teamprofiles
lspkeys
crypt
license keys

Note: The logback.xml file is also displayed. This is log configuration file that is injected into the Adobe Experience Manager log service.

View screen capture.

1.4.4 - Configuring Network Settings for a Firewall

Note: This section is not applicable to the AEM Cloud Connector.

Optional step. If you have a firewall, you must configure your ports so that the Connector can communicate with the Content API Platform. The Connector must be able to communicate with the Content API Platform by initiating the following outbound network connections:

Protocol	Port Number	Description	Locations to Configure
HTTPS	Port 443	For secure access to the Content API Platform Services	https://contentapi.lionbridge.com/* https://content-api.staging.lionbridge.com/* https://login.lionbridge.com/* https://fms.lionbridge.com/* https://fms-staging.lionbridge.com/*

Key points:

You can’t edit existing license keys, V5.0 still supports old license keys to retrieve the translations or translation re-deliveries sent out with old license keys. But, you can disable a license key, if you don’t want the connector to retrieve the translations or translation re-deliveries sent out with the key.
You can’t send a translation job with old license key anymore, you can only use new CAPI keys to send content for translation.

1.5 - Configuring the Connector

You configure the Connector for Adobe Experience Manager mostly via the Lionbridge Connector rail, as described below.

Log in to Adobe Experience Manager with the admin account to start configuring the Connector.
Do one of the following:
- In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click the Tools icon and then click Lionbridge Connector in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. (This opens the Connector in a new browser tab.)
- In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, scroll down and click Lionbridge Connector in the right pane.
- In your Web browser, navigate to /content/ctctranslation/status.html on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

The Translation Status page opens.

(This is the Drop-down text)

In the Lionbridge Connector rail, click Admin Tools.

This displays the Admin Tools menu options. You can perform most Connector configuration changes using these tools.

Note: After the Connector is installed, you must start configuring the Connector by selecting Admin Tools > Configuration. If you do not begin with this, subsequent configuration options will not be available. For details, see Configuring Connector Global Settings.

The following menu options are available:

Menu Option	Purpose	For Details, See…
Configuration	Configure Connector global settings, including translation options.	Configuring Connector Global Settings
Language Mapping	Configure the language branches in the Web site structure where the Connector returns translated content, and configure the language lists displayed in Sidekick and the Bulk Translation wizard.	Configuring Connector Languages
Component Mapping	Configure the types of components and fields that the Connector can send out for translation when you send out content for translation.	Configuring which Components and Properties to Send Out for Translation
LSP and Keys	Configure the translation provider and the license keys. Migrate license keys to the new license server.	Configuring Translation Providers and License Keys
Advanced Settings	Configure: a page property for storing custom translation-status values for translated pages which metadata is available for copying and translation (from the Globalization Tool) which DAM (digital-asset) metadata is available for updating (from the Globalization Tool) SEO flags to include in the XML translation files which fields are available to generate the Field Report (from the Globalization Tool) which workflows are available to run on multiple pages (from the Globalization Tool) which user group has permission to perform specific actions in the Globalization Tool	Configuring Advanced Settings in the User Interface
Team Profiles	Define sets of Connector users who are allowed to send content out for translation from the specified source languages, to the specified source languages, using the specified translation providers.	Configuring Team Profiles
Search Agents	Configure search agents to collect pages for translation in the Bulk Translation wizard.	Configuring Connector Search Agents
Queue Schedulers	Schedule translation jobs that send out content for translation from the Translation Queue.	Scheduling Translation Jobs to Send Out Content from the Translation Queue
TMS GUID Config	Configure the TMS GUID (global unique identifier), which is required for the following features when using the SDL TMS Add-On for the Connector: supporting multiple configurations for SDL TMS viewing custom translation-status values for SDL TMS when viewing job status in the Translation Status page	Installing the Add-On for SDL TMS
Help	Open the home page of the Connector documentation (http://connectors.lionbridge.com/docs/Online_Help_Only/Product_Pages/AEM.htm) in a new Web browser tab.	N/A

The following additional configuration steps are optional:

Configuration	For Details, See…
Subscribe to receive email notifications when new components are added to your site or when previously deleted components are added back. This is useful if you are planning to add new components in the future.	Subscribing to Email Notifications about New Fields and Components
Configure Adobe Experience Manager user permissions for translation users.	Configuring Adobe Experience Manager User Permissions for Translation Users
Configure the frequency that the Connector checks for processing, sending, and receiving translations.	Configuring the Service Components
Configure custom content types, using CRXDE Lite.	Configuring Custom Content Types
Configure the rollout feature.	Configuring the Rollout Feature
Configure content collection from Blueprint pages.	Enabling Content Collection from Blueprint Pages
Configure which content the Connector includes in TM (translation memory) updates.	Configuring the TMX to Include the Original Translation
Configure which properties to exclude from translation.	Excluding Properties from Translation
Configure all jobs to pause before the Connector sends them out for translation.	Configuring All Jobs to Pause
Configure the Connector to automatically listen to publish events and add published pages to the Translation Queue.	Configuring Catching Pages from Publish Events to the Translation Queue
Configure which properties of i18n dDictionary items and tags to collect for translation when using the Bulk Translation wizard.	Configuring which Properties of i18n Dictionary Items and Tags to Collect for Translation
Configure the translation settings for digital assets.	Configuring Translation Settings for Digital Assets
Create a custom asset handler that modifies the translation settings of specific asset types.	Creating a Custom Asset Handler

1.5.1 - Configuring Connector Global Settings

To configure Connector global settings, click Admin Tools > Configuration in the Lionbridge Connector rail to open the Configuration page. For information on opening the Lionbridge Connector rail, see Configuring the Connector.

The configuration options are organized into the following sections:

Configuration Section	Purpose
Server URL	Specify the base URL that is used to generate a full page review URL.
Network Configuration	Specify the network configuration details for proxy server implementations.
Translation Platform	Enter the CAPI Client ID and CAPI Client Secret, which receives and routes content between the Connector and translation providers through CAPI. Note: In general, you configure the license immediately after installation.
JDBC SQL Connection	Configure the JDBC SQL connection to the Connector database. Note: In general, you configure the database connection immediately after installation.
Freeway Config	If Lionbridge Freeway is your translation provider, configure its credentials and Freeway-specific settings.
Folder and Permissions	Configure the Connector data folder and its permissions. Note: In general, you configure the Connector data folder immediately after installation. > Note: This option is not applicable to the AEM Cloud Connector.
Translation Settings	Configure translation-specific options.
In-Context Preview Optional	Configure the settings for the In-Context Preview feature. This feature enables those without Adobe Experience Manager access (such as translators) to preview items in the XML files for translation as Adobe Experience Manager would render them.
Mail Server Settings	Specify the email settings for notification emails that the Connector can send.
Log Service	Specify the Connector log settings.
Agent Services	Configure the settings for the ctcPrepareService and ctcUploadService services.
Encryption Keystore (Lionbridge Freeway and SDL TMS only)	Specify the keystore location and password for content encryption and decryption.
UI and Default Settings	Specify the default user interface settings that are displayed to users, and configure the Connector to support editing multiple versions of a source page concurrently.

Note: For the AEM Cloud Connector, Server URL, Network Configuration, JDBC SQL Connection, and Encryption Keystore are not applicable.

When you are done, you can perform the actions described below. The corresponding buttons are displayed at the bottom of the Configuration page:

To export all your configuration settings, from all configuration pages, click Export All Configurations. The Connector downloads the XML files as a single ZIP file. By default, these files are downloaded to the following location: AEM_QuickStart_Folder\CTC_Configs\Export. For a detailed description of the exported files and how to reimport them, see Automatically Updating Your Connector Configuration,
To export your configuration settings (excluding the translation options) as an XML file, click Export Configuration. The Connector downloads the file.
To export your translation options as an XML file, click Export Translation Options. The Connector downloads the file.
To update the Connector with changes to Adobe Experience Manager users or groups, click Reload Cache. This facilitates Connector access for newly added or modified users or groups.
To save your changes to the Configuration page, click Save Configuration.

1.5.1.1 - Server URL

The Server URL section of the Configuration page specifies the base URL that is used to generate a full page review URL.

Configuration Option	Description
Server Base URL	This is the base URL that is used to generate a full page review URL. For example, if the URL of the Adobe Experience Manager server is http://www.xxx.com:4502, then the full URL of page /content/www/product is http://www.xxx.com:4502/content/www/product.html in the file for translation.

1.5.1.2 - Network Configuration

The Network Configuration section of the Configuration page specifies the network configuration details for proxy server implementations.

Configuration Option	Description
Use Proxy Server	Indicates whether the Connector uses a proxy server. If this is No, the other settings in this section are not required.
Proxy Host	The IP address or domain name for the proxy server.
Proxy Port	The port number for the proxy server.
Need Authentication	Indicates whether authentication is required to access the proxy server. If this is No, the remaining settings in this section are not required.
[Proxy Auth] User	The user name for authentication to the proxy server.
[Proxy Auth] Password	The password for authentication to the proxy server.
[Proxy Auth] Domain	The domain for authentication to the proxy server.

To verify the network configuration and credentials for a proxy server, click the Test button. After testing, a message box indicates whether your configuration passed the test.

1.5.1.3 - Translation Platform

The Translation Platform section of the Configuration page contains the CAPI Client ID and CAPI Client Secrete, which receives and routes content between the Connector and translation providers through CAPI.

Configuration Option	Description
License ID (Optional)	For backward compatibility with the Lionbridge Clay-Tablet Platform; Enter the license ID from the License_ID.txt file in the package you downloaded. For details, see Downloading the Delivery Package.
CAPI Client ID	Enter the CAPI (Content API) Client ID provided by the Connector’s Support team.
CAPI Client Secret	Enter, or leave empty, the CAPI (Content API) Client Secret provided by the Connector’s Support team.
CAPI Base URL	Enter the CAPI (Content API) Base URL provided by the Connector’s Support team. In the case of leaving it empty, the connector will automatically identify the correct value.

1.5.1.4 - JDBC SQL Connection

Note: This section is not applicable to the AEM Cloud Connector.

The JDBC SQL Connection section of the Configuration page configures the JDBC SQL connection to the Connector database.

The options in this section configure the JDBC SQL connection to the Connector database. The Connector supports the MySQL, Microsoft SQL Server, Oracle, and PostgreSQL databases.

Important: Every Adobe Experience Manager server with the Connector installed needs its own Connector database. Mirrored or load-balanced servers can point to the same Connector database.

Configuration Option	Description
JDBC SQL Driver class	Enter the appropriate configuration parameter for your database implementation: For Microsoft SQL Server, enter: com.microsoft.sqlserver.jdbc.SQLServerDriver. For MySql, enter: com.mysql.jdbc.Driver. For Oracle, enter: oracle.jdbc.driver.OracleDriver. For PostgreSQL, enter: org.postgresql.Driver.
JDBC Connection URL	Enter the appropriate configuration parameter for your database implementation: For Microsoft SQL Server, the URL should look like: jdbc:sqlserver://192.168.1.66:1433;databaseName=ctctranslation;. For MySQL Server, the URL should look like: jdbc:mysql://192.168.1.90:3306/ctctranslation?characterEncoding=UTF-8. For Oracle, the URL should look like: jdbc:oracle:thin:@//192.168.1.66:1521/CTCTRANSLATION. - For PostgreSQL, the URL should look like: - jdbc:postgresql://localhost:5432/ctctranslation?charSet=utf-8 if SSL is not required - jdbc:postgresql://localhost:5432/ctctranslation?charSet=utf-8&ssl=true if SSL is required Note: You can use the DNS name or IP address of the server where the PostgreSQL database resides.
Login name	The name for logging in to the SQL database.
Login password	The password for logging in to the SQL database.

General notes: In the examples above, 192.168.1.66 is the IP address of the database server. Alternatively, you can enter the domain name of the database server.

Notes for MySQL users: Ensure that characterEncoding=UTF-8 is configured for MySQL. 3306 is the default port of MySQL Server. If your database server uses a different port, change the port number in the example to match your port number.

Note for Microsoft SQL Server users:

1433 is the default port of the Microsoft SQL Server. If your database server uses a different port, change the port number in the example to match your port number.
The Connector versions 4.0.3 and higher do not support Microsoft SQLServer 2008 and 2008 R2 versions.

Note for Oracle users: 1521 is the default port of the Oracle DB Server. If your database server uses a different port, change the port number in the example to match your port number.

To verify the JDBC connection and credentials, click the Test button. After testing, a message box indicates whether your configuration passed the test. This message box also displays a list of all Adobe Experience Manager instances that access this Connector database, and when the database was last accessed, which facilitate troubleshooting.

Upgrading the database while upgrading your version of the Connector

If upgrading the database fails while upgrading your version of the Connector, the Errors and SQL Scripts buttons are displayed:

Click Errors to view the related error messages.
Click SQL Scripts to download the generated SQL scripts. A DBA can then run the scripts.

1.5.1.5 - Freeway Config

If Lionbridge Freeway is your translation provider, the Freeway Config section of the Configuration page configures its credentials and Freeway-specific settings.

Note: This section is displayed and relevant only if you are using the Connector’s add-on for Lionbridge Freeway.

Configuration Option	Description
Freeway Auth URL	The URL where Lionbridge Freeway provides the authentication service. This is `https://fwapi.lionbridge.com/obvibundles/freewayauth.asmx`.
Freeway Service URL	The URL where Lionbridge Freeway provides the analysis code service. This is `https://fwapi.lionbridge.com/obvibundles/service.asmx`.
Login Name	The login name for the Freeway server.
Login Password	The login password for the Freeway server.
Test	Click this to test the Freeway login credentials, above. After testing, a message box indicates whether the credentials passed the test.
Freeway Analysis Codes	Each check box indicates whether to display the corresponding analysis-code field to users when they send out content for translation to Lionbridge Freeway. Require Value 1: If this check box is selected, the first analysis code configured for your company (for example, region) must be displayed to users when sending content to Freeway. Require Value 2: If this check box is selected, the second analysis code configured for your company (for example, department) must be displayed to users when sending content to Freeway. Require Value 3: If this check box is selected, the third analysis code configured for your company (for example, priority) must be displayed to users when sending content to Freeway. Warning: This configuration is required for full integration between the Connector and Freeway. Otherwise, the Connector cannot retrieve and display analysis code options, and the user cannot specify analysis codes for projects submitted to Freeway. However, even without this configuration, the Connector can still send submitted content to Freeway.
Use Analysis Codes as Queue Metadata	Indicates whether to use only Level-2 queue metadata as analysis codes. Select this check box to display the following user interfaces: The Options page of the Bulk Translation wizard includes the Queue Metadata dropdown list, where users can select the Queue Metadata analysis code for content items. The Translation Queue includes the Metadata dropdown list, for filtering content items by the Level-2 queue metadata analysis code. and the Metadata column heading, for indicating the analysis code for an item displayed in the Queue. The Re-send translation job dialog box includes the Queue Metadata dropdown list, where users can select the Queue Metadata analysis code for content items. The Sidekick wizard includes the Queue Metadata dropdown list, where users can select the Queue Metadata analysis code for content items.
Include instructions in content	Indicates whether the Connector sends the content of the Special Instruction field to Freeway as content in the XML translation files.
Include instructions in metadata	Indicates whether the Connector sends the content of the Special Instruction field to Freeway as metadata.
Summarize notes in instructions	Indicates whether the Connector merges any notes about individual content files into the instructions it sends to Freeway. Note: If you select this check box, you must select either or both of the Include instructions in content and Include instructions in metadata check boxes. Otherwise, the content will not be delivered to Freeway.

1.5.1.6 - Folder and Permissions

Note: This section is not applicable to the AEM Cloud Connector.

The Folder and Permissions section of the Configuration page configures the Connector data folder and its permissions.

Configuration Option	Description
[Translation User] Server Group ID	Select the ID of the Adobe server group whose members can submit content from the Bulk Translation wizard only to the Translation Queue. The members cannot send out content directly for translation or submit content from Sidekick.
[Translation Submit] Server Group ID	Select the ID of the Adobe server group whose members can submit translation jobs from the Bulk Translation wizard or Sidekick to the Translation Queue and send out content directly for translation.
[Translation Admin] Server Group ID	Select the ID of the Adobe server group whose members can send out jobs for translation, configure the Connector, and remove completed translation jobs and statuses.
Display all jobs and Delete button for non-admin users	To display the Delete button and all jobs in the Status tab of the Translation Status page to users who are not members of the Translation Admin group, select this check box. Note: If you do not select this check box, then only users who are members of the Translation Admin group can access the Delete button and view all jobs.
[Job Quote] Can be approved/rejected by	Select the user group whose members can approve or reject translation job quotes.
Data Folder (Optional)	Optional. This is the path to the folder you created, where Connector will store translation data. For details, see Creating the Connector Folders. For Microsoft Windows, the path must end with , for example, c:\ctcdata. For UNIX, including Linux, or Mac, the path must end with /, for example, /usr/share/ctcdata/. Note: The files/update subfolder should have full access permissions for Java processes. To verify that this path is correct, click the Test button. After testing, a message box indicates whether your configuration passed the test. > Note: This feature is not applicable to the AEM Cloud Connector.
Logs	To save the log files in the logs sub-folder of the folder specified in the Data Folder (Optional) field, select this check box. Note: If you do not select this check box, the log files are saved in crx-quickstart/logs.

1.5.1.7 - Translation Settings

The Translation Settings section of the Configuration page configures translation-specific options.

Configuration Option	Description
Project Identifier	The project name, as it will be displayed in the Translation Status page. If you leave this field blank, the project name is concatenated with the username and the date and time stamps in translation projects your company submits for translation. Recommendation: Enter your company name as the project identifier.
MAX # pages per File	This setting determines the maximum number of Adobe Experience Manager pages that the Connector packs into a single XML file for translation. You can adjust the number to better suit your translation requirements. Note: Translation providers translate an entire XML file before returning it. Therefore, it takes more time to translate an XML file with more pages packed into it than an XML file with fewer pages packed into it. Specifying a lower maximum number of pages per file generally results in a faster turnaround time. The default value is 100, which means the Connector will package content from 100 Adobe Experience Manager pages into a single XML file. Recommendation: Discuss this with your translation provider.
Submit user name and email as job metadata	This setting determines whether the Connector includes or excludes a submitter’s username and email address when submitting a job for translation. By default, this check box is not selected, which means the Connector excludes a submitter’s username and email address when submitting a job for translation. This feature supports the EU’s General Data Protection Regulation.
Catch Rollout Pages to [Rollout] Queue	Select this check box to enable users to send content to the Translation Queue when using Adobe Experience Manager’s MSM Rollout functionality. If this check box is selected, when users roll out pages, the Connector automatically sends content to the Translation Queue. Note: Alternatively, you can use the CTCRolloutTranslation workflow to enable this functionality. For details, see Viewing the Rollout Workflow. For information about when to use which configuration method, see Configuring the Rollout Feature.
Catch Published Workflow Pages to Queue	Select this check box to automatically catch pages published by a workflow and send them to the Translation Queue. Note: This requires adding the Add Published Page to Translation Queue step to your workflow. To do this, you add the Type: Process step, Process: com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.workflow.PublishCTCQueueProcess workflow step to your workflow, and then you use this workflow to publish, instead of using Adobe Experience Manager’s built-in publish feature. For detailed instructions, refer to the Adobe Experience Manager documentation, at https://docs.adobe.com/docs/en/aem/6-2/develop/extending/workflows/step-ref.html. Note about settings for this feature: You configure the source and target languages and the translation settings for this feature in the Configuration for Catching Published Pages to Queue section of the Advanced Settings page. For detailed instructions, see Configuring Translation Settings for Catching Pages to the Translation Queue.
Catch Pages from Publish Event to Queue	Select this check box to automatically listen to publish events and add published pages to the Translation Queue. Note: To display this option, you must create the ShowCatchPublishEventPageToQueueInCTConfig property in /etc/ctctranslation/ctcconfig. For detailed instructions, see Configuring Catching Pages from Publish Events to the Translation Queue. Note about settings for this feature: You configure the source and target languages and the translation settings for this feature in the Configuration for Catching Published Pages to Queue section of the Advanced Settings page. For detailed instructions, see Configuring Translation Settings for Catching Pages to the Translation Queue.
Remove Control Characters	Some control characters, such as 0X10 and 0X13, will cause an XML file to be invalid. However, some translation providers and translation management systems may not be able to handle control characters. This option instructs the Connector to automatically remove all control (non-printing) characters (0x00-0x1F) from an XML file before sending it out for translation.
Translate Page Annotations	This setting determines whether the Connector sends out page annotations for translation. If this check box is selected, the Connector sends out page annotations for translation. If this check box is not selected, the Connector does not send out page annotations for translation. For information about annotations, refer to the Adobe Experience Manager documentation, at: https://helpx.adobe.com/experience-manager/6-3/sites/authoring/using/annotations.html.
Translate Dependent CF	This setting determines whether the Connector sends out for translation Content Fragments that are referenced in pages, Experience Fragments, and adaptive forms. If this check box is selected, the Connector sends out for translation Content Fragments that are referenced in pages, Experience Fragments, and adaptive forms. If this check box is not selected, the Connector does not send out for translation Content Fragments that are referenced in pages, Experience Fragments, and adaptive forms.
Save Translation to Local TM	This setting determines whether the translated content is stored at a property level in the local TM (translation memory). You can view these properties in CRXDE Lite. If this check box is selected, the translated content is stored at a property level in the local TM. If this check box is not selected, the translated content is not stored at a property level in the local TM.
Language Conversion (URL Reference)	For fields in Adobe Experience Manager pages that contain only internal URLs to sites hosted on the same Adobe Experience Manager instance, the Connector can automatically find the referring target URL and exclude this field from the page translation process. Select this check box if the entire field is a URL reference, for example, /content/www/en/us/products, in a field of a page that will be translated to French, and there is no <a> link tag. In this scenario, the Connector treats this field as a URL reference field, and it does not send out this field for translation. It automatically converts the URL to /content/www/fr/fr/products for the French version of the content. Clear this check box if you want the Connector to send out this field for translation. Note: If the sites use different language structures, for example, one site uses en and the other uses en-US, you must configure the languages using the Group, Base CRX Path, and Reference CRX Path columns in the Language Mapping page. For details, see Configuring Connector Languages.
Language Conversion (Content Link)	For fields in Adobe Experience Manager pages that contain internal links to sites hosted on the same Adobe Experience Manager instance, the Connector can automatically convert these internal links to point to the corresponding pages in the target language. Select this check box to convert the link to the corresponding target page. For example, if you are translating English to French, a link that was previously to another English page will now point at the corresponding French page. Clear this check box to maintain the link to the page in the source language. For example, if you are translating English to French, a link that was previously to another English page will still point at the original English page. Note: If the sites use different language structures, for example, one site uses en and the other uses en-US, you must configure the languages using the Group, Base CRX Path, and Reference CRX Path columns in the Language Mapping page. For details, see Configuring Connector Languages.
Language Conversion option	- Select this check box to convert the URL references and the content links in a page to the corresponding target language even if the target folder does not exist. In this case, the URL references and the content links point to the Target language after a successful translation in the corresponding target page. Clear this check box if you do not want the language conversion for the URL references and content links in a page to target language. In this case, even after the successful translation in the corresponding target page, the URL references and content links point to source language.
Send translation events	Select this check box to prevent or enable writing Connector translation events to OSGi events. These events occur when a page translation status changes. By default, this check box is cleared, so that these events are not written to OSGi events.
“Send-Out” Notification	Select this check box if you want the Connector to send an email notification when it sends out a page for translation.
Email addresses for receiving “Send-Out” Notification	Comma-separated email addresses that will receive notification emails when the Connector sends out a page for translation.
“Completed” Notification	Select this check box if you want the Connector to send an email notification when a page translation has been completed.
Email addresses for receiving “Completed” Notification	Comma -separated email addresses that will receive notification emails when a page translation has been completed.

Note about email notifications: The above settings are global, so the Connector will send email notifications to these addresses for all translation projects. In the Connector, users can also add email notifications on a project basis. For details, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager User Guide.

Note: The Catch Rollout Pages to [Rollout] Queue configuration option is not available for AEM cloud connector.

1.5.1.8 - Email Notifications for Stuck Jobs

The connector can be configured to send a stuck job notification when a job is sent for translation.

To configure the stuck job notification:

Set the CAPI Job creation time + Delay Threshold hours = Time to send email.
Set Delay threshold hours on Configuration page.
Send a job that will be stuck at ‘sent out’ or ‘In translation’ status.
When job is stuck at ‘sent out’ or ‘In translation’ status, wait for email.

1.5.1.9 - In-Context Preview

The In-Context Preview (ICP) section of the Configuration page specifies the settings for the In-Context Preview feature. This feature enables those without Adobe Experience Manager access (such as translators) to preview items as Adobe Experience Manager would render them.

Note: This feature requires pre-configuration steps to be completed by Lionbridge. Please reach out to connectors@lionbridge.com before filling out any of these settings.

Configuration Option	Description	Sample Value
External Preview URL (for source)	The URL that enables translators or external reviewers to preview the source item on the Connector Preview server. For instructions on configuring this setting, contact Lionbridge Connector Support, as described in How to Contact Lionbridge Connector Support.	https://ct-preview-server-url?chunk={chunkid}&lang={lang}
External Preview URL (for target)	The URL that enables translators or external reviewers to preview the target item the Connector Preview server. For instructions on configuring this setting, contact Lionbridge Connector Support, as described in How to Contact Lionbridge Connector Support.	https://ct-preview-server-url?chunk={chunkid}&lang={targetlang}

You can use the following parameters listed in the table below to configure the URLs described above:

Parameter	Description
{lang}	The source language of the Adobe Experience Manager item sent for translation.
{targetlang}	The target language of the translated Adobe Experience Manager item.
{chunkid}	The globally unique ID generated by the Connector, which identifies each translatable field (chunk) in the XML file generated by the Connector.

1.5.1.10 - Automatic Cleanup Translation Jobs

You can set the Delete all completed jobs older than value as shown in the follwoing figure.

The translation jobs older than set numbers of days are deleted.

Note:
The number of days are not calculated by exactly 24 hours but by the total number of days. For example, if you set value as 2 days and send a job today, then the job will be deleted after end of second day that is after 12 am beginning of the third day once the two days are complete.
There is no limit for maximum number of days.

1.5.1.11 - Mail Server Settings

The Mail Server Settings section of the Configuration page specifies the mail-server settings for notification emails that the Connector can send.

The following figure shows the Mail Server Settings option in the AEM Cloud version:

Note: If the Use SendGrid Mail Service checkbox is not checked, Use Experience Mail Service option is selected by default.

This section is required if you configured the Connector to send notification emails. For details, see Translation Settings.

Configuration Option	Description
Use Experience Manager Mail Service	You can use either Day CQ Mail Service’s email notification settings or the Connector’s own settings to send email notifications from the Connector. - To configure the Connector to use Day CQ Mail Service’s email notification settings, select this check box, and leave the remaining settings in this section blank. For instructions on configuring Day CQ Mail Service’s email notification, refer to https://docs.adobe.com/docs/en/aem/6-1/administer/operations/notification.html#Configuring. Note: The Connector uses only the Day CQ Mail Service. The other settings described on the Adobe Experience Manager page are not relevant. - To configure the Connector to use its own email notification settings, clear this check box, and populate the rest of the settings in this section, as described below.
Note: The following settings are relevant only if the Use Experience Manager Mail Service check box, described above, is cleared.
SMTP Host	The IP address or domain name of your SMTP server.
SMTP Port	The port used by your SMTP service.
Need Authentication	Indicates whether the SMTP server needs authentication. If necessary, contact your network administrator for this information.
[SMTP Auth] User	The login name or account if your SMTP server needs authentication.
[SMTP Auth] Password	The password to log in to your SMTP server if it needs authentication.
SMTP STARTTLS	Indicates whether your SMTP server supports the StartTLS protocol. If necessary, contact your network administrator for this information.
Notification email from	The email address from which Connector notification emails will be sent. If this is not specified, the default email address is ctcnotification@clay-tablet.com.

To verify the email settings, click the Test button. After testing, a message box indicates whether your configuration passed the test.
The SMTP server settings are only avaiable for AEM on-premise version. For AEM cloud version, you can use SendGrid mail service on AEM cloud. User must aquire the SendGrid API key to fill in the SendGrid API key field of Mail Server Settings box.

1.5.1.12 - Automatic Split Job to Reduce Memory Usage and Improve Performance

Note: This section is only applicable for AEM cloud connector.

The automatic split job setting splits the job with more than configured number of items to multiple jobs.

1.5.1.13 - Log Service

The Log Service section of the Configuration page specifies Connector log settings.

Configuration Option	Description
Log Level	There are three levels of logging: Info, Debug, and Trace. Recommendation: Initially set the log level to Debug, since this level of logging has all the details of the Connector translation process. This level of detail is required for Lionbridge Connector Support to assist you with any implementation issues. After the end-to-end translation process is running smoothly, you can change this to Info, so that only warnings and errors are logged.
Log Archive (Days)	By default, the Connector maintains 15 days of logs.

Configuration Option

Description

Log Level

There are three levels of logging: Info, Debug, and Trace.
Recommendation: Initially set the log level to Debug, since this level of logging has all the details of the Connector translation process. This level of detail is required for Lionbridge Connector Support to assist you with any implementation issues. After the end-to-end translation process is running smoothly, you can change this to Info, so that only warnings and errors are logged.

Log Archive (Days)

By default, the Connector maintains 15 days of logs.

1.5.1.14 - Agent Services

The Agent Services section of the Configuration page configures the settings for the ctcPrepareService and ctcUploadService services.

Configuration Option	Description
Speed	You can choose a level from 1 to 20 to adjust the load of the ctcPrepareService and ctcUploadService agent services present to your servers. Setting 1 is very fast and therefore more resource intensive. The default value is 1 (fastest). Based on Connector testing, this setting will push CPU usage to 60% on average. You can monitor your server performance, and if the Connector uses too many server resources, you may need to adjust the speed level. Note: This speed setting affects all Connector agent services.
Multiple Threads	This is the maximum number of threads that the Connector can use for the JDBC pool, and to concurrently prepare, send, download, and return translations to Adobe Experience Manager. It is between 1 and 20.

Configuration Option

Description

Speed

You can choose a level from 1 to 20 to adjust the load of the ctcPrepareService and ctcUploadService agent services present to your servers. Setting 1 is very fast and therefore more resource intensive. The default value is 1 (fastest). Based on Connector testing, this setting will push CPU usage to 60% on average. You can monitor your server performance, and if the Connector uses too many server resources, you may need to adjust the speed level.
Note: This speed setting affects all Connector agent services.

Multiple Threads

This is the maximum number of threads that the Connector can use for the JDBC pool, and to concurrently prepare, send, download, and return translations to Adobe Experience Manager. It is between 1 and 20.

1.5.1.15 - Encryption Keystore (Lionbridge Freeway and SDL TMS only)

The Encryption Keystore section of the Configuration page configures the settings for the keystore that is used to encrypt and decrypt content for translation and translated content.

Note about the encryption framework: This is Java Cryptography Extension (JCE). This is an officially released Standard Extension to the Java Platform, which is described here:
https://docs.oracle.com/javase/7/docs/technotes/guides/security/SunProviders.html#SunJCEProvider. For more information, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager User Guide.

Note about the keytool utility: This is Java’s keytool – Key and Certificate Management Tool, which is described here: https://docs.oracle.com/javase/6/docs/technotes/tools/solaris/keytool.html. For more information, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager User Guide.

Configuration Option	Description
Path	The file path of the encryption keystore.
Password	The keystore password.

To verify the keystore password, click the Test button. After testing, a message box indicates whether the password passed the test.

1.5.1.16 - UI and Default Settings

The UI and Default Settings section of the Configuration page specifies the default user interface settings that are displayed to users.

Configuration Option	Description
Translation on Sidekick	This setting determines the user interface displayed when clicking Translate Content on the Page tab of the Sidekick. Some companies prefer a simplified process where users cannot choose advanced translation options, while others prefer to empower their content editors to set various parameters each time they send out content. For instance contributors can choose to ensure source content is not overwritten during the translation process, as it pertains to MSM rollout processes. The following options are available: - Simple UI: Users can submit content to the Translation Queue. All options are displayed in a single dialog box. Advanced translation options are not displayed. - Simple UI with all options: Users can submit content to the Translation Queue. All options are displayed in a single dialog box. Advanced translation options are displayed. - Wizard: Users can either submit content to the Translation Queue or send content out for translation. Options are displayed in a two-page wizard. Advanced translation options are not displayed. This is the default setting. - Wizard with all options: Users can either submit content to the Translation Queue or send content out for translation. Options are displayed in a two-page wizard. Advanced translation options are displayed. This is the default setting. For more information about these options, including screen captures of the user interfaces displayed in Sidekick, see Sidekick Options.
Show options on Bulk UI	This setting determines whether to display the Options page in the Bulk Translation wizard. The Options page enables users to change the following options: - Use Local TM - Select if using Blueprint/Live-copy - Only translate content from locked components - Unlock the component after translated content come back - Allow translate content from Not-Sync’d components - Translate Page Content - Translate Metadata These options are individually configurable, and they are described in the Translation Default Settings section, below.
Show options on Touch UI	This setting determines whether to display the Options tab in the Translate Content page, which opens from Adobe Experience Manager’s Touch-Optimized UI. The Options tab enables users to change the following options: - Use Local TM - Select if using Blueprint/Live-copy - Only translate content from locked components - Unlock the component after translated content come back - Allow translate content from Not-Sync’d components - Translate Page Content - Translate Metadata These options are individually configurable, and they are described in the Translation Default Settings section, below. Note: This is displayed only in Adobe Experience Manager versions 6.3 and higher, and it is relevant only for those versions.
Indicate SEO field in translation file	You can include SEO flags in XML translation files to indicate page field and property translations that must be Search Engine Optimized (SEO). Select the method for including this information in the file: - Yes, use attribute: The Connector adds the SEO_Flag attribute to PropertyContent in the XML file. For example: <PropertyContent IsMultipleValue=“No” NodePath=“jcr:content” PropertyName=“jcr:title” SEO_Flag=“This is a SEO field” <=== this text “This is a SEO field” is configurated in Metadata config> Products </PropertyContent> - Yes, add extra line: The Connector adds a extra PropertyContent to the XML file to indicate that the next field is an SEO field: <PropertyContent IsMultipleValue=“No” NeedTranslation=“false” SEO_Flag=“true”> The next field is a SEO field <=== this text “The next field is a SEO field” is configurated in Metadata config </PropertyContent> <PropertyContent IsMultipleValue=“No” NodePath=“jcr:content” PropertyName=“jcr:title”> Products </PropertyContent> If you select No (the default value), then the Connector does not include SEO flags in the XML translation files. Important: If you specify this setting, you must specify which SEO flags to include in the Page Metadata Configuration section of the Advanced Settings page. For details, see Configuring which Page Metadata is Available for Copying and Translation.
Allow Reference Files for Translation Job	Select this check box to enable users to attach references files (support assets) when sending out a translation job. This determines whether the Reference Files feature is available in the Translation Queue, Bulk Translation Wizard, Globalization Tool, and the Sidekick wizard.
Translate Asset Metadata	Select this check box to enable users to send out properties of digital-asset metadata properties for translation. For more information about this feature, see Configuring Translation Settings for Digital Assets. Important: You must configure the asset properties to send for translation in the Component Mapping page, in the same way that you configure other component. After you click Collect for an asset to add it to the component list, you must click Set for all components to send all components with a specific property for translation. For detailed instructions, see Configuring which Components and Properties to Send Out for Translation
Translate Asset Binary	Select this check box to enable users to send out digital assets for translation, for example, actual JPG or PDF files. For more information about this feature, see Configuring Translation Settings for Digital Assets. Tip: In the Exceptions text field, you can prevent assets with specific file-type extensions or asset paths from being sent out for translation. Separate each file type or path with a comma ( , ), for example: gif,jpg,png,perform.ppt,/products/docs/guide.pdf You can use the exclamation mark ( ! ) wild-card character as a prefix for file names to exclude, for example: !NeedTrans.pdf. Note: When the Connector sends the actual asset for translation, it sends the original rendition. There may be multiple renditions of an asset, for example, there may be multiple versions of an image with different resolutions, such as for Web and print. For more information, refer to “Managing Renditions” in the Adobe Experience Manager documentation, at: https://docs.adobe.com/docs/en/aem/6-3/author/assets/managing-assets-touch-ui.html#Managing%20Renditions.
Show Globalization Tool	Select this check box to display the Globalization Tool menu item in the Lionbridge Connector rail and the corresponding Globalization Tool. You can use the Globalization Tool to perform actions on multiple pages simultaneously. For a detailed description of this feature, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager User Guide.
Use user session in page search	This setting determines whether the Connector uses Adobe Experience Manager’s built-in permission settings so that a user can access only part of the content repository. - To use Adobe Experience Manager’s built-in permission settings, select this check box. - To ignore Adobe Experience Manager’s built-in permission settings, clear this check box (default value). By default, a user can access all content. Tip: You can also limit a user’s access by using team profiles. For details, see Configuring Team Profiles.
Pause job before sending	This setting determines whether the Connector automatically pauses a job before sending it out for translation, after Preparing status (0%) but before Sending status (1%). This is useful if you want to review or export reports of content items, or download the XML files before sending them out for translation. You can resume a paused job in the Translation Status page. - To configure the Connector to automatically pause jobs before sending them out, select this check box. - To prevent the Connector from automatically pausing jobs before sending them out, clear this check box (default value). Note: You can also configure this setting using the PauseBeforeSend property in CRXDE Lite. For details, see Configuring All Jobs to Pause.
Only Translation Admin can pause jobs	This setting determines who can use the pause button in the Translation Status page. You can pause a job before sending it out for translation, after Preparing status (0%) but before Sending status (1%). This is useful if you want to review or export reports about XML files with content items, or download the XML files before sending them out for translation. - To display the pause button only for users assigned to the Translation Admin group, select this check box. -To display the pause button for all users, select this check box (default value).
Disable default language mapping	This setting disable Adobe Experience Manager’s default language mapping feature. - To disable Adobe Experience Manager’s default language mapping, select this check box. - To enable Adobe Experience Manager’s default language mapping, select this check box (default value). Note about adaptive forms: If you are sending out adaptive forms for translation, clear this check box to enable Adobe Experience Manager’s default language mapping. If you are using custom languages, then in the Language Mapping page, use the Identity column to link your custom languages to the corresponding default Adobe languages. For detailed instructions, see Configuring Connector Languages. This step is required because adaptive forms support only the locales defined in Adobe languages.
Open linked pages in	This setting configures whether the Connector opens page-path links in either Adobe Experience Manager’s Touch UI or its Classic UI. These page-path links are displayed in the following Connector interfaces: - Bulk Translation wizard - Translation Queue - Globalization Tool - Translation Status page, Job Details tab
Status UI Default Settings	This sub-section determines the default values for UI elements in the Translation Status page.
Show jobs from past	This setting determines the default date range for displaying translation jobs in the Translation Status page. A job’s date is its submission date. The supported values are: - 1 week - 2 weeks (default value) - 3 weeks - 1 month - 3 months - 1/2 year - 1 year Note: In the Translation Status page, the user can use the Period fields and date choosers to change the date range for displayed translation jobs.
Show jobs submitted by	This setting determine the default value of the Submitted By dropdown list in the Translation Status page. The supported values are: - Me: The page displays only the jobs submitted by the current user. - My team(s): The page displays the jobs submitted by all members of the current user’s team. Note: The user can change this selection in the Translation Status page.
Translation Default Settings	This sub-section determines the default settings of these options when they are displayed in the Bulk Translation wizard, the Translation Queue, the Translate Content page in the Touch-Optimized UI, and in the Sidekick. The Connector also uses these default translation options for catching rollout pages to the Translation Queue, if the Catch rollout pages to [Rollout] Queue check box is selected in the Translation Settings section of the Configuration page. For all these options: - If a check box is selected, then the default value of this option is selected. - If a check box is cleared, then the default value of this option is cleared. Note about the Catch rollout pages to [Rollout] Queue feature: If a check box is enabled, then the option is selected. This feature has no user interface for changing the value. Many of the options in this section are related to Adobe Experience Manager’s MSM (Multi Site Manager) and Rollout features. For a description of these features and related concepts, as well as integration with the Connector, see MSM and Rollout Settings. Note: Depending on your company’s configuration, users may not be able to change these values. For example, if the Show options on Bulk UI check box, described above, is not selected, then users cannot change these settings in the Bulk Translation wizard. In that case, this section determines the default value of these settings.
Use Local TM	This feature determines whether to check each component in the source version of the item for any content changes, and send only changed components out for translation. If a component was previously translated and it has not changed, then the Connector does not send it for translation again: Instead, it uses the stored translation. This feature reduces the quantity of content that the Connector sends to translation providers, which reduces your cost. However, it needs the Connector translation backup data, and it increases the Connector processing time before sending out the items for translation. - If this check box is selected, the Connector checks whether content was already translated before sending it out for translation. - If this check box is cleared, the Connector sends out content for translation without checking whether it has already been translated.
Select if using Blueprint/ Live-copy	This option is relevant when the target pages are MSM (Multi Site Manager) live copy pages, which means that Adobe Experience Manager automatically updates a target page when the corresponding source page changes. It prevents the Connector from overwriting unique source content that already exists in the target pages. This is useful when you are sending a page for translation that has been used in the past to push content to other pages, and includes target page content which has been changed, for example, regionalized. In this scenario you do not want to overwrite the regionalized content as the translation process occurs. Select this option when you do not want the Connector to overwrite components in the target pages that include regionalized content with the newly translated content. - If this check box is selected, the Connector does not overwrite unique source content that already exists in the target pages. - If this check box is cleared, the Connector does overwrite unique source content that already exists in the target pages. Recommendation: Select this check box if you are using the live-copy feature.
Only translate content from locked components	This option enables users to send out only content from locked components for translation. - If this check box is selected, users can send out content for translation only if it is from a locked component. - If this check box is cleared, users can send out content for translation whether or not it is from a locked component. Note: Locked components have an inheritance relationship between a source Blueprint page and the connected live copy page. When sending content for translation using Sidekick, users can choose whether to send for translation the content from locked components, which is inherited from a Blueprint component. This is useful if, for example, the page has both global and regional information and you only want to translate (replace) the global content that is created via a Blueprint page. In this scenario, suppose that the regional content on the page is manually translated in house, and that it has not changed. You would not want to tamper with it. However, using the same scenario, the global content from head office has changed and needs translation. You would select this check box to separate the content and localize only the new, inherited content. Note about Blueprint pages: If the Pickup Content From Blueprint Pages setting is specified, then the Connector always acts as though this option is selected, even if it is not selected. This occurs because only content from locked components are rolled out from Blueprint pages to Livecopy pages. For more information, see UI and Default Settings
Unlock the component after translated content come back	This option automatically unlocks a component after translated content returns. This option is relevant only when the Select if using Blueprint/Live-copy is been selected. After translated content returns, it automatically unlocks a component, which breaks the MSM inheritance. Warning: This breaks the inheritance between the component and its Blueprint page, so that it no longer inherits new content. However, you can use the CTCRestoreOriginalSync workflow to relock the component and recreate the inheritance. For details, see Viewing the Restore Original Sync Workflow. - If this check box is selected, the Connector automatically unlocks a component after translated content returns. - If this check box is cleared, the Connector does not automatically unlock a component after translated content returns.
Allow translated content from Not-Sync’d components	This option enables users to send content for translation even if it is not synchronized. This means it does not have a relationship to a Blueprint page, so it cannot be synchronized with it. This can happen if you are not using the MSM (Multi Site Manager) feature of Adobe Experience Manager, or if this is a page with regionalized content that does not inherit content from a Blueprint page. - If this check box is selected, users can send out content for translation if it does not have a relationship to a Blueprint page. - If this check box is cleared, users cannot send out content for translation if it does not have a relationship to a Blueprint page. Important: The Connector treats certain page properties (`jcr:content`, `jcr:title`, `jcr:description`) as unlocked page properties. Therefore, if you want the Connector to send these page properties for translation, you must select this check box. Recommendation: Select this check box if you are using either the live-copy or the language-copy features. Note about Blueprint pages: If the Pickup Content From Blueprint Pages setting is specified, then the Connector always acts as though this option is selected, even when it is not. This occurs because only content from locked components is rolled out from Blueprint pages to Livecopy pages. For more information, see Enabling Content Collection from Blueprint Pages.
Translate Page Content	Important: To send out words on pages for translation, you must select this option. The corresponding check box is displayed when sending out content for translation from: - the Bulk Translation wizard (only if Pages is selected in the Item Type page of the wizard) - the Translation tab of the Globalization Tool - the Translate Content page in Adobe Experience Manager’s Touch-Optimized UI (relevant only for Adobe Experience Manager versions 6.3 and higher)
Translate Metadata	This option enables users to send out for translation metadata fields that are defined in the Page Metadata Configuration section of the Advanced Settings page. For details, see Configuring which Page Metadata is Available for Copying and Translation. These are properties under the /jcr:content node. The corresponding check box is displayed when sending out content for translation from: - the Bulk Translation wizard (only if Pages is selected in the Item Type page of the wizard) - the Translation tab of the Globalization Tool - the Translate Content page in Adobe Experience Manager’s Touch-Optimized UI (relevant only for Adobe Experience Manager versions 6.3 and higher)
Use Revisioning	Selecting this check box enables the Target Page Revisioning feature, described above. - When this check box is cleared, the Connector ignores the values of the Remove Revisions on Completion and Restore Target Pages while under Translation check boxes, described below. - When this check box is selected, the Connector creates the following revisions of the target page during the translation process, and the job name is part of the revision name: - Before <job name>: The Connector creates this revision before modifying the page to send it out for translation. This is the original target content. - During <job name>: The Connector creates this revision after it sends out the job for translation. This is the source content for translation that the Connector copied to the target, to send out for translation. - Completed <job name>: The Connector creates this revision after the translated content returns from translation and the Connector imports it into Adobe Experience Manager. This is the target page that has been updated with translated content. Note: The page revision name is visible only in Adobe Experience Manager’s Classic UI. In Adobe Experience Manager’s Touch-Optimized UI, the revision is displayed without a name.
Remove Revisions on Completion	If you select this check box, then after the Connector imports the translated content into Adobe Experience Manager, it removes the Before <job name> and During <job name> revisions, described above. The Connector does not remove the Completed <job name> revision, because this is the target page that has been updated with translated content. Note: Relevant only if the Use Revisioning check box, described above, is selected. Otherwise, the Connector ignores this setting.
Restore Target Pages while under Translation	If you select this check box, then as soon as the Connector sends out content for translation, it restores the Before <job name> revision of the page. This revision contains the previously translated version of the page. If you do not select this check box, then the updated source content that has been sent out for translation is the current target content, which is the default Connector behavior. Important: Relevant only if the Use Revisioning check box, described above, is selected. Otherwise, the Connector ignores this setting.

1.5.1.16.1 - Sidekick Options

The following table describes the possible values for the Translation on Sidekick option in the UI and Default Settings section of the Configuration page. This page is described in UI and Default Settings.

Translation on Sidekick Value	Where User Can Submit Content	User Interface
Simple UI	Translation Queue only	dialog box
Simple UI with all options	Translation Queue only	dialog box
Wizard	Translation Queue or directly to translation	two-page wizard
Wizard with all options	Translation Queue or directly to translation	two-page wizard

Screen captures of each option follow. For a detailed description of the translation interface within Sidekick, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager User Guide.

Simple UI

This option enables users to submit content to the Translation Queue. It does not display advanced translation options.

Simple UI with options

This option enables users to submit content to the Translation Queue. It displays advanced translation options.

Wizard

This option enables users to send content either to the Translation Queue or directly out for translation. It does not display advanced translation options. It is a two-page wizard.

Note: You can configure whether by default the wizard sends content to the Translation Queue or directly out for translation. For details, see Configuring the default value of the Submit Translation dropdown list in the Sidekick wizard.

Wizard with options

This option enables users to send content either to the Translation Queue or directly out for translation. It displays advanced translation options. It is a two-page wizard.

Note: You can configure whether by default the wizard sends content to the Translation Queue or directly out for translation. For details, see Configuring the default value of the Submit Translation dropdown list in the Sidekick wizard.

You can configure the default value of the Submit Translation dropdown list in the Sidekick wizard.

To change the default from Add to queue to Send as a new job:
a. In CRX, edit the /etc/ctctranslation/sidekickUI node.
b. Add a new property named skOptionDefaultSubmitType, of type String, with value job.
c. Save all.
d. On the page with Sidekick, press Ctrl and F5 to delete the client-side cache.

The default is now Send as a new job.
To hide the Add to queue value:
a. In CRX, edit the /etc/ctctranslation/sidekickUI node.
b. Add a new property named skOptionHideSubmitType, of type String, with value queue, which is a multi-value property.
c. Save all.
d. On the page with Sidekick, press Ctrl and F5 to delete the client-side cache.

The Add to queue option is no longer displayed.

1.5.1.16.2 - MSM and Rollout settings

Adobe Experience Manager’s MSM and the Rollout Process

Adobe Experience Manager includes the powerful Multi Site Manager (MSM), which facilitates managing multiple versions of web sites. The versions may be region specific, for example, a car company may have a different English version of its web site for each English-speaking country where it sells cars. Typically, one version of the site is considered the “source” site. Content in each target website may have different kinds of relationships to the version in the “source” site:

Some content may be common to all web sites, such as the car company’s history.
Some content may be a mix of common and specific. For example, the company may sell the same cars in many countries, but the cars may have slightly different features in some countries, depending on local regulations.
Some content may be specific to a specific version of the site, such as information about car dealerships in a particular country.

Rollout is a process that propagates the changes made from the source (Blueprint) to the target (live copy). When you roll out a site, Adobe Experience Manager copies the Blueprint (source) to the live copy (target). If the components are locked, then whenever the source content changes, Adobe Experience Manager automatically updates the target content.

The following Adobe Experience Manager concepts are helpful to understanding MSM and rollout, and how to configure and use the Connector accordingly:

Concept	Description
Blueprint	A source template for multiple pages, which can be rolled out.
Live copy	A copy of an existing page or Blueprint, which is the target. Adobe Experience Manager can automatically update the live copy when changes occur to the source. Important: If you use this feature, you must select the Select if using Blueprint/Live-copy option. The Allow translate content from Not-Sync’d components setting is optional.
Locked	Specifies the inheritance relationship between the target and the source. When the source changes, Adobe Experience Manager automatically updates a locked component in the target. In the car company example, this is useful for pages that have the same content in all versions, such as information about the history of the company.
Unlocked	Specifies the inheritance relationship between the target and the source. When the source changes, Adobe Experience Manager does not update an unlocked component in the target. In the car company example, this is useful for regionalized pages that should not be updated, such as a list of local car dealerships.

For more information about these features and the rollout process, refer to the Adobe Experience Manager user documentation, available at: https://helpx.adobe.com/experience-manager/6-4/sites/administering/using/msm-sync.html

Important: For instructions on configuring the Rollout feature, see Configuring the Rollout Feature.

Why Integrate the Connector with Rollout

The Connector extends the MSM functionality by adding the translation component to the rollout feature. This facilitates using rollout not only to manage multiple region-specific sites, but also to manage multiple language-specific sites. The following table describes the advantages of using the Connector with rollout:

	Using Rollout	Not Using Rollout
Process	Roll out pages, which automatically sends them to the Translation Queue.	- Roll out a same-language version. - Translate copied version.
Number of steps	One step.	Two steps.
link between source and content	Source and target can be linked, so when source is updated, changes are automatically sent to the Translation Queue.	No linkage between source and target.

How the Connector Fits into MSM and Rollouts

The Connector does not have its own user interface during rollout: when you roll out content, you use Adobe Experience Manager’s rollout interface. The Connector manages the translation during the rollout based on your company’s settings for the following options:

Only translate content from locked components
Select if using Blueprint/Live-copy
Unlock the component after translated content come back
Allow translated content from Not-Sync’d components

1.5.2 - Configuring Connector Languages

You configure the language branches in the Web site structure where the Connector returns translated content, and you configure the language options for the Bulk Translation wizard and Sidekick.

You must correctly configure all the languages you are using on your site before sending any jobs for translation.

Note about Adobe Experience Manager built-in languages: In Adobe Experience Manager, the Connector provides default language mapping for Adobe Experience Manager built-in languages. Additional setup is not required, and therefore, these languages are not available for further configuration, as shown below. However, you can add additional language mappings, as described in this section.

Note about adaptive forms: If you plan to send adaptive forms for translation, add all required default Adobe built-in languages in this page. Do not rely on the default Adobe language mapping.

Note about i18n dictionary items: If you plan to send i18n dictionary items for translation, you must configure the languages for these items separately, as described in the Adobe Experience Manager documentation, here: https://helpx.adobe.com/experience-manager/6-3/sites/developing/using/i18n-translator.html. In addition, the i18n dictionaries language codes may be different from the language codes used in pages. For details, see: https://helpx.adobe.com/experience-manager/6-3/sites/developing/using/i18n-translator.html#ManagingSupportedLanguages.

Important: Do not change the name of a language or delete a language if there is translation content in the Translation Queue, or if there are translation jobs in progress.

Note: You can also adding custom Connector languages and codes. For details, see Adding Custom Connector Languages and Codes.

Note: There are two types of i18n in AEM.
Used by old AEM version and still works with AEM 6.5, node structured i18n. The language code is just a part of i18n path. Ex.: /apps/[CUSTOMER]/i18n/en, /apps/[CUSTOMER]/i18n/de. If the language code used in path is NOT standard AEM language code, the Language Mapping will need to be define. This is only required if the language code used in path is standard AEM language code. Json based i18n. Ex. /apps/[CUSTOMER]/i18n/en.json, /apps/[CUSTOMER]/i18n/de.json. If the the language code used in file name is a standard AEM language code, then, no Language Mapping is required.

To configure languages for the Connector:

Click Admin Tools > Language Mapping in the Lionbridge Connector rail to open the Language Mapping page. For information on opening the Lionbridge Connector rail, see Configuring the Connector.

Click Add in the top-right corner of the page to add a new language.

A blank row is displayed at the bottom of the list. Enter the new language in this row.
Enter the following information in the appropriate columns:

Note: If you have multiple sites in the same Adobe Experience Manager instance with different language structures (for example, en and en_US), and you want to convert links to point to the corresponding pages in the target language, then you must map the languages for these sites to each other, using the Group, Base CRX Path, and Identity columns, as described below. Otherwise, leave these columns blank. For information about this feature, see the descriptions of the Language Conversion (URL Reference) and Language Conversion (Content Link) check boxes in the Translation Settings section of the Configuration page, in Translation Settings.

Column	Description	Example
Group	Required only if you have multiple sites with different language structures, and if you want to convert links to point to the corresponding pages in the target language. This is the site identifier. For example, if the web1 site has the /content/web1/en/us and /content/web1/fr/fr pages, and the web2 site has the /content/web2/en and /content/web2/fr pages, then you can define two groups, web1 and web2: `web1` is the group for web1-us-en (Reference CRX Path: en/us) and web1-fr-fr (Reference CRX Path: fr/fr). `web2` is the group for web2-en (Reference CRX Path: en) and web2-fr (Reference CRX Path: fr). Note: Do not use the “AEM” built-in group for any custom languages. That group is only for default AEM languages. Maximum length is 50 characters.	Site1
Base CRX Path	Required only if you have multiple sites with different language structures, and if you want to convert links to point to the corresponding pages in the target language. This is the base content path for the group, described above. For example: web1 has the base CRX path: /content/web1. -web2 has the base CRX path: /content/web2. There are additional configuration options: To separate multiple base content paths, use a comma (,) separator: ‘/content/web1/’ , ‘/content/web2/’. To exclude a base content path, add an exclamation mark ( !) prefix: ‘!/content/web1/’. To substitute a wildcard as part of the path, use an asterisk (): ‘/libs/’ , ‘!*/app/’.	/content
Name	The name of the language, which is the language identifier. Note: Do not use a space between the language code and country code. Instead, use an underscore (_).	CA_FR
Identity	Required only if you have multiple sites with different language structures, and if you want to convert links to point to the corresponding pages in the target language. Links the same language across multiple sites. For example, both `web1-us-en` (Reference CRX Path: en/us) and web2-en (Reference CRX Path: en) have the same identity: en-us. Notes about adaptive forms : In the UI and Default Settings sub-section of the Configuration page, clear the Disable default language mapping (6.1+) check box. For details, see UI and Default Settings. If you are translating adaptive forms into a custom language, then enter the corresponding default Adobe language code in this column. This step is required because adaptive forms support only the locales defined in Adobe languages.	en_us
Reference CRX Path	The path to the content for the language in CRXDE Lite. If the CRX content path is similar to /content/geometrixx/en/products, this should be similar to en. If the CRX content path is similar to /content/geometrixx/us/en/products, this should be similar to us/en.	ca/fr
Connector Language	The corresponding Connector language code. Select it from the list. For a list and description of Connector language codes, see Appendix: Language Codes.	French_Canada

Note: Any new language you add is not automatically displayed in the Bulk Translation wizard or in Sidekick. For the language to be displayed there, you must add it to the relevant team profile, as described in Configuring Team Profiles.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 for any additional languages to add.
You can modify the values for any other languages in the list.
You can drag-and-drop the languages on this page to modify the order in which they are displayed in the list of languages for the users.
When you are done, click Save Configuration at the bottom of the page.

This language configuration will be displayed in the Bulk Translation wizard and when accessing the Connector from Sidekick.

To delete a language so that it will no longer be displayed in the Bulk Translation wizard and when accessing the Connector from Sidekick, click the corresponding Del button. A confirmation message box is displayed before the language is deleted.

Tip: To prevent displaying the confirmation message box each time you delete a language mapping, clear the Confirm before delete check box.

To export the language settings to an XML file, click Export at the bottom of the page. The Connector downloads the XML file.

1.5.2.1 - Adding Custom Connector Languages and Codes

The Connector SDK includes a list of pre-defined languages and language codes. If your company wants to use an additional language that does not have a corresponding Connector language and code, then you can create a custom Connector language and language code support.

However, your company will be sending content to a translation management system (TMS) that does not support your new language code. Therefore, you must contact both Lionbridge Connector Support and the translation provider so that they can map your language codes to those supported by the TMS.

Recommendation: Use standard Connector language codes. For a list and description of Connector language codes, see Appendix: Language Codes.

To add a custom language, do one of the following:
- In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click Tools in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. Then, in the Navigation page, click CRXDE Lite.
- In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click CRXDE Lite in the right pane.
- In your Web browser, navigate to /crx/de/index.jsp on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.
CRXDE Lite opens.
In the navigation pane on the left, navigate to /etc/ctctranslation/ctaddlanguages.
Select the sample language node, and copy and paste it as a new node.

Rename the new node, and change the values of the Code and Name properties.

In the CRXDE Lite Menu, click Save All.

The new language code is now available for selection in the Language Mapping page, which is described on Configuring Connector Languages.

1.5.3 - Configuring which Components and Properties to Send Out for Translation

The content of an Adobe Experience Manager page is created from a collection of page components. A component has different properties, which are types of fields. You must configure which components and properties the Connector can send out for translation.

Note: This is required when sending out pages and Experience Fragments for translation. This is not required when sending out adaptive forms, Content Fragments, i18n dictionaries, and tags for translation.

To configure which components and properties the Connector sends out for translation:

Click Admin Tools > Component Mapping in the Lionbridge Connector rail to open the Component Mapping page. For information on opening the Lionbridge Connector rail, see Configuring the Connector.

For information on using this page to subscribe to email notifications when new components are added, see Subscribing to Email Notifications about New Fields and Components.

The Configured Fields for Translation section at the top of the page displays all the components and properties that are currently configured for the Connector to send out for translation.

Optional. You view a list organized either by property, or by the component.
- To view the list organized by property, in the Sort By field, select Property. This is the default setting.
- To view the list organized by component, in the Sort By field, select Component.
Optional. You can instruct the Connector to collect all properties that are in a specific component for translation. Similarly, you can instruct the Connector to collect all components that have a specific property for translation. You can also remove any component or property from the list, so that the Connector does not collect it to send for translation.
- If you are viewing the list organized by property, then the properties are displayed in alphabetical order. Each component that has this property is displayed underneath it. The components are listed alphabetically by path.
  - To instruct the Connector to send all components with a specific property for translation, click the corresponding Set for all components button. The list under the property updates, and the Connector displays [ALL] instead of a list of all components.

Note: When selecting components to instruct the Connector to send digital asset properties for translation, click the corresponding Set for all components button, so that the Connector displays [ALL] instead of a list of all components. Additional steps are required to configure translation settings for digital assets. For details, see Configuring Translation Settings for Digital Assets.

   - To remove a component from the list for a property, select the corresponding check box and click Delete. This prevents the Connector from sending out for translation this property in this component.

If you are viewing the list organized by component, then the components are displayed in alphabetical order. Each property in a component is displayed underneath it. If there are any properties displayed in all components, these are at the top of the list, under [ALL].
- To remove a component from the list, so that the Connector does not send it out for translation, select the corresponding check box and click Delete.
- To remove a property under a component from the list, so that the Connector does not send out that property for translation when it is in that component, select the corresponding check box and click Delete.

Optional. To remove the mapping for all configured components, click Remove All.
Optional. You can export as an XML file the list of fields that the Connector sends out for translation. Click Export at the bottom of this section. The Connector downloads the file, fields4trans.xml.
Optional. You can import an XML or a CSV file:
- You can import a previously exported XML file that is in the same format as fields4trans.xml, described above. This is useful for restoring backed-up properties.
- You can import a CSV file with comma-separated property names. The Connector will add the properties in this file to all components.

Note: The Connector recognizes both ComponentPath and PropertyName as headers and not as actual data.

To import a file:

a. Click Import at the bottom of this section.

The Select a file to upload dialog box opens.

b. Click Choose File.

c. In the browser dialog box that opens, navigate to the XLS or CSV file to import, select it, and click Open, or similar, to close the browser dialog box.

The Select a file to upload dialog box displays the path of the file you selected.

d. Click Upload to upload the file.

The Connector imports the file and updates the configured properties and components.

Optional. To add a string to a property name to instruct the Connector either to send that property for translation or to avoid sending that property for translation, click Property Patterns.

The Patterns for property names subsection is displayed. Add tags to configure one or more of the settings below.

Note: The tags are not case sensitive.

Setting	Description
Prefix of property name indicates translation needed	The string at the beginning of a property name indicating that translation is required.
Including in property name indicates translation needed	The string in the middle of a property name indicating that translation is required.
Suffix of property name indicates translation needed	The string at the end of a property name indicating that translation is required.
Prefix of property name indicates no translation needed	The string at the beginning of a property name indicating that translation is not required.
Including in property name indicates no translation needed	The string in the middle of a property name indicating that translation is not required.
Suffix of property name indicates no translation needed	The string at the end of a property name indicating that translation is not required.

Optional. In the Collect Fields for Translation from Path section, you can add additional properties to the list that the Connector can send out for translation.

a. In the Site path field, specify the highest-level folder that contains the component with the properties you want to include.
- Click the arrow at the end of the field , browse to the folder, and click Select.
- Enter the CRX path of the folder in the following format: /content/www/us/en.
b. Click Collect.

The Connector searches all components and finds the string-type properties (fields) for all items. When it is done, the Connector displays the lists of properties in the specified folder in the Collected Possible Property Fields for Translation list. Under each property, the Connector displays the path of the component where it is located. To the right, the Connector displays the sample value of the string and underneath it, the path of origin of the sample value.

c. Select the check boxes for all the properties you want the Connector to send out for translation.

d. Click Add checked.

These property fields are now displayed in the Configured Fields for Translation section at the top of the page.

In the Collected Possible Property Fields for Translation section, you can also perform the following actions:

To clear all selected check boxes, click De-select all.
To select all check boxes, click Select all.
To subscribe to email notifications when new components are added to your site, click Set alarm. For details, see Subscribing to Email Notifications about New Fields and Components.

1.5.4 - Subscribing to Email Notifications about New Fields and Components

If you are planning to add new components in the future, you can subscribe to receive email notifications when new components are added to your site or when previously deleted components are added back. In these scenarios, you receive an email notification listing the new components, and you can then configure the Connector to send out the new properties for translation.

Subscribing to email notifications about new fields and components is recommended in the following scenarios:

If you want to collect a lot of content for translation, for example, if you are still building your site.
If you are planning to add new components in the future. When new components are added, the specified user receives an email notification listing the new components.

Click Admin Tools > Component Mapping in the Lionbridge Connector rail to open the Component Mapping page. For information on opening the Lionbridge Connector rail, see Configuring the Connector.

For information on using this page to configure which properties and components to send out for translation, see Configuring which Components and Properties to Send Out for Translation.

Click Set alarm.

The Setup alarm for new fields dialog box opens.

In the Site path to search box, type in the path to the content for which to receive email notifications when new components are added. You can add multiple paths in the Site path to search box.
In the Email address to notify box, enter the email address that will receive email notifications when new components are added under the specified path. You can add multiple email addresses in the Email address to notify box.
Click Save.

Every hour, the Connector searches for and collects new components for translation. Whenever the Connector collects new components, it sends an email notification to the specified email address. The email notification is similar to the following:

    From: claytabletqa@gmail.com [mailto:claytabletqa@gmail.com]
    To: smith@example.com
    Subject: Found 2 new Properties

    Found 2 new added Properties.
    1) Property Name: jcr:description
    Value:
    Component: foundation/components/form/text
    Path: /content/geometrixx/en/toolbar/feedback/jcr:content/par/0002
    2) Property Name: options
    Value:
    Component: foundation/components/form/dropdown
    Path: /content/geometrixx/en/toolbar/profiles/edit/jcr:content/par/dropdown

After you receive this email notification, return to the Component Mapping page, and click Load alarm fields. The Collected Possible Property Fields for Translation list displays the collected properties.

Select the check boxes for the properties to add, and click Add checked.

This configures the Connector to send out the selected properties for translation.

1.5.5 - Configuring Translation Providers and License Keys

Lionbridge Connector Support generates the license keys for you using the CAPI Client ID and CAPI Client Secrete ID number you entered in the Translation Platform section of the Configuration page. For details, see Translation Platform. You then configure these license keys in the LSP & Keys page.

Important - Keys: Do not use the same provider keys on multiple Production instances. Otherwise, installation of the same keys on more than one Production server will cause unpredictable behaviour by the Connector resulting in, at least, lost translation content, orphaned projects and inaccurate status reports. You can use the same test provider key on multiple non-Production instances.

In the LSP & Keys page:

If you are upgrading your Connector installation from version 3.x, 4.x to 5.x, you must migrate the license keys for your current translation providers to the new license server. For detailed instructions, see Migrating a License Key.
You can add a license key for a new translation provider. For detailed instructions, see Adding a New License Key.
You can edit a license key for a current translation provider. For detailed instructions, see Editing a License Key.

Note: You must migrate a license key to the new license server before you can edit it.

Tip: To delete a license key, open it for editing, as described in Editing a License Key, and then click Delete.

1.5.5.1 - Migrating a License Key

If you are upgrading your Connector installation from version 3.x, 4.x to 5.x, you can still receive the outstanding job from old license keys but could not send the new job for translation. To obtain your new keys associated with the Client ID and Client Secret ID, contact Lionbridge Connector Support. For details, see How to Contact Lionbridge Connector Support.

Note: Once the migration is successful, you can only use old keys to receive outstanding job but not new job.

To migrate a license key:

To see migrated license key, Click Admin Tools > LSP and Keys in the Lionbridge Connector rail to open the LSP & Keys page. For information on opening the Lionbridge Connector rail, see Configuring the Connector.

The LSP & Keys page opens.

The Legacy and Content API Keys section at the top of the page displays the following information about the translation providers that were configured in an earlier version of the Connector.

Column	Description
Name	The name of the translation provider as it is displayed when users send content for translation.
Provider Account	The legacy license key of the translation provider, which was generated for you by Lionbridge Connector Support.
Platform Account	The key to the Clay Tablet Platform, which was generated for you by Lionbridge Connector Support.
Support Quote	Indicates whether this translation provider supports providing a quote before starting a translation job.
Is Freeway?	Indicates whether this translation provider is Lionbridge Freeway.
Is SDL TMS?	Indicates whether this translation provider is SDL TMS.

Optional. Select your default translation provider and click Save.

Optional. To export and download the information in the LSP and Keys section as an XML file, click Export.

1.5.5.2 - Adding a New License Key

You can add a new license key, for example, if you add a new translation provider.

To add a new license key:

Click Admin Tools > LSP and Keys in the Lionbridge Connector rail to open the LSP & Keys page. For information on opening the Lionbridge Connector rail, see Configuring the Connector.

The LSP & Keys page opens.

Note: If the Legacy Keys Migration section is displayed at the top of the page, you must migrate the license keys for translation providers that were created in an earlier version of the Connector. For detailed instructions, see Migrating a License Key.

In the LSP and License Keys section, click the Add button in the top-right corner.

The New Provider dialog box opens.

The New Provider dialog box in the AEM Cloud version:

Note: For the AEM Cloud Connector, the alias and password fields are not applicable.

Specify the following licensing information:

Field	Description
LSP Name	The name of the translation provider that will be displayed when users send content for translation.
LSP Type	Your translation provider, if displayed. If your translation provider is not displayed, then select Generic. The type of translation provider determines whether additional configuration is required.
Support Quote	This check box indicates whether this translation provider supports providing a quote before starting a translation job.
License Key	The license key of the translation provider, which was generated for you by Lionbridge Connector Support. To populate the list of available license keys, click Retrieve and select the license key for the translation provider. Note: After a key has been configured, you cannot select it again for use. It is displayed in the drop down list as unavailable, in gray. Troubleshooting: - If keys are not displayed in the dropdown list, verify that you entered the license ID in the Translation Platform section of the Configuration page, as described in Freeway Config. - If keys are still not displayed, you may need to configure a proxy server, as described in Network Configuration.
Translation Status	Optional. A custom translation-status value that will be displayed in the page list of the Globalization Tool for all pages translated by this provider. - A single value, such as MT (for machine translation) or HT (for human translation). - A paired value, which is a value-title pair, with the -

When you are done, click Add.

If there are multiple translation providers, the Default LSP dropdown list is displayed at the top of the LSP and License Keys section of the page.
Optional. Select your default translation provider and click Save.

Optional. To export and download the information in the LSP and Keys section as an XML file, click Export.
Optional. The AWS URLs section displays a list of URLs used by the Content API Platform, which is hosted on Lionbridge Envirment. This is useful if you are using a proxy server to control the network traffic, so that you can whitelist these URLs. Click Re-Check to update this list.

Note: If the Connector displays errors about checking LSP keys when sending out content for translation, then instead of whitelisting the entire address, exclude the key names from the URL. For example, enter ctt-platform-prod-us-east-1/*.

1.5.5.3 - Editing a License Key

You can edit information for an active license key, for example, if you want to change the name of the associated translation provider as it is displayed to users when sending out content for translation or when viewing the status of a translation job.

To edit license key information:

Click Admin Tools > LSP and Keys in the Lionbridge Connector rail to open the LSP & Keys page. For information on opening the Lionbridge Connector rail, see Configuring the Connector.

The LSP & Keys page opens.

Note: If the Legacy Keys Migration section is displayed at the top of the page, you must migrate the license keys for translation providers that were created in an earlier version of the Connector. For detailed instructions, see Migrating a License Key.

The LSP and Keys section displays all keys that are available for editing.

To edit a license key in this section, click the corresponding Edit button.

The Edit Provider dialog box opens.

The Edit Provider dialog box in the AEM Cloud version:

Note: For the AEM Cloud Connector, the alias and password fields are not applicable.

Edit any of the following licensing information:

Field	Description
LSP Name	The name of the translation provider that is displayed when users send content for translation.
LSP Type	Your translation provider, if displayed. If your translation provider is not displayed, then select Generic. The type of translation provider determines whether additional configuration is required.
Support Quote	This check box indicates whether this translation provider supports providing a quote before starting a translation job.
License Key	The license key of the translation provider, which was generated for you by Lionbridge Connector Support. To select a different license key, click Retrieve and select the license key for the translation provider. Note: After a key has been configured, you cannot select it again for use. It is displayed in the drop down list as unavailable, in gray. Troubleshooting: - If keys are not displayed in the dropdown list, verify that you entered the license ID in the Translation Platform section of the Configuration page, as described in Freeway Config. - If keys are still not displayed, you may need to configure a proxy server, as described in Network Configuration.
Key JSON	The license key information in JSON format. In general, you should not modify this text, which should be retrieved automatically from the Content API server. However, if your firewall setting blocks access to the Content API server, you may need to input it manually. For assistance, please contact Lionbridge Connector Support, as described in How to Contact Lionbridge Connector Support. If you modify this text, click Test beside the Key JSON box. A message box indicates whether this key passed the test.
Translation Status	Optional. A custom translation-status value that will be displayed in the page list of the Globalization Tool for all pages translated by this provider. - A single value, such as MT (for machine translation) or HT (for human translation). - A paired value, which is a value-title pair, with the `-

When you are done, click Update.

If there are multiple translation providers, the Default LSP dropdown list is displayed at the top of the LSP and Keys section of the page.
Optional. Select your default translation provider and click Save.

Optional. To export and download the information in the LSP and Keys section as an XML file, click Export.
Optional. The AWS URLs section displays a list of URLs used by the Content API Platform, which is hosted on AWS (Amazon Web Services). This is useful if you are using a proxy server to control the network traffic, so that you can whitelist these URLs. Click Re-Check to update this list.

Note: If the Connector displays errors about checking LSP keys when sending out content for translation, then instead of whitelisting the entire address, exclude the key names from the URL. For example, enter ctt-platform-prod-us-east-1/*.

1.5.5.4 - Configuring Translation Providers and License Keys when Installing a New or Updated Connector Package

When you install a new or updated Connector package, you must reconfigure your translation providers and keys. If your keys are displayed in gray and you cannot select them when you attempt to retrieve them, please contact Lionbridge Connector Support to request releasing your keys. For details, see How to Contact Lionbridge Connector Support.

1.5.6 - Configuring Team Profiles

A team profile defines a set of Connector users who are allowed to send content out for translation from the specified source languages, to the specified target languages, using the specified translation providers.

To create a team profile:

Click Admin Tools > Team Profiles in the Lionbridge Connector rail to open the Team Profiles page. For information on opening the Lionbridge Connector rail, see Configuring the Connector.

The Team Profiles page opens, displaying any team profiles that have already been created.

In the top-right corner of the page, click Add.

The page expands, displaying the Profiles section.

Specify the following information about the team profile:

Field/Column	Description
Name	The name of the team profile.
Source Language	Select the check boxes of the source languages in which team members can send out content for translation. The list of available languages is based on the configured languages. For details, see Configuring Connector Languages. Warning: Do not include languages from different groups in a single team profile, because submitted jobs will fail. For example, if you use the rollout feature to submit jobs, then the Connector removes items from the job and it stops, with an error message that the source asset is not found.
Target Language	Select the check boxes of the target languages for which team members can send out content for translation. The list of available languages is based on the configured languages. For details, see Configuring Connector Languages. Warning: Do not include languages from different groups in a single team profile, because submitted jobs will fail. For example, if you use the rollout feature to submit jobs, then the Connector removes items from the job and it stops, with an error message that the source asset is not found.
LSP	Select the check boxes of the translation providers to which team members can send out content for translation. The list of available translation providers is based on the configured translation providers. For details, see Configuring Translation Providers and License Keys.
Adobe Experience Manager Users	Select the check boxes of the Adobe Experience Manager users to include in the team profile.Adobe Experience Manager users are identified by their display names. If a display name is not configured for an Adobe Experience Manager user, the email address is displayed instead.
Adobe Experience Manager Groups	Select the check boxes of the Adobe Experience Manager groups to include in the team profile.
Paths	If one or more paths are specified, then team members can send pages for translation only if the content is in these paths. To add a path, click the plus icon and navigate to the path, and then click Select. To remove a path, select it and then click the minus icon . Note: This feature is supported only for pages. It is not supported for digital assets, tags, and dictionaries (i18n items).
TMS Configurations	User can configure TMS setting as per the requirement.

Click Save.
You can also perform the following optional actions on this page:

To export the team profiles and settings as an XML file, click Export in the top-left corner of this page. The Connector downloads the file, teamprofiles.xml.
To update the list of team profiles, click Refresh in the top-left corner of this page.
To edit an existing team profile, select the team profile in the list, and in the top-right corner of the page, click Edit. Then follow the instructions in steps 3 and 4 above.
To delete a existing team profile, select the team profile in the list, and in the top-right corner of the page, click Delete. A message box confirms that you want to delete the team profile. Click OK to continue.

1.5.7 - Configuring Adobe Experience Manager User Permissions for Translation Users

You configure user permissions in the Permissions tab of the User Admin page on your Adobe Experience Manager instance. In your browser, navigate to /useradmin on your Adobe Experience Manager instance to open this page.

Suppose that your Adobe Experience Manager instance has the following user groups:

Translation Submission
Translation User
Translation Admin

Users assigned to these groups can send content for translation as follows:

User Group	Bulk Translation	Blueprint Rollout	Sidekick
Translation User	Users can send content only to the Translation Queue. The required user permissions are Read, Modify, Create, and Delete.	Users can send content only to the Translation Queue. The required user permissions are: Read, Modify, Create, and Delete.	Users can send content only to the Translation Queue. The required user permissions are: Read, Modify, Create, and Delete.
Translation Submitter	Users can send content either to the Translation Queue or directly out for translation. The required user permission is Read.
Translation Admin	Users can send content either to the Translation Queue or directly out for translation. The required user permission is Read.		Users can send content either to the Translation Queue or directly out for translation. The required user permissions are: Read, Modify, Create, and Delete.

Tip: Ensure that you set up the correct permissions for this group in the Folder and Permissions section of the Configuration page. For detailed instructions, see Folder and Permissions.

1.5.8 - Configuring Connector Search Agents

The Connector can use a search agent to collect pages for translation in the Bulk Translation wizard. The Connector installs the following pre-configured agents:

Page agents:
- Get current page
- Get all children pages
- Get current page and all children pages
Tag agent: Get current and child tags
i18n-dictionary agent: Get i18n

You can create additional custom search agents to find any kind of content in your site for translation.

To make a custom search agent available to the Bulk Translation wizard:

Write a search agent as a Java class and upload it.

This Java class should implement the PageSearchProcess interface. It should use the following method: public List<CollectedPage> collectPages4Translation(String searchRootPath, Session session, PageManager pageManager).

This requires the Connector for Adobe Experience Manager API, which includes sample code. To request this API, contact Lionbridge Connector Support, as described on How to Contact Lionbridge Connector Support.
Upload the search agent you just created. You can do this either by including this in the Connector for Adobe Experience Manager package you install, or you can install it separately using the Apache Felix Web Console, which you access at /system/console/components on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.
Click Admin Tools > Search Agents in the Lionbridge Connector rail to open the Search Agents page. For information on opening the Lionbridge Connector rail, see Configuring the Connector.

The Search Agents page opens, displaying the pre-configured agents.
Click Add in the top-right corner of the page.

The page expands to display the Add a New Page Search Agent section.

In the Add a New Page Search Agent section, add the following information:
- Name: The name that will be displayed for the custom agent in the Search using agent dropdown list in the Bulk Translation wizard.
- Class: The Java class for the custom agent.
Click Test.

A window opens where you enter an Adobe Experience Manager folder path. The Connector then calls the new agent class to search the path you entered. This tests whether the Connector can call the new agent and search successfully for pages.
If the test is successful, click Add at the bottom-right corner of the page to add the custom agent to the user interface of the Bulk Translation wizard.

1.5.9 - Scheduling Translation Jobs to Send Out Content from the Translation Queue

You can create a schedule that sends out translation jobs from the Translation Queue. The schedule defines the parameters for these jobs, including source and target languages, which content items to include, and when to send out the jobs. You can create multiple schedules, each with a different set of parameters for the translation jobs it creates.

To create a schedule that sends out translation jobs from the Translation Queue:

Click Admin Tools > Queue Scheduler in the Lionbridge Connector rail to open the Queue Scheduler page. For information on opening the Lionbridge Connector rail, see Configuring the Connector.

Click Add.

The page expands to display the Queue Schedule box, where you can create a schedule for translation jobs.

Enter the following information and settings for the translation jobs that this schedule sends:

Setting	Description
Name	Your name for this schedule, which sends out translation jobs from the Translation Queue.
Active	Select this check box if the schedule is active, which means that it creates translation jobs based on the parameters and schedule you define below.
Description	Additional information about the translation jobs created by this schedule. This is stored in the CQJobDescription attribute in the XML that the Connector sends to the translation provider.
Quote only	Select this check box to inform the translation provider that you want to receive a quote before the translation process starts. Note: This check box is displayed only if the selected translation provider is configured to support providing a quote before the translation process starts.
Deadline / Days	The number of days requested for receiving the translated item back from the translation provider.
Translation notes	Enter any additional information about translation jobs created by this schedule. This information is sent to the translation provider as a comment in the metadata of the translation package.
Notification Emails	Enter one or more email addresses that will receive notification when the content leaves Adobe Experience Manager and when it returns to Adobe Experience Manager. Use a comma to separate multiple email addresses.
PO Reference	The purchase order reference number for this translation job.
Item Type	Select one or more of the following check boxes to specify the types of content items to include in translation jobs created by this schedule: - Pages: Web pages. - Tags: Metadata assigned to a content item within Adobe Experience Manager (usually a page), which act as keywords or labels attached to that content item. - i18n Dictionaries: Texts and their translations in a CQ5 Translator dictionary. - TIF Assets: Translation files packaged and sent to the Translation Queue by Adobe’s Translation Integration Framework (TIF). These files are packaged in Adobe Experience Manager TIF’s own format. - DAM Assets: Digital assets.
Path Filters	Optional. Enter the base path of content items to include in translation jobs created by this schedule: - To separate multiple base content paths, use a comma (,) separator, for example: ‘/content/web1/’ , ‘/content/web2/' - To exclude a base content path, add an exclamation mark (!) prefix, for example: ‘!/content/web1/' - To substitute a wildcard as part of the path, use an asterisk (), for example: ‘/libs/’ , ‘!*/app/’
Submission Type	Select one or more of the following check boxes to specify how the items to include in translation jobs created by this schedule are submitted to the Translation Queue: - Bulk Wizard: The items (including pages, i18n dictionaries, and tags) were submitted to the queue from the Bulk Translation wizard. - Globalization Tool: The pages were submitted to the queue from the Translation tab of the Globalization Tool. - Sidekick: The pages were submitted to the queue from the Sidekick. - TIF: The pages were submitted to the queue from Adobe’s Translation Integration Framework (TIF). - Touch UI: The pages were submitted to the queue from the Translate Content page in Adobe Experience Manager’s Touch-Optimized UI. Relevant only for Adobe Experience Manager versions 6.3 and higher. - Rollout Process: The pages were submitted to the queue by the CTCRolloutTranslation workflow, which is part of your company’s rollout configuration. - Rollout Events: The pages were submitted to the queue from a rollout event, based on your company’s rollout configuration. - Publish Process: The pages were submitted to the queue by the Add Published Page to Translation Queue step in your workflow, based on your company’s Connector configuration. - Publish Events: The pages were submitted to the queue from a publish event, based on your company’s Connector configuration. - Others: The pages were submitted to the queue in another submission manner, such as a custom pipeline.
Source Language Filters	Optional. By default, the schedule sends content items out for translation in all available source languages. However, you can use this field to restrict the source language(s) of the content items in the translation job. Enter comma-separated language names, as they are defined in the Language Mapping page, described in Configuring Connector Languages.
Target Language Filters	Optional. By default, the schedule sends content items out for translation into all available target languages. However, you can use this field to restrict the target languages of the content items in the translation job. Enter comma-separated language names, as they are defined in the Language Mapping page, described in Configuring Connector Languages.
Translation Job Name	By default, the names of the translation jobs created by this schedule have the following format: QueueScheduler_{date:yyyy-MM-dd HH:mm:ss z} ({totalItems}). However, you can use any of the following tags to change the format: - {sourceLanguage}: The language name, as it is defined in the Language Mapping page. - {targetLanguage}: The language name, as it is defined in the Language Mapping page. - {contentType}: The type of content items, which is one of the values listed in Content Type, described above. - {totalItems}: The total number of content items in the translation job. - {date:yyyy-MM-dd}: Any format defined in Java’s SimpleDateFormat class. For details, see : https://docs.oracle.com/javase/7/api/java/text/SimpleDateFormat.html.
Choose LSP	If multiple translation providers are defined for your company, select the translation provider to whom you want to send this translation job.
Schedule	Specify the days and times to send out a translation job from the Translation Queue. - Minutes: Highlight the minute components of the times to send out a translation job. For example, to send translation jobs every 15 minutes, you can highlight 00, 15, 30, and 45. To highlight multiple values, press and hold the Ctrl button. - Hours: Highlight the hour components of the times to send out a translation job. The hour components are based on a 24-hour clock. For example, to send translation jobs at 9 a.m. and 9 p.m., you highlight 9 and 21. To highlight multiple values, press and hold the Ctrl button. To highlight all hour components, select the corresponding All check box. - Days: Highlight the day components of the dates to send out a translation job. For example, to send translation jobs on the 1st and 15th days of the month, you highlight 1 and 15. To highlight multiple values, press and hold the Ctrl button. To highlight all day components, select the corresponding All check box. - Months: Highlight the month components of the dates to send out a translation job. For example, to send translation jobs in January and July, you highlight those months. To highlight multiple values, press and hold the Ctrl button. To highlight all month components, select the corresponding All check box. - Weekdays: Highlight the weekdays to send out a translation job. For example, to send translation jobs on Mondays and Thursdays, you highlight those weekdays. To highlight multiple values, press and hold the Ctrl button. To highlight all weekdays, select the corresponding All check box.

Click Add.

The schedule is added to the Queue Scheduler list at the top of the page.

This list displays the following information about the schedules in the list:

Name: Your name for the schedule.
Active: A green dot indicates that the schedule is active.
Submission Type: How the items in translation jobs created by this schedule are submitted to the Translation Queue. For a list of submission types, see the previous step.
Item Type: The types of content items to include in translation jobs created by this schedule. For a list of item types, see the previous step.
Path Filter: The base path of content items to include in translation jobs created by this schedule.
Source Filter: If the schedule sends content items in all available source languages, this is blank. If the schedule is restricted to specific source language(s), this displays the comma-separated language names, as they are defined in the Language Mapping page, described in Configuring Connector Languages.
Target Filter: If the schedule sends content items for translation into all available target languages, this is blank. If the schedule is restricted to specific target languages, this displays the comma-separated language names, as they are defined in the Language Mapping page, described in Configuring Connector Languages.

You can do one of the following:

To add another schedule, click Add, and enter the information described in step 3, above.
To edit an existing schedule, click the corresponding edit icon . After you edit the schedule, click Update to save your changes.
To delete, a schedule, click the corresponding delete icon . A message box confirms that you want to delete the schedule. Click OK.

1.5.10 - Configuring the Service Components

You can configure how frequently the Connector checks for processing, sending, and receiving translations.

The ctcPrepareService agent controls the frequency that the Connector checks for processing translations.
The ctcUploadService agent controls the frequency that the Connector checks for sending and receiving translations.

To configure these agents:

If the Adobe Experience Manager Web Console Components page is not already open, then in your browser, navigate to /system/console/components on your Adobe Experience Manager instance to open it.

This page displays all components alphabetically, by name.

Scroll down to locate one of these Connector components in the list:

com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.impl.CTCPrepareServiceImpl
com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.impl.CTCUploadServiceImpl

In the Actions column, click the corresponding Configure button .

The configuration dialog box for the service opens.

In the scheduler.period.name field, you can edit the frequency of this task.

The default value of the ctcPrepareService agent is 30 seconds.
The default value of the ctcUploadService agent is 60 seconds.

You can change this value to meet your particular requirements.

Click Save to save your changes.
If desired, repeat steps 2-5 for the other agent.

1.5.11 - Configuring Translation Settings for Digital Assets

You can send digital assets for translation from the Bulk Translation wizard or the Globalization Tool. Adobe Experience Manager stores digital assets in the following location: /content/dam.

The Connector can send digital assets for translation when they are under a correctly configured language root, for example: /content/dam/geometrixx/en/icons/office-building.png. For more information, refer to “Preparing Assets for Translation” in the Adobe Experience Manager documentation, at: https://docs.adobe.com/docs/en/aem/6-3/author/assets/managing-assets-touch-ui/preparing-assets-for-translation.html.

You configure translation settings for digital assets in the UI and Default Settings section of the Configuration page, which is described in UI and Default Settings:

To configure sending the properties of the asset metadata for translation, you select the Translate Asset Metadata check box.

Important: You must configure the asset properties to send for translation in the Component Mapping page, in the same way that you configure other component. After you click Collect for an asset to add it to the component list, you must click Set for all components to send all components with a specific property for translation. For detailed instructions, see Configuring which Components and Properties to Send Out for Translation

To configure sending the actual asset for translation, such as the JPG or PDF file, you select the Translate Asset Binary check box.

Note: When the Connector sends the actual asset for translation, it sends the original rendition. There may be multiple renditions of an asset, for example, there may be multiple versions of an image with different resolutions, such as for Web and print. For more information, refer to “Managing Renditions” in the Adobe Experience Manager documentation, at: https://docs.adobe.com/docs/en/aem/6-3/author/assets/managing-assets-touch-ui.html#Managing%20Renditions.

Depending on whether you select one or both check boxes, the Connector will generate either one or two items from one asset in a job. Each item will be listed in the job details.

Tip: You can create a custom asset handler that modifies the translation settings of specific asset types, such as digital assets. For details, see Creating a Custom Asset Handler.

1.5.12 - Creating a Custom Asset Handler

You can create a custom asset handler that modifies the translation settings of specific asset types. This can be useful, if for example, you want to change settings for a type of digital assets that you send for translation. For example, suppose that when you translate video subtitles, you do not want to use the Language Mapping configurations to convert the path of the source subtitle text files to the path of the target files. Instead, you want the translated video subtitle text files to be in the same location as the source video subtitle text files, but you want to change the name of the translated subtitle files.

In this scenario, you can now create a custom asset handler to configure a custom path mapping for converting source paths to target paths. For example, you can convert /content/dam/wwww/us/en/…/video/subtitle/12345_us_en_xxxxx.txt to /content/dam/wwww/us/en/…/video/subtitle/12345_fr_fr_xxxxx.txt, instead of to /content/dam/wwww/fr/fr/…/video/subtitle/12345_us_en_xxxxx.txt

To create a custom asset handler:

Click Admin Tools > Asset Handlers in the Lionbridge Connector rail to open the Custom Asset Handlers page. For information on opening the Lionbridge Connector rail, see Configuring the Connector.

Click Add in the top-right corner of the page to add a new custom asset handler.

The New Asset Handler dialog box opens.

In the Name field, enter the name for the new custom asset handler.
In the Asset Types section, select the check boxes of the asset types for which this asset handler is relevant.
In the Path Filters box, you can specify the base content path of the assets for applying this custom handler. By default, the value is /, so it is relevant to all paths.
- To specify multiple base content paths, use a comma ( , ) separator between the paths, for example: /content/web1/ , /content/web2/.
- To exclude a base content path, use an exclamation mark ( ! ) prefix, for example: !/content/web1/.
- To substitute a wildcard for part of a base content path, use an asterisk ( * ), for example: */libs/or !*/app/.
In the Handler Class field, enter the full class name of your custom asset handler, as instructed by Lionbridge Connector Support. For details, see How to Contact Lionbridge Connector Support.

Note: You must also deploy your handler bundle to Adobe Experience Manager.

In the Extra Configurations box, enter any additional configuration for this custom handler, such as XML or JSON.
Click Add to save your changes and close the dialog box.

1.5.13 - Configuring Advanced Settings in CRXDE Lite

Note: This section is not applicable to the AEM Cloud Connector.

You can use CRXDE Lite to configure the some Connector options. CRXDE Lite (Content Repository Extreme Development Environment Lite) is embedded into Adobe Experience Manager. It enables you to perform standard development tasks in the browser. For more information about CRXDE Lite, refer to the Adobe documentation, at: https://helpx.adobe.com/experience-manager/6-4/sites/developing/using/developing-with-crxde-lite.html. If you have a different version of Adobe Experience Manager, you can navigate to the correct version of the documentation from that page.

You can use CRXDE Lite to configure the following Connector options:

Note: The following Connector options are only available in the Debug Settings:

Excluding Child Nodes from Translation
Configuring the TMX to Include the Original Translation
Excluding Properties from Translation

Adobe Experience Manager Cloud users may not have access to CRXDE. Therefore, in the AEM Cloud Connector, following four Connector options can be configured using the Debug Settings:

Excluding Child Nodes from Translation
Configuring the TMX to Include the Original Translation
Excluding Properties from Translation
Disabling the Cache Service

To configure the Connector options using the Debug Settings:

Double click Build: 5.0.1-2022-12121913 for AEM as a Cloud Service (depending on your version you may have a different build number) to navigate to Debug Settings from Config page. The Debug page appears.

On the Debug page, click Debug Settings. The Debug Settings page appears.

Configure the Connectors and click Save.

Disabling the Cache Service: You can disable the Connector cache service on the Debug Settings page. To disable the Connector cache service, on the Debug Settings page, from the Use cache service dropdown, select No and click Save.
Excluding Child Nodes from Translation: On the Debug Settings page, you can exclude nodes from targe page. To exlude child nodes from translation: Enter the name of the node to be excluded in the Excluded nodes from target page text box. Include additional nodes to exclude using comma separator and then click Save.

Configuring the TMX to Include the Original Translation: On the Debug Settings page you can configuring the TMX to include the original translation. To configure this settings, on Debug Settings page Select the Include original translation in TMX File: dropdown value to Yes.

Excluding Properties from Translation: On the Debug Settings page, some properties can be excluded from target page when connector copies source page to target page for translation.

In the text box, enter the name of the property to exclude additional properties you can add multiple properties separated by a comma and then click on Save.

1.5.13.1 - Configuring How the Connector Handles Special Characters

You can configure how the Connector handles special characters. This is important because it determines how special characters are displayed for your translators.

Background

The Connector exports your content from Adobe Experience Manager and sends it for translation as XML files. A valid XML file cannot contain any of the special characters listed in the table below. Instead, a valid XML file must use the following entity references to represent special characters:

Special Character	Represented by This Entity Reference
<	`<`
>	`>`
&	`&`
'	`'`
"	`"`

Escaping is the term that describes creating valid XML by converting any XML special characters to their entity references.

How does Adobe Experience Manager handle special characters?

There are two types of text within Adobe Experience Manager:

plain text
rich text, which can contain HTML formatting, links. etc.

You can use CRXDE Lite to view how Adobe Experience Manger stores content.

CRXDE Lite handles special characters differently, depending on whether they are in a plain text title, or a rich text paragraph.

In plain text, CRXDE Lite does not escape special characters. It displays them as the actual characters. For example, it displays & as &.
In rich text, CRXDE Lite escapes special characters. It displays them as their corresponding entity references. For example, it displays & as &.

How does the Connector handle special characters?

When the Connector prepares content for translation, it packages all content into XML translation files. This necessitates escaping all special characters into their corresponding entity references. However, the Connector does not differentiate between plain text (which displays the actual special characters) and rich text (which displays the entity references instead of the special characters). Therefore, the Connector escapes all special characters.

As a result, the rich text that the translator receives may contain a combination of special characters and entity references.

For example:

Suppose that the rich-text paragraph contains the text that is rendered as follows in the CRXDE Lite viewer: &.

CRXDE Lite actually stores this rich-text content as its corresponding entity reference: &.

When the Connector processes this rich-text content to create XML files to send out for translation, it escapes this content as follows:

& becomes &
amp; remains amp;

As a result, this content is escaped twice (once by CRXDE Lite and then by the Connector).

The Connector then stores this content as & in the XML translation file, which it sends to the translator.

However, some translation systems cannot handle double-escaped special characters such as & or a mix of single-escaped and double-escaped special characters.

1.5.13.1.1 - Why do translators encounter problems with special characters?

Some translation systems can handle double-escaped special characters, such as &, by displaying them as & or &. However, some translation systems cannot handle double-escaped special characters, such as &.

There are several ways to handle this.

Recommendation 1 – Same as Source option

If your translator’s translation system supports the “Same as Source” option, then instruct your translator to select this option. This converts and returns all special characters–actual characters, escaped characters, and double-escaped characters–as they were received.

However, this feature is not supported by all translation systems or they may not be able to change this setting. In those scenarios, or if you see a combination of single- and double-escaped characters, consider one of the following recommendations.

Recommendation 2 – All single encoded

Your translator should handle each type of special character consistently. For example, in the target XML:

Your translator can return the following special characters as single escaped:
- <
- >
- &
Your translator can return the following special characters as the actual characters:
- '
- "

Recommendation 3 – Use CData tags

Changing the Use_CData setting from its default value of false to true. This setting instructs the Connector to wrap content in CData tags, which prevents the Connector from escaping special characters, and avoids the scenario of double-escaped characters. However, this setting does not prevent Adobe Experience Manager from single-escaping special characters in rich text.

Note: The Connector adds and removes the CData tags, so they are not displayed within Adobe Experience Manager’s CRXDE Lite.

Important: If you change this setting, your translators must return the translated content in CData tags, just as they received the source content in CData tags. They should not run any post-translation scripts to escape the special characters before returning the content.

Warning: If you change this setting in the middle of a translation job, it can interfere with the integrity of the translation memory.

For detailed instructions on changing the Use_CData setting from its default value of false to true, see Adding CData Tags to Translation Files.

1.5.13.1.2 - Adding CData Tags to Translation Files

You can change the Use_CData setting from its default value of false to true to add CData tags to translation files, which prevents your translators from viewing double-escaped special characters, such as &.

To configure this setting:

Do one of the following to open CRXDE Lite:
- In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click Tools in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. Then,in the Navigation page, click CRXDE Lite.
- In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click CRXDE Lite in the right pane.
- In your Web browser, navigate to /crx/de/index.jsp on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

CRXDE Lite opens.

In the Explorer pane on the left, navigate to /etc/ctctranslation/TransOptions.
Locate the Use_CData property.
Double-click in the Value column, and select true from the dropdown list.
In the CRXDE Lite menu, click Save All.

The Connector will now automatically wrap every XML translation file it sends out for translation in CData tags.

1.5.13.2 - Configuring Custom Content Types

When you send content for translation using the Bulk Translation wizard, the Translation Queue, or Sidekick you can use the content type to filter the content you want to send.

Note: Specifying the content type in Sidekick is available only when working with the Sidekick wizard user interfaces.

The Connector can also configure routing rules to send content of each type to a different translation provider.

By default, the Connector includes three content types, which have the following default labels:

Marketing
Technical
Legal

You can change these labels to reflect your company’s needs. For example, you can send all your marketing content to your translation provider, and all your user-generated content to a machine translation service. In the Content API Platform, the Connector can configure content rules based on content types as follows:

You can send different content types to different translation providers.
You can send different content types to different TMSs (translation management systems).
You can send different content types to different processing profiles within a single TMS instance.

Note: Please contact Lionbridge Connector Support before proceeding. For details, see How to Contact Lionbridge Connector Support.

Do one of the following to open CRXDE Lite, where you can configure custom content types:
- In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click Tools in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. Then, in the Navigation page, click CRXDE Lite.
- In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click CRXDE Lite in the right pane.
- In your Web browser, navigate to /crx/de/index.jsp on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

CRXDE Lite opens.

In the navigation pane on the left, navigate to /etc/ctctranslation/ctcconfig_ContentTypes.

In the Properties tab in the Home tab, double-click in the Value column of the content-type label to change, and type the new label.
Repeat the previous step for each content-type label you want to change.
In the CRXDE Lite Menu, click Save All.

1.5.13.3 - Configuring the Rollout Feature

If the Rollout feature is enabled, then when users roll out files, the Connector automatically sends them to the Translation Queue, using your company’s default translation settings. There are three settings for this feature. The setting you choose determines the configuration method you use:

You can configure the Connector to send all your rollout pages to the Translation Queue.
You can configure the Connector to send only some of your rollout pages to the Translation Queue, using a workflow.
You can configure the Connector to send only some of your rollout pages to the Translation Queue, using a filter.

Note: The setting determines the configuration method you use.

Important information: Adobe Experience Manager has language-mappings that are included by default and that cannot be removed. When you roll out pages, the Connector automatically sends all configured languages, including these defaults, to the Translation Queue. You can configure the Connector to send only configured languages to the Translation Queue. For more information and detailed instructions, see Configuring Default Language-Mapping Settings for the Rollout Feature.

Configure the Connector to send all rollout pages to the Translation Queue

In the Translation Settings section of the Configuration page, select the Catch rollout pages to [Rollout] Queue check box. For details, see Translation Settings.
When creating a Livecopy site, use the default Adobe Experience Manager rollout configuration.

Configure the Connector to send only some rollout pages to the Translation Queue, using a workflow

Important information for updated Connector installations: For new installations of the Connector, no additional steps are required. If you are updating your Connector installation from a version before 2.3.0, you must perform the steps described in Update the CTCRolloutTranslation workflow to update the workflow before performing the following steps.

In the Translation Settings section of the Configuration page, clear the Catch rollout pages to [Rollout] Queue check box. For details, see Translation Settings.
Create your own rollout configuration in CRXDE Lite that includes the CTCRolloutTranslation workflow. For detailed instructions on creating a rollout config, refer to the Adobe Experience Manager documentation at: https://helpx.adobe.com/experience-manager/6-5/sites/administering/using/msm-sync.html#CreatingaRolloutConfiguration.

For a description of the CTCRolloutTranslation workflow, see Viewing the Rollout Workflow.

When creating a Livecopy site, select the rollout configuration you created.

Update the CTCRolloutTranslation workflow

Important: These steps are required only for a Connector installation updated from a version before 2.3.0, and when configuring the Connector to send only some rollout pages to the Translation Queue using a workflow, as described above.

In your Web browser, navigate to /libs/cq/workflow/content/console.html on your Adobe Experience Manager instance to open the AEM WCM page.
Locate the CTCRolloutTranslation workflow. Click to select it, and then right-click and select Edit from the context menu.

The workflow opens for editing in a new Web page.

Mouseover the CTC Rollout Translation workflow, right-click, and select Edit from the context menu.
In the Process tab:
- Ensure that the Process is com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.workflow.RolloutCTCQueueProcess (and not RolloutCTCTranslationProcess).
- Select the Handler Advance check box.
- Click OK to close the dialog box.
Click Save to save your changes.

Configure the Connector to send only some rollout pages to the Translation Queue, using a filter

In your browser, navigate to: /system/console/components on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

The Adobe Experience Manager Web Console Components page opens. This page displays all components alphabetically, by name.
Scroll down to locate the Connector components, whose names all start with com.claytablet.
Verify that the following Content API component is installed and active in Adobe Experience Manager: com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.impl.CTCRolloutCheckServiceImpl.
Code a filter class to call the following Content API interface: com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.service.Rollout.IRolloutTranslationFilter. See the sample code, at the bottom of this section.
Implement the following function:


final String bluePrintPage,

final String liveCopyPage,

final Session jcrSession,

final ResourceResolver resourceResolver,

final LiveRelationshipManager liveRelationshipManager,

final CTCPageService ctcPageService,

final CTLogService ctcLogService,

final CTCDataService ctcDataService

);

If the Connector Translation Queue will capture the rollout pages, the function should return a Boolean value of True.
Do one of the following to open CRXDE Lite, where you can configure the Rollout Filter in the Adobe Experience Manager CRXDE interface:
- In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click Tools in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. Then, in the Navigation page, click CRXDE Lite.
- In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click CRXDE Lite in the right pane.
- In your Web browser, navigate to /crx/de/index.jsp on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

CRXDE Lite opens.

In the navigation pane on the left, navigate to /etc/ctcpipelineconfig/ctcRolloutTranslationFilter.
Create a child note of type nt:unstructured and give it a human-readable name, for example, CustomTestFilter.
Add the following node properties:

- Name = Active, Type = Boolean, Value = True
- Name = ImplementedClass, Type = String, Value = Filter Class name, for example: com.testguru.ctfilter.test.CTFilterTest.CustomRolloutFilter

In the CRXDE Lite Menu, click Save All.

Clay Tablet interface sample code

Note:. The following sample code is also included in the following package, which is in the following location in CRXDE Lite: /apps/CTFilterTest/src/impl/src/main/java/com/testguru/ctfilter/test/ CTFilterTest/impl/Activator.java. You can install this package using the CRX Package Manager. For detailed instructions on using the CRX Package Manager, see Installing the Lionbridge Connector.

package com.testguru.ctfilter.test.CTFilterTest;

import javax.jcr.Session;
import org.apache.sling.api.resource.ResourceResolver;
import com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.service.CTCDataService;
import com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.service.CTCPageService;
import com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.service.CTLogService;
import com.day.cq.wcm.msm.api.LiveRelationshipManager;
import com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.service.Rollout.IRolloutTranslationFilter;

public class CustomRolloutFilter implements IRolloutTranslationFilter
{

    public boolean catchRolloutToTranslation(final String bluePrintPage,
    final String liveCopyPage,  final Session jcrSession,
    final ResourceResolver resourceResolver,
    final LiveRelationshipManager liveRelationshipManager,
    final CTCPageService ctcPageService,
    final CTLogService ctcLogService,
    final CTCDataService ctcDataService )
    {
        ctcLogService.LogRolloutDebug("[CustomRolloutFilter] passed Blueprint page: "
        + bluePrintPage  );
        ctcLogService.LogRolloutDebug("[CustomRolloutFilter] passed liveCopyPage page: "
        + liveCopyPage  );

        // Add your own logic here.
        if (bluePrintPage.startsWith("/content/geometrixx/en/blog"))
        {
            ctcLogService.LogRolloutDebug("[CustomRolloutFilter] Blueprint page "  +
        "is starting with path [/content/geometrixx/en/blog], ignored.");
            return false;
        }
        else
            return true;
    // Do not close passed JCR Session and ResourceResolver. Clay Tablet needs these
    // to do more filter calls.
    }
}

1.5.13.3.1 - Configuring Default Language Mapping Settings for the Rollout Feature

Adobe Experience Manager has language-mappings that are included by default and that cannot be removed. If the Connector is configured to send content to the Translation Queue when you roll out files, then it sends content to the queue for these default languages. You can configure the Connector so that it sends only content for configured languages to the queue.

To configure this setting:

Do one of the following to open CRXDE Lite:
- In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click Tools in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. Then, in the Navigation page, click CRXDE Lite.
- In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click CRXDE Lite in the right pane.
- In your Web browser, navigate to /crx/de/index.jsp on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

CRXDE Lite opens.

In the Explorer pane on the left, navigate to /etc/ctctranslation.
If the debug node does not exist, then create it.

a. Select the ctctranslation node.

b. Select Create > Create Node from the context menu.

The Create Node dialog box opens.

c. In the Name field, enter debug.

d. In the Type dropdown list, select nt:structured.

e. Click OK.

Right-click the /etc/ctctranslation node, and select Refresh from the context menu.
Create the AEM61DefaultLanguageMapping property in the debug node you just created.

a. Locate and select the debug node you just created.

b. In the Name field in the bottom of the right pane, enter AEM61DefaultLanguageMapping.

c. In the Type dropdown list in the bottom of the right pane, accept the default of String.

d. In the Value field in the bottom of the right pane, enter disabled.

e. Click Add .
In the CRXDE Lite Menu, click Save All.

The AEM61DefaultLanguageMapping is displayed at the top of the pane.

The Connector will now send only configured languages to the Translation Queue when you roll out pages.

1.5.13.4 - Enabling Content Collection from Blueprint Pages

You can instruct the Connector to globally collect content from Blueprint pages using the Pickup Content from Blueprint Pages CRX setting in CRXDE Lite.

Note: When this feature is enabled, the Connector synchronizes non-translatable properties, such as images, from a locked component.

This setting is available only when the Select if using Blueprint/Live-copy check box is selected.
If this setting is specified, the Connector always acts as though the Translate Non-Sync’d Components on this page check box is not selected, even if it is selected. This occurs because only content from locked components is rolled out from Blueprint pages to live copy pages:
- In general, during MSM rollout, content from Blueprint pages overwrites the content of locked components in live copy pages. The Connector retrieves content from the live copy pages and sends it out for translation. Until the translation returns, the live copy page has the un-localized content from the Blueprint page.
- However, if there is no MSM rollout or if there is a custom rollout configuration that excludes copying over the content, then the content from the Blueprint page does not overwrite the content of the locked components in the live copy page. Live copy pages may contain the old version of localized content.

In both scenarios, the Connector returns the translated content to the live copy page.

The PickupContentFromBlueprintPages_LockedOnly page option in CRXDE Lite enables the Connector to read properties of Blueprint pages for locked components of live-copy pages when the PickupContentFromBlueprintPages option is set to true. This setting enables collecting content for translation from locked components.

For descriptions of all the related settings, see UI and Default Settings.

To enable the Pickup Content From Blueprint Pages setting:

Do one of the following to open CRXDE Lite:
- In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click Tools in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. Then, in the Navigation page, click CRXDE Lite.
- In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click CRXDE Lite in the right pane.
- In your Web browser, navigate to /crx/de/index.jsp on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

CRXDE Lite opens.

In the Explorer pane on the left, navigate to /etc/ctctranslation/PageOptions.
Locate the PickupContentFromBlueprintPages property.
Double-click in the Value column, and select true from the dropdown list.

The Pickup Content From Blueprint Pages setting is now enabled. This enables the Connector to collect content from locked components.

Note: To turn off this setting, repeat the previous steps, but in the last step, select false from the dropdown list.

To force the Connector to collect content only from locked components, when the PickupContentFromBlueprintPages property is sent to true:

a. In the same location, create a child note of type nt:unstructured and give it the following name: PickupContentFromBlueprintPages_LockedOnly.

b. Add the following node properties: Name = Active, Type = Boolean, Value = True.

The Connector can now collect content for translation from locked components only.

In the CRXDE Lite Menu, click Save All.

1.5.13.5 - Configuring the TMX to Include the Original Translation

By default, when you use the Update TM functionality, the Connector updates the TM (translation memory) with the following information from the TMX file:

the original source content
the original translated content
the updated translated content
the name of the translation job
the page path and the property name

You can configure the Connector to also include the original translation returned by the translation provider in the TMX file.

To configure this setting:

Do one of the following to open CRXDE Lite:
- In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click Tools in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. Then, in the Navigation page, click CRXDE Lite.
- In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click CRXDE Lite in the right pane.
- In your Web browser, navigate to /crx/de/index.jsp on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

CRXDE Lite opens.

In the Explorer pane on the left, navigate to /etc/ctctranslation/TransOptions.
Locate the TMXIncludeOriginalTranslation property.
Double-click in the Value column, and select true from the dropdown list.
In the CRXDE Lite Menu, click Save All.

The Connector will now send the original translation returned by the translation provider to the TM.

1.5.13.6 - Excluding Properties from Translation

You can use the TargetPageExcludedProperties property in the etc/ctctranslation/PageOptions node in CRXDE Lite to specify any properties in your content that you want to exclude from being sent for translation. This is useful, for example, if you have a custom identifier property for each file that you do not want to replicate in the target content.

To exclude properties from translation:

Do one of the following to open CRXDE Lite:
- In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click Tools in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. Then, in the Navigation page, click CRXDE Lite.
- In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click CRXDE Lite in the right pane.
- In your Web browser, navigate to /crx/de/index.jsp on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

CRXDE Lite opens.

In the Explorer pane on the left, navigate to /etc/ctctranslation/PageOptions.
Double-click the TargetPageExcludedProperties property.

The Edit TargetPageExcludedProperties dialog box opens.

In the text box, enter the name of the property to exclude.
To exclude additional properties, click the plus button .
Click OK.
In the CRXDE Lite Menu, click Save All.

1.5.13.7 - Excluding Child Nodes from Translation

Before the Connector sends out content for translation, it copies over the source files to the target location. in CRXDE Lite:

You can use the TargetPageExcludedNodes property in the etc/ctctranslation/PageOptions node to delete child nodes after copying from the source to the target.
You can use the TargetPagePreservedNodes property in the etc/ctctranslation/PageOptions node to exclude child nodes when copying from the source to the target.

These settings are both useful if you want to exclude certain child nodes from translation while sending their parent nodes for translation.

To exclude child nodes from translation:

Do one of the following to open CRXDE Lite:
- In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click Tools in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. Then, in the Navigation page, click CRXDE Lite.
- In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click CRXDE Lite in the right pane.
- In your Web browser, navigate to /crx/de/index.jsp on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

CRXDE Lite opens.

In the Explorer pane on the left, navigate to /etc/ctctranslation/PageOptions.
Do one of the following:
- To delete child nodes after copying from the source to the target, double-click the TargetPageExcludedNodes property.
The Edit TargetPageExcludedNodes dialog box opens. Click the plus button .

To avoid overwriting existing child nodes, when copying from the source to the target, double-click the TargetPagePreservedNodes property.

The Edit TargetPagePreservedNodes dialog box opens. Click the plus button .

In the text box, enter the name of the node to exclude.
To exclude additional nodes, click the plus button .
Click OK.
In the CRXDE Lite Menu, click Save All.

1.5.13.8 - Configuring All Jobs to Pause

In CRXDE Lite, you can configure all jobs to pause before the Connector sends them out for translation. The jobs pause after Preparing status (0%) but before Sending status (1%). This is useful if you want to review or export reports of content items, or download the XML files before sending them out for translation.

Note: You can also configure this setting using the Pause job before sending check box in the UI and Default Settings section of the Configuration page. For details, see UI and Default Settings.

To configure this setting:

Do one of the following to open CRXDE Lite:
- In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click Tools in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. Then, in the Navigation page, click CRXDE Lite.
- In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click CRXDE Lite in the right pane.
- In your Web browser, navigate to /crx/de/index.jsp on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

CRXDE Lite opens.

In the Explorer pane on the left, navigate to /etc/ctctranslation/TransOptions.
Locate the PauseBeforeSend property.
Double-click in the Value column, and select true from the dropdown list.
In the CRXDE Lite Menu, click Save All.

The Connector will now automatically pause every job before it sends it out for translation.

Important: To resume the job and send it out for translation, in the Translation Status page, you must click Resume for the job. For detailed instructions, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager User Guide.

1.5.13.9 - Configuring Catching Pages from Publish Events to the Translation Queue

Selecting the Catch Pages from Publish Event to Queue check box in the Translation Settings section of the Configuration page instructs the Connector to automatically listen to publish events and add published pages to the Translation Queue. By default, this check box is hidden. To display this check box, you add the ShowCatchPublishEventPageToQueueInCTConfig property to the /etc/ctctranslation/ctcconfig node in CRXDE Lite.

To display the Catch Pages from Publish Event to Queue check box:

Do one of the following to open CRXDE Lite:
- In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click Tools in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. Then, in the Navigation page, click CRXDE Lite.
- In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click CRXDE Lite in the right pane.
- In your Web browser, navigate to /crx/de/index.jsp on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

CRXDE Lite opens.

In the Explorer pane on the left, navigate to /etc/ctctranslation/ctcconfig.
Create the ShowCatchPublishEventPageToQueueInCTConfig property in this node.
- In the Name field in the bottom of the right pane, enter ShowCatchPublishEventPageToQueueInCTConfig.
- In the Type dropdown list in the bottom of the right pane, accept the default of String.
- In the Value field in the bottom of the right pane, enter true.
- Click Add .
In the CRXDE Lite Menu, click Save All.

The ShowCatchPublishEventPageToQueueInCTConfig is displayed at the top of the pane.

The Connector will now display the Catch Pages from Publish Event to Queue check box in the Translation Settings section of the Configuration page.

1.5.13.10 - Configuring which Properties of i18n Dictionary Items to Collect for Translation

You can send out i18n dictionary items and tags for translation using the Bulk Translation wizard. For detailed instructions, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager User Guide.

In i18n dictionary items, by default the Connector sends out the sling:message property.
In tags, by default the Connector sends out the jcr:title property.

In both i18n dictionary and tag items, if there is no source language specified, the Connector now uses the default title or message as the source:

For i18n dictionary items, if the sling:message property is empty, the Connector now uses the sling:key property.
For tags, in the jcr:title property is empty, the Connector now uses the jcr:title.<source language> property, for example, jcr:title.en.

You can use the disableUseDefaultAsSourceForTagsAndI18N property to disable this behavior, which prevents the Connector from using the default title or message as the source if there is no source language specified.

To prevent the Connector from using the default title or message as the source if there is no source language specified:

Do one of the following to open CRXDE Lite:
- In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click Tools in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. Then, in the Navigation page, click CRXDE Lite.
- In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click CRXDE Lite in the right pane.
- In your Web browser, navigate to /crx/de/index.jsp on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

CRXDE Lite opens.

In the Explorer pane on the left, navigate to /etc/ctctranslation/ctcconfig/debug.
Create the disableUseDefaultAsSourceForTagsAndI18N property in this node.
- In the Name field in the bottom of the right pane, enter disableUseDefaultAsSourceForTagsAndI18N.
- In the Type dropdown list in the bottom of the right pane, accept the default of String.
- In the Value field in the bottom of the right pane, enter any value.
- Click Add .
In the CRXDE Lite Menu, click Save All.

The disableUseDefaultAsSourceForTagsAndI18N is displayed at the top of the pane.

If there is no source language specified for i18 dictionary items or tags, the Connector will now not use the default properties as source, when sending out items and tags for translation.

1.5.13.11 - Disabling the Cache Service

The Connector’s cache service caches the current user’s settings, including:

user permissions
all the AEM groups to which the user belongs (since groups can be nested)
the available source and target languages

The cache service enables the Connector to obtain the user’s setting quickly, without querying Adobe Experience Manager each time, which is slower. By default, the Connector’s the cache service is enabled.

You can disable the Connector cache service by adding the usingCacheService Boolean property with the false value to the /etc/ctctranslation/debug node in CRXDE Lite. This forces the Connector to query Adobe Experience Manager each time for user settings.

To disable the Connector cache service:

Do one of the following to open CRXDE Lite:
- In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click Tools in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. Then, in the Navigation page, click CRXDE Lite.
- In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click CRXDE Lite in the right pane.
- In your Web browser, navigate to /crx/de/index.jsp on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

CRXDE Lite opens.

In the Explorer pane on the left, navigate to /etc/ctctranslation/debug.
Create the usingCacheService property in this node.

a. In the Name field in the bottom of the right pane, enter usingCacheService.

b. In the Type dropdown list in the bottom of the right pane, select boolean.

c. In the Value field in the bottom of the right pane, enter false to disable the cache service.

Tip: Alternatively, to re-enable the cache service after disabling it, enter true.

d. Click Add .

In the CRXDE Lite Menu, click Save All.

The usingCacheService property is displayed at the top of the pane.

The Connector will now use the specified setting to enable or disable the cache.

1.5.14 - Configuring Advanced Settings in the User Interface

In the Advanced Settings page, you can configure advanced Connector settings. To open the Advanced Settings page, click Admin Tools > Advanced Settings in the Lionbridge Connector rail.

The advanced Connector settings are organized into the following sections:

Section	Description	For Detailed Configuration Instructions, See…
Translation Status	You can create a page property to store custom translation-status values that are attached to individual pages, for example MT (for machine translation) or HT (for human translation). After you associate a custom value with a translation provider (LSP), you can view this value for translated pages in the page list of the Globalization Tool.	Creating a Page Property to Store Custom Translation-Status Values
Prevent Translation of Pages	You can prevent the Connector from sending pages with certain properties for translation.	Preventing the Translation of Pages
Report Fields Configuration	You specify which fields are available to generate the Field Report, which you generate from the Reporting tab of the Globalization Tool.	Configuring which Fields Are Available for the Field Report
Workflow Selections	You specify which workflows are available to run on multiple pages, including language copies of these pages, in the Run Workflows tab of the Globalization Tool.	Configuring which Workflows Are Available to Run
Action Permissions	You configure which user group has permission to perform specific actions in the Globalization Tool.	Configuring Who Can Use the Globalization Tool
Prevent URL Conversions	If either or both of the Language Conversion (URL Reference) and Language Conversion (Content Link) options are configured in the Translation Settings section of the Configuration page, as described in Translation Settings, you can prevent the Connector from converting links to specific files or file types.	Preventing Specific URL and Content-Link Conversions
Automatically Remove/Replace Character from Translation Content	You can configure the connector to automatically remove or replace certain characters on the translation content.	Removing or Replacing Character from Translation Content
Skip Translation with Local TM	You can configure which components, or property names of components, will be ignored by the local TM (translation memory) when users send content for translation with the Use Local TM option. This setting prevents the Connector from using any previous translations of the specified components that are stored in the local TM.	Skipping Translations in the Local TM
Log JCR Property During Translation	You specify which JCR properties to write to the log file during translation.	Logging JCR Properties During Translation
Page Metadata Configuration	You specify: which metadata is available for copying to multiple pages, including multiple language copies of those pages which metadata is available for sending out for translation SEO flags to include in the XML translation files Notes: You can copy metadata to multiple pages from the Copy Metadata tab of the Globalization Tool. You can send metadata for translation from the Bulk Translation wizard, the Translation Queue, and the Translation tab of the Globalization Tool.	Configuring which Page Metadata is Available for Copying and Translation
Page Property Update Configuration	You specify which metadata fields are available for translation and copying to the Page Property Updating tab of the Globalization Tool.	Configuring which Metadata Fields Are Available for Translation and Copying
DAM Metadata Configuration	You specify which digital asset (DAM)A metadata is available for updating, including multiple language copies of those assets Note: You can update DAM metadata for multiple assets from the DAM Metadata Update tab of the Globalization Tool.	Configuring which Digital Asset Metadata is Available for Updating
DITA Metadata Configuration	You specify which DITA metadata is available for Translation and Copying Note: You can update DITA metadata for multiple assets from the DITA Metadata Update tab of the Globalization Tool. This feature is only available for the On-Premise version.	Configuring which DITA Metadata is Available for Translation and Copying
DITA Property Configuration	You specify which DITA property is available for Translation and Copying Note: You can update DITA property for multiple assets from the DITA Property Update tab of the Globalization Tool. This feature is only available for the On-Premise version.	Configuring which DITA Property is Available for Translation and Copying
Configuration for Catching Published Pages to Queue	You configure the source and target languages and translation settings for the following options that add published pages to the Translation Queue: - Catch Published Workflow Pages to Queue - Catch Pages from Publish Event to Queue You specify both these features by selecting the corresponding check boxes in the Translation Settings section of the Configuration page. For more information about these features, see Translation Settings.	Configuring Translation Settings for Catching Pages to the Translation Queue
Configuration for Catching Rollout Pages to Queue	You configure the paths for adding rollout pages to the Translation Queue:	Configuring Paths for Catching Rollout Pages to the Translation Queue
Default Job Name Format for Bulk Translation	You specify the default job name for Bulk Translation.	Configuring Default Job Name for Bulk Translation

You can perform the following actions on this page:

To save your changes to each section, click the corresponding Save Configuration button.

Note: The settings from each section are saved in a single file.

To export your configuration settings as an XML file, at the top of the page, click Export. The Connector downloads the advancedSettings.xml file.
To import a previously exported configuration file:

a. At the top of the page, click Import.

The Select a file to upload dialog box opens.

b. Click Choose File.

c. In the browser dialog box that opens, navigate to the XML file to import, select it, and click Open, or similar, to close the browser dialog box.

The Select a file to upload dialog box displays the path of the file you selected.

d. Click Upload to upload the file.

The Connector imports the file and updates the configuration.

1.5.14.1 - Creating a Page Property to Store Custom Translation-Status Values

In the Translation Status section of the Advanced Settings page, you can create custom translation-status properties that are attached to individual pages, for example MT (for machine translation) or HT (for human translation). After you associate a custom property with a translation provider (LSP), you can view this property for translated pages in the page list of the Globalization Tool.

To create custom translation-status properties:

Click Admin Tools > Advanced Settings in the Lionbridge Connector rail. For information on opening the Lionbridge Connector rail, see Configuring the Connector.

The Advanced Settings page opens, displaying the Translation Status section at the top of the page.

To create a JCR property that will hold custom translation-status values, enter it in the JCR Property for translation status field. For example, enter: jcr:TranslationMethod.
Click Save Configuration to save your changes.

A message in red at the top of the page states that the metadata configuration was saved.

This property is attached to pages after they return from translation.
To complete the configuration of this feature, you specify values for this property for each translation provider (LSP). These are the values that will be displayed in the page list of the Globalization Tool.
- For SDL TMS, you specify this value in the Translation Status field of the TMS GUID Config page. For detailed instructions, see Installing the Add-On for SDL TMS.
- For all other translation providers (LSPs), you specify this value in the Translation Status field of the LSP & Keys page. For detailed instructions, see Editing a License Key.

1.5.14.2 - Preventing the Translation of Pages

In the Prevent Translation of Pages section of the Advanced Settings page, you can prevent the Connector from sending pages with certain properties for translation.

To prevent the Connector from sending certain pages for translation:

Click Admin Tools > Advanced Settings in the Lionbridge Connector rail. For information on opening the Lionbridge Connector rail, see Configuring the Connector.

The Advanced Settings page opens, displaying the Prevent Translation of Pages section near the top of the page.

Enter the page property or properties that identify pages for the Connector to ignore when sending content out for translation.
- To separate multiple page properties, use a comma ( , ) separator, for example: PropertyName, PropertyName[PropertyValue].
- To find all pages that do not have properties, use an exclamation mark ( ! ) prefix, for example: !PropertyName[PropertyValue]. For example, !PropertyName finds !PropertyNameA, !PropertyNameB, and !PropertyNameC.
- To find a page property whose values all contain some letters or numbers, use an asterisk wildcard ( * ) for the property value, for example: PropertyName[Value*], PropertyName[*Value*].
- To instruct the Connector to ignore pages with specific multiple properties, use an ampersand ( & ), for example: PropertyName1[PropertyValue1]&PropertyName2[PropertyValue2].
Click Save Configuration to save your changes.

1.5.14.3 - Configuring which Fields Are Available for the Field Report

In the Report Fields Configuration section of the Advanced Settings page, you can configure which fields are available to include in the Field report. You can generate this report for multiple pages in the Reporting tab of the Globalization Tool. For instructions on generating this report, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager User Guide.

To configure the Field report:

Click Admin Tools > Advanced Settings in the Lionbridge Connector rail. For information on opening the Lionbridge Connector rail, see Configuring the Connector.

The Advanced Settings page opens. The Report Fields Configuration section of this page lists the JCR properties that are available for display in the Reporting tab of the Globalization Tool, where you can select them for inclusion in the generated Field report.

You can add, edit, or delete the JCR properties that are included in the Field report.
- To add a JCR property, so that it is included in the report, click Add, in the top-right corner of this section. This adds a blank row at the top of the list. In this row, enter the information about the property to add.
- To edit a JCR property, which modifies the information in the report, edit the corresponding information in the list.
- To delete a JCR property, so that it is excluded from the report, click Del in the corresponding row. A message box confirms that you want to delete this field in the report. Click OK to confirm.
- You can add the {PageTemplate}, {PageType}, and {TranslationStatus} tags to display the corresponding information in the report, for example:

Note: {PageTemplate} and {PageType} are standard fields in Adobe Experience Manager. {TranslationStatus} is a custom property defined in the Translation Status section at the top of this page. For details, see Creating a Page Property to Store Custom Translation-Status Values.

For a list and description of JCR properties, refer to the Adobe Experience Manager documentation, which is available at: https://docs.adobe.com/docs/en/aem/6-2/develop/components.html.

You can use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to modify the order in which the fields are displayed in the generated report.
Click Save Configuration to save your changes.

A message in red at the top of the page states that the Field-report configuration was saved.

1.5.14.4 - Configuring which Workflows Are Available to Run

In the Workflow Selections section of the Advanced Settings page, you can configure which workflows are available to run against multiple pages in the Run Workflows tab of the Globalization Tool. For instructions on running workflows against multiple pages, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager User Guide.

To configure which workflows are available to run:

Click Admin Tools > Advanced Settings in the Lionbridge Connector rail. For information on opening the Lionbridge Connector rail, see Configuring the Connector.

The Advanced Settings page opens. The Workflow Selections section of this page lists the workflows that are available for display in the Run Workflows tab of the Globalization Tool, where you can select them to run against multiple pages.

Select the check boxes for the workflows to display in the Run Workflows tab of the Globalization Tool.
Click Save Configuration to save your changes.

A message in red at the top of the page states that your workflow selection was saved.

1.5.14.5 - Configuring who Can Use the Globalization Tool

In the Action Permissions section of the Advanced Settings page, you can configure which user groups can perform specific actions in the Globalization Tool.

For instructions on using the Globalization Tool, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager User Guide.

To configure which user groups can perform specific actions in the Globalization Tool:

Click Admin Tools > Advanced Settings in the Lionbridge Connector rail. For information on opening the Lionbridge Connector rail, see Configuring the Connector.

The Advanced Settings page opens. The Action Permissions section at the bottom of this page lists all the actions that are available in the Globalization Tool.

For each action, you can select the user group whose members can perform the action in the Globalization Tool. By default, members of the Translation User user group have permission to perform each action. For a list and description of user groups, see Configuring Adobe Experience Manager User Permissions for Translation Users.

Action	Description
Fields Report	Generating the Field report from the Reporting tab of the Globalization Tool.
Lock Report	Generating the Lockreport about multiple pages from the Reporting tab of the Globalization Tool.
Content Report	Generating the Content report about multiple pages from the Reporting tab of the Globalization Tool.
Sitemap Report	Generating the Sitemap report about multiple pages from the Reporting tab of the Globalization Tool.
Translation Report	Generating the Translation report about multiple pages from the Reporting tab of the Globalization Tool.
Page Property Update	Updating page properties for multiple pages from the Page Property Updating tab of the Globalization Tool.
DAM Metadata Update	Updating metadata for multiple digital assets (DAM) from the DAM Metadata Update tab of the Globalization Tool.
Activate	Activating multiple pages from the Activation tab of the Globalization Tool.
Deactivate	Deactivating multiple pages from the Activation tab of the Globalization Tool.
Activate Later	Specifying multiple pages to activate later from the Activation tab of the Globalization Tool.
Page Lock	Locking multiple pages from the Activation tab of the Globalization Tool.
Page Unlock	Unlocking multiple pages from the Activation tab of the Globalization Tool.
Page Versioning	Creating new versions of multiple pages from the Activation tab of the Globalization Tool.
Page Deleting	Deleting multiple pages and the corresponding translated pages from the Activation tab of the Globalization Tool.
Export XML	Exporting the content of multiple pages as XML from the Activation tab of the Globalization Tool.
Import XML	Importing the content of multiple pages as XML from the Activation tab of the Globalization Tool.
Copy Metadata	In the Copy Metadata tab of the Globalization Tool: - copying metadata to multiple pages - sending metadata from multiple pages for translation as a single job
Run Workflow	Running workflows on multiple pages from the Run Workflows tab of the Globalization Tool.
MSM Rollout	Rolling out changes to multiple pages from the Rollout tab of the Globalization Tool.
MSM Resume	Resuming the Livecopy relationships on multiple pages from the Rollout tab of the Globalization Tool.
MSM Suspend	Suspending the Livecopy relationships on multiple pages from the Rollout tab of the Globalization Tool.

Click Save Configuration to save your changes.

1.5.14.6 - Automatically Remove/Replace Character from Translation Content

In the Automatically Remove/Replace Character from Translation Content section of the Advanced Settings page, you can can configure the list of characteres that can be either removed or replaced by another while sending translation content.

To configure characteres to be removed or replace from translation content:

Click Admin Tools > Advanced Settings in the Lionbridge Connector rail. For information on opening the Lionbridge Connector rail, see Configuring the Connector.

The Advanced Settings page opens, displaying the Automatically Remove/Replace Character from Translation Content section near the top of the page.

According to the intended behavior (remove/replace) follow the format:
- Format: ** Enter one value per line for multiple
- The following tags are supported while replacing characteres:
  - {space}
  - {unescapeXml}
  - {newline}
- Examples:
  -  - - - - remove ‘’
  - ==>{space} - - - - replace ‘’ with one empty space ' '
  - ==>{space}12345{space} - - - - replace ‘’ with ' 12345 '
  - ==>{newline} - - - - replace ‘’ with a new line
  - ==>{unescapeXml} - - - - replace ‘’ with XMl Unescaped of ‘’
Click Save Configuration to save your changes.

1.5.14.7 - Preventing Specific URL and Content-Link Conversions

In the Prevent URL Conversions section of the Advanced Settings page, you can prevent the Connector from converting links to specific files or file types.

Note: This option is relevant only if either or both of the Language Conversion (URL Reference) and Language Conversion (Content Link) options are configured in the Translation Settings section of the Configuration page, as described in Translation Settings.

To prevent the Connector from converting specific URL and content links:

Click Admin Tools > Advanced Settings in the Lionbridge Connector rail. For information on opening the Lionbridge Connector rail, see Configuring the Connector.

The Advanced Settings page opens, displaying the Prevent URL Conversions section near the top of the page.

In the JCR Paths field, enter the JCR (Java Content Repository) path of specific files or pages. This prevents the Connector from converting any links to these files or pages.

Tip: You can also enter a file type, to prevent converting all links to files with a specific file type. For example, you can enter *.jpg to exclude all files with that extension. Notes: Use a comma ( , ) to separate multiple entries. Entries are not case sensitive.

In the Exceptions field, enter the JCR (Java Content Repository) path of pages or files to exclude from the exclusion list, in the JCR Paths field, above. For example, suppose you want to prevent converting links to all .JPG files, but you want to convert the link to filename.jpg: In the JCR Paths field, above, you enter *.jpg; while in the Exceptions field, you enter the path to filename.jpg. Use a comma ( , ) to separate multiple entries. Entries are not case sensitive.

Notes: Use a comma ( , ) to separate multiple entries. Entries are not case sensitive.

In the Skip URL Conversions for Node Properties field, enter the names of node properties. This prevents the Connector from converting any URLs for these nodes. You can exclude either all instances of a node or only instances of a node for a specified path.
- To prevent URL conversion of a node for all sites, add the /content prefix for to the node property. For example, to exclude the cq:master node property from URL conversion for all sites, enter the base node path as /content|cq:master.
- To prevent URL conversion of a node for a specific path, specify that path. For example, to exclude the cq:master node property from URL conversion for the “company A” site, specify /content/companyA|cq:master.

Tip: To substitute a wildcard as part of the property name, use an asterisk (*). For example, specifying /content|cq:* prevents URL conversion for any property whose name starts with cq: for all sites.

Click Save Configuration to save your changes.

A message in red at the top of the page states that the configuration was saved.

1.5.14.8 - Skipping Translations in the Local TM

In the Skip Translation with LocalTM section of the Advanced Settings page, you can prevent the Connector from using any previous translations of the specified components that are stored in the local TM.

Note: This option is relevant only if user select the Use Local TM option when sending out content for translation. For more information about this feature, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager User Guide.

To prevent the Connector from using any previous translations of the specified components that are stored in the local TM:

Click Admin Tools > Advanced Settings in the Lionbridge Connector rail. For information on opening the Lionbridge Connector rail, see Configuring the Connector.

The Advanced Settings page opens. The Skip Translation with LocalTM section is in the middle of the page.

In the text box, enter either the names of the properties or component properties in the following formats:

propertyName
componentPath|propertyName

Notes: Use a comma ( , ) to separate multiple entries. Entries are not case sensitive.

Click Save Configuration to save your changes.

A message in red at the top of the page states that the configuration was saved.

1.5.14.9 - Logging JCR Properties During Translation

In the Log JCR Properties During Translation section of the Advanced Settings page, you specify which JCR properties to write to the log file during translation.

To specify which JCR properties to write to the log file:

Click Admin Tools > Advanced Settings in the Lionbridge Connector rail. For information on opening the Lionbridge Connector rail, see Configuring the Connector.

The Advanced Settings page opens, displaying the Log JCR Properties During Translation section in the middle of the page.

In the text box, enter the JCR properties to write to the log file during translation. Use a comma ( , ) separator to separate multiple JCR properties.
Click Save Configuration to save your changes.

A message in red at the top of the page states that the configuration was saved.

1.5.14.10 - Configuring which Metadata Fields Are Available for Translation and Copying

In the Page Property Update Configuration section of the Advanced Settings page, you can configure the Connector to translate and copy metadata fields to the Page Property Updating tab of the Globalization Tool.

To configure which metadata fields will be translated and copied:

Click Admin Tools > Advanced Settings in the Lionbridge Connector rail. For information on opening the Lionbridge Connector rail, see Configuring the Connector.

The Advanced Settings page opens. In the Page Property Update Configuration section of this page, you can specify the parameters of the metadata fields that will be translated and copied to the Page Property Updating tab of the Globalization Tool.

To specify the parameters of the metadata fields to translate and copy:

a. Click Add, in the top-right corner of this section.

This adds a blank row at the top of the list.

b. In this row, enter the following information:

Column	Description
Title	The title of the metadata field.
JCR Property	The JCR property of the metadata field, for example: dc:title.
Input Type	The type of metadata field.
Pre-Populating Value	The default value that will be displayed in the Page Property Updating tab of the Globalization Tool. Enter one value per line. -Supported format of value for selection is Display Text. - Value, for example: Machine Translation - MT. -Supported tag of a value for date input: {Today}. - Supported tag of a value for date and time input: {Now}.

For a list and description of JCR properties, refer to the Adobe Experience Manager documentation, which is available at: https://docs.adobe.com/docs/en/aem/6-2/develop/components.html.

c. Repeat the previous sub-steps to add rows with additional metadata fields.

Click Save Configuration to save your changes.

A message in red at the top of the page states that the metadata-field configuration was saved.

Tips: To edit a set of parameters, edit the corresponding information in the list. To delete a set of parameters, so that it is excluded from the list of metadata fields, click Del in the corresponding row. A message box confirms that you want to delete this field. Click OK to confirm.

1.5.14.11 - Configuring which Page Metadata is Available for Copying and Translation

In the Page Metadata Configuration section of the Advanced Settings page, you can configure:

which metadata is available for copying to multiple pages, including multiple language copies of those pages, in the Copy Metadata tab of the Globalization Tool
which metadata is available to send out for translation by selecting the Translate Metadata check box in:
the Options page of the Bulk Translation wizard
the Translation Queue
the Translation tab of the Globalization Tool
the Translation Options tab of the Translate Content dialog box, available from the Touch-Optimized UI (Adobe Experience Manager version 6.3 and higher only
the LSP and Options tab of the Re-send translation job dialog box
SEO flags to include in the XML translation files

For instructions on copying metadata and sending it for translation, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager User Guide.

For instructions on configuring which metadata of digital assets (DAM) is available for updating, including multiple language copies of those assets, see Configuring which Digital Asset Metadata is Available for Updating.

To configure which metadata is available for copying and translation:

Click Admin Tools > Advanced Settings in the Lionbridge Connector rail. For information on opening the Lionbridge Connector rail, see Configuring the Connector.

The Advanced Settings page opens. The Page Metadata Configuration section of this page lists the JCR properties that are available for selection in the Copy Metadata tab of the Globalization Tool, where you can copy metadata to multiple pages. You can also send these properties for translation, as described above.

To add the JCR properties as metadata available for selection to copy to multiple pages or to send for translation:

a. Click Add, in the top-right corner of this section.

This adds a blank row at the top of the list.

b. In this row, enter the following information:

Column	Description
Title	The title of the metadata.
JCR Property	The JCR property of the metadata, for example: jcr:title.
Translation	Indicate whether the metadata is available only for copying or also for translation. Select one of the following: Yes: The metadata is available for both translation and copying. No: The metadata is not available for translation. It is available for copying.
SEO Flag	Specify the SEO flag to include in the XML translation files for this metadata. Important: To enable this feature, you must specify the Indicate SEO field in translation file option in the UI and Default Settings section of the Configuration page. For details, see UI and Default Settings.
Order	The order for copying or translating the metadata. This is the order in which the metadata is displayed in the file.

For a list and description of JCR properties, refer to the Adobe Experience Manager documentation, which is available at: https://docs.adobe.com/docs/en/aem/6-2/develop/components.html.

c. Repeat the previous sub-steps to add rows with additional metadata.

Click Save Configuration to save your changes.

A message in red at the top of the page states that the metadata configuration was saved.

Tips: To edit a JCR property, edit the corresponding information in the list. To delete a JCR property, so that it is excluded from the list of available metadata, click Del in the corresponding row. A message box confirms that you want to delete this field in the report. Click OK to confirm.

1.5.14.12 - Configuring which Digital Asset Metadata is Available for Updating

In the DAM Metadata Configuration section of the Advanced Settings page, you can configure which metadata of digital assets (DAM) is available for updating, including multiple language copies of those assets, in the DAM Metadata Update tab of the Globalization Tool.

For instructions on updating metadata of digital assets, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager User Guide.

To configure which metadata of digital assets is available for updating:

Click Admin Tools > Advanced Settings in the Lionbridge Connector rail. For information on opening the Lionbridge Connector rail, see Configuring the Connector.

The Advanced Settings page opens. In the DAM Metadata Configuration section of this page, you can enter the digital asset metadata fields that are available for selection in the DAM Metadata Update tab of the Globalization Tool, where you can update the metadata of multiple digital assets, including multiple language versions of these assets.

To add the JCR properties as metadata available for selection to update:

a. Click Add, in the top-right corner of this section.

This adds a blank row at the top of the list.

b. In this row, enter the following information:

Column	Description
Title	The title of the DAM metadata.
JCR Property	The JCR property of the DAM metadata, for example: dc:title.
Input Type	The type of DAM metadata that is available for updating.
Pre-Populating Value	The default value for input or initial selection options. Enter one value per line. Supported format of value for selection is Display Text - Value, for example: Machine Translation- MT. Supported tag of a value for date input: {Today}. Supported tag of a value for date and time input: {Now}.
Order	The order for updating the DAM metadata. This is the order in which the DAM metadata is displayed in the file.

For a list and description of JCR properties, refer to the Adobe Experience Manager documentation, which is available at: https://docs.adobe.com/docs/en/aem/6-2/develop/components.html.

c. Repeat the previous sub-steps to add rows with additional metadata.

Click Save Configuration to save your changes.

A message in red at the top of the page states that the DAM metadata configuration was saved.

Tips: To edit a JCR property, edit the corresponding information in the list. To delete a JCR property, so that it is excluded from the list of available metadata, click Del in the corresponding row. A message box confirms that you want to delete this field in the report. Click OK to confirm.

1.5.14.13 - Configuring which DITA Metadata is Available for Translation and Copying

Note: Please note that this options are only available for the on-premises users, Cloud users may not find these features while using the Lionbridge AEM Connector.

In the DITA Metdata Configuration section of the Advanced Settings page, you can configure the Connector to translate/copy or skip DITA metadata fields.

To configure the translation logic of the DITA metadata fields:

Click Admin Tools > Advanced Settings in the Lionbridge Connector rail. For information on opening the Lionbridge Connector rail, see Configuring the Connector.

The Advanced Settings page opens. In the DITA Metadata Configuration section of this page, you can specify the parameters of the metadata fields and the intended logic.

To specify the parameters of the metadata fields and its behavior:

a. Click Add, in the top-right corner of this section.

This adds a blank row at the top of the list.

b. In this row, enter the following information:

Column	Description
Title	The title of the metadata field.
JCR Property	The JCR property of the metadata field, for example: dc:title.
Input Type	The type of metadata field.
Translation Logic	You can select the required input type from this dropdown. Example: - Copy, Translate, and Skip. Please refer to the detailed Summary to understand how each of the following Translation Logic functions. - Translate: - The property value is translated into the target language. - Copy: - 1. The property value is not translated into the target language. - 2. The property value from the source language is copied into the target language. - Skip: - The property value is not changed.

For a list and description of JCR properties, refer to the Adobe Experience Manager documentation, which is available at: Adobe Experience Manager (AEM) Components - The Basics.

c. Repeat the previous sub-steps to add rows with additional metadata fields.

Click Save Configuration to save your changes.

A message in red at the top of the page states that the metadata-field configuration was saved.

Tips: To edit a set of parameters, edit the corresponding information in the list. To delete a set of parameters, so that it is excluded from the list of metadata fields, click Del in the corresponding row. A message box confirms that you want to delete this field. Click OK to confirm.

1.5.14.14 - Configuring which DITA Property is Available for Translation and Copying

Note: Please note that this options are only available for the on-premises users, Cloud users may not find these features while using the Lionbridge AEM Connector.

In the DITA Property Configuration section of the Advanced Settings page, you can configure the Connector to translate/copy or skip DITA property fields of a specific DAM asset.

To configure the translation logic of the DITA property fields:

Click Admin Tools > Advanced Settings in the Lionbridge Connector rail. For information on opening the Lionbridge Connector rail, see Configuring the Connector.

The Advanced Settings page opens. In the DITA Metadata Configuration section of this page, you can specify the parameters of the metadata fields and the intended logic.

To specify the parameters of the metadata fields and its behavior:

a. Click Add, in the top-right corner of this section.

This adds a blank row at the top of the list.

b. In this row, enter the following information:

Column	Description
Title	The title of the metadata field.
JCR Property	The JCR property of the metadata field, for example: dc:title.
Input Type	The type of metadata field.
Translation Logic	You can select the required input type from this dropdown. Example: - Copy, Translate, and Skip. Please refer to the detailed Summary to understand how each of the following Translation Logic functions. - Translate: - The property value is translated into the target language. - Copy: - 1. The property value is not translated into the target language. - 2. The property value from the source language is copied into the target language. - Skip: - The property value is not changed.

For a list and description of JCR properties, refer to the Adobe Experience Manager documentation, which is available at: Adobe Experience Manager (AEM) Components - The Basics.

c. Repeat the previous sub-steps to add rows with additional metadata fields.

Click Save Configuration to save your changes.

A message in red at the top of the page states that the metadata-field configuration was saved.

Tips: To edit a set of parameters, edit the corresponding information in the list. To delete a set of parameters, so that it is excluded from the list of metadata fields, click Del in the corresponding row. A message box confirms that you want to delete this field. Click OK to confirm.

1.5.14.15 - Configuring Translation Settings for Catching Pages to the Translation Queue

In the Configuration for Catching Published Pages to Queue section of the Advanced Settings page, you specify the translation settings for published pages that you add to the Translation Queue, using one of the following features:

Catch Published Workflow Pages to Queue
Catch Pages from Publish Event to Queue

You specify both these features by selecting the corresponding check boxes in the Translation Settings section of the Configuration page. For more information about these features, see Translation Settings.

To configure the translation settings when sending published pages directly to the Translation Queue:

Click Admin Tools > Advanced Settings in the Lionbridge Connector rail. For information on opening the Lionbridge Connector rail, see Configuring the Connector.

The Advanced Settings page opens. The Configuration for Catching Published Pages to Queue section is near the bottom of the page.

Click Add.

The section expands.

Specify the following translation settings for published pages that are added to the Translation Queue:

Field	Description
Source Language(s)	The source language(s) of the published pages to add to the Translation Queue. Enter comma-separated language names, as they are defined in the Language Mapping page, described in Configuring Connector Languages. To specify the source language that the Connector will detect from the relevant Blueprint pages, add the {Blueprint} tag.
Target Languages	The target languages into which to translate the published pages that are added to the Translation Queue. Enter comma-separated language names, as they are defined in the Language Mapping page, described in Configuring Connector Languages. To specify the target languages that the Connector will detect from the relevant live copies of Blueprint pages, add the {LiveCopies} tag.
Use LocalTM	This feature determines whether to check each component in the source version of the item for any content changes, and send only changed components out for translation. If a component was previously translated and it has not changed, then the Connector does not send it for translation again: Instead, it uses the stored translation. This feature reduces the quantity of content that the Connector sends to translation providers, which reduces your cost. However, it needs the Connector translation backup data, and it increases the Connector processing time before sending out the items for translation. If this check box is selected, the Connector checks whether content was already translated before sending it out for translation. If this check box is cleared, the Connector sends out content for translation without checking whether it has already been translated.
Select if using Blueprint/Live-copy	This option is relevant when the target pages are MSM (Multi Site Manager) live copy pages, which means that Adobe Experience Manager automatically updates a target page when the corresponding source page changes. It prevents the Connector from overwriting unique source content that already exists in the target pages. This is useful when you are sending a page for translation that has been used in the past to push content to other pages, and includes target page content which has been changed, for example, regionalized. In this scenario you do not want to overwrite the regionalized content as the translation process occurs. Select this option when you do not want the Connector to overwrite components in the target pages that include regionalized content with the newly translated content. If this check box is selected, the Connector does not overwrite unique source content that already exists in the target pages. If this check box is cleared, the Connector does overwrite unique source content that already exists in the target pages. Recommendation: Select this check box if you are using the live-copy feature.
Only translate content from locked components	This option enables users to send out only content from locked components for translation. If this check box is selected, users can send out content for translation only if it is from a locked component. If this check box is cleared, users can send out content for translation whether or not it is from a locked component. Note: Locked components have an inheritance relationship between a source Blueprint page and the connected live copy page. When sending content for translation using Sidekick, users can choose whether to send for translation the content from locked components, which is inherited from a Blueprint component. This is useful if, for example, the page has both global and regional information and you only want to translate (replace) the global content that is created via a Blueprint page. In this scenario, suppose that the regional content on the page is manually translated in house, and that it has not changed. You would not want to tamper with it. However, using the same scenario, the global content from head office has changed and needs translation. You would select this check box to separate the content and localize only the new, inherited content. Note about Blueprint pages: If the Pickup Content From Blueprint Pages setting is specified, then the Connector always acts as though this option is selected, even if it is not selected. This occurs because only content from locked components are rolled out from Blueprint pages to Livecopy pages. For more information, see UI and Default Settings.
Unlock the component after translated content come back	This option automatically unlocks a component after translated content returns.This option is relevant only when the Select if using Blueprint/Live-copy is been selected. After translated content returns, it automatically unlocks a component, which breaks the MSM inheritance. Warning: This breaks the inheritance between the component and its Blueprint page, so that it no longer inherits new content. However, you can use the CTCRestoreOriginalSync workflow to relock the component and recreate the inheritance. For details, see Viewing the Restore Original Sync Workflow If this check box is selected, the Connector automatically unlocks a component after translated content returns. If this check box is cleared, the Connector does not automatically unlock a component after translated content returns.
Allow translate content from Not-Sync’d components	This option enables users to send content for translation even if it is not synchronized. This means it does not have a relationship to a Blueprint page, so it cannot be synchronized with it. This can happen if you are not using the MSM (Multi Site Manager) feature of Adobe Experience Manager, or if this is a page with regionalized content that does not inherit content from a Blueprint page. If this check box is selected, users can send out content for translation if it does not have a relationship to a Blueprint page. If this check box is cleared, users cannot send out content for translation if it does not have a relationship to a Blueprint page. Important: The Connector treats certain page properties (`jcr:content`, `jcr:title`, `jcr:description`) as unlocked page properties. Therefore, if you want the Connector to send these page properties for translation, you must select this check box. Recommendation: Select this check box if you are using either the live-copy or the language-copy features. Note about Blueprint pages: If the Pickup Content From Blueprint Pages setting is specified, then the Connector always acts as though this option is selected, even when it is not. This occurs because only content from locked components is rolled out from Blueprint pages to Livecopy pages. For more information, see Enabling Content Collection from Blueprint Pages

Click Save Configuration to save your changes.

A message in red at the top of the page states that the configuration was saved.

1.5.14.16 - Configuring Paths for Catching Rollout Pages to the Translation Queue

In the Configuration for Catching Rollout Pages to Queue section of the Advanced Settings page, you can specify the paths to filter rollout pages to add to the Translation Queue.

Note: To enable the Connector to automatically add rollout pages to the Translation Queue, you must select the Catch rollout pages to [rollout] queue check box in the Translation Settings section of the Configuration page. For detailed instructions, see Translation Settings.

To specify the paths for filtering rollout pages to add directly to the Translation Queue:

Click Admin Tools > Advanced Settings in the Lionbridge Connector rail. For information on opening the Lionbridge Connector rail, see Configuring the Connector.

The Advanced Settings page opens, displaying the Configuration for Catching Rollout Pages to Queue section near the bottom of the page.

In the text box, enter the live-copy paths to filter the rollout pages to catch and add to the Translation Queue, using the following formatting:
- Use a comma ( , ) separator to separate multiple paths.
- Use an asterisk ( * ) for to indicate a wildcard value in a path, for example: *, /content/*, */LegalPage, */de/de/*.
- Use an exclamation mark ( ! ) prefix to indicate a path to exclude, for example: !*/es/us/*.
Click Save Configuration to save your changes.

A message in red at the top of the page states that the configuration was saved.

1.5.14.17 - Configuring Default Job Name for Bulk Translation

In the Configuring default job name for Bulk Translation tab of the Advanced Settings page, you specify the default job name for Bulk Translation.

To Configure default job name for Bulk Translation:

Click Admin Tools > Advanced Settings in the Lionbridge Connector rail. For information on opening the Lionbridge Connector rail, see Configuring the Connector.

The Advanced Settings page opens, Default Job Name Format for Bulk Translation section at the top of the page.

Enter in Job Name Format: with the help of tags support tags: {targets} {totalTargets} {totalPages} {time} Example: SUBMIT: {targets} ({totalTargets} targets for {totalPages} pages) @ {time}. This will create job name as SUBMIT: de,es,fr (3 targets for 2 pages) @ 2022-06-18 12.36 PM.
Click the Save Configuration to save your changes.

1.6 - Integrating the Connector with Adobe Experience Manager Workflows

This section is optional. The core Connector workflow package includes the CTCRestoreOriginalSync and CTCRolloutTranslation workflows. If you want to use the Sample_CT_Workflow_Translation workflow, you install the optional workflow package.

Workflow	Description
CTCRestoreOriginalSync	If the Leave component unlock after putting back translated content is specified, you can run this workflow to lock components and restore their original inheritance. This workflow does not require installation or customization. For a description of this workflow, see Viewing the Restore Original Sync Workflow.
CTCRolloutTranslation	This is the sample workflow for sending out files for translation when you roll out files. If you use this method to set up the rollout integration with the Connector, you include this workflow in your own rollout configuration. This workflow does not require installation or customization. For a description of this workflow, see Viewing the Rollout Workflow. Note: Alternatively, you can use the Catch rollout pages to [Rollout] Queue setting in the Translation Settings section of the Configuration page to set up the rollout integration with the Connector. For details, see Translation Settings. For more information on configuring this feature, see Configuring the Rollout Feature.
Sample_CT_Workflow_Translation	You can use the Sample_CT_Workflow_Translation workflow to send a page to the Translation Queue. You can customize this workflow. For instructions on installing this workflow, see Installing the Optional Workflow Package. For instructions on customizing this workflow, see Customizing the Standard Translation Workflow.

1.6.1 - Installing the Optional Workflow Package

To install the optional workflow package, so that you can use the Sample_CT_Workflow_Translation workflow, do one of the following:
- In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click Tools in the Adobe Experience Manager rail, and then click Deployment. Then, in the Navigation page, click Packages.
- In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, scroll down and click Packages in the right pane.
- In your Web browser, navigate to /crx/packmgr/index.jsp on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.
The CRX Package Manager opens.

Click the Content API Sample Workflow package, and follow the on-screen instructions to install it.
After the package is installed, do one of the following to open the AEM WCM page:
- In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click Tools in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. Then, in the CQ Operations section, click Workflows.
- In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click Workflows in the right pane.
- In your Web browser, navigate to /libs/cq/workflow/content/console.html on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.
The workflows you installed are displayed in the page.
To customize a workflow, click to select it, and then right-click and select Edit from the context menu.

Tip: To locate the Sample_CT_Workflow_Translation workflow , click the Next Page button .

For instructions on customizing the Sample_CT_Workflow_Translation workflow, see Customizing the Standard Translation Workflow.

1.6.1.1 - Customizing the Standard Translation Workflow

You can customize the Sample_CT_Workflow_Translation workflow, which you can use to send a page to the Translation Queue.

Open the AEM WCM page, as described on Installing the Optional Workflow Package.
Locate the Sample_CT_Workflow_Translation workflow. Click to select it, and then right-click and select Edit from the context menu.

Tip: To locate the Sample_CT_Workflow_Translation workflow , click the Next Page button .

The workflow opens in a new browser tab.

By default, this workflow includes the following two steps, which are required to integrate Adobe Experience Manager with the Connector processes:

Translation setting: This is a participant type of workflow step, where a user must specify some translation settings and can enter comments.
Add page translation: This is a process type of workflow step, where Connector retrieves translation settings from the previous step and adds page translation properties.

Warning: Do not modify these steps, except for the titles. Otherwise the Connector integration with the Adobe Experience Manager workflow may not work properly.

You can add additional steps as needed to meet your company’s business requirements. For detailed instructions on setting up workflows, refer to the Adobe Experience Manager workflow documentation, available at: https://helpx.adobe.com/experience-manager/6-5/sites/administering/using/workflows-starting.html.

1.6.2 - Viewing the Rollout Workflow

You can add the CTCRolloutTranslation workflow to your custom rollout configuration to integrate the Connector with rollout. This is the configuration method to use when you want the Connector to send only some rollout files to the Translation Queue.

Note: Alternatively, you can use the Catch rollout pages to [Rollout] Queue setting in the Translation Settings section of the Configuration page to enable this functionality, as described in Translation Settings. This option is the configuration method to use when you want the Connector to send out all rollout files to the Translation Queue. For more information about configuring this feature, see Configuring the Rollout Feature.

Open the AEM WCM page, as described on Installing the Optional Workflow Package.
Locate the CTCRolloutTranslation workflow. Click to select it, and then right-click and select Edit from the context menu.

The workflow opens in a new browser tab.

By default, this workflow includes the CTC Rollout Translation step, which is required to integrate Adobe Experience Manager with the Connector processes. This is a process type of workflow step, where Connector adds rollout pages to the Translation Queue.

Warning: Do not modify this step, except for the title. Otherwise the Connector integration with the Adobe Experience Manager workflow may not work properly.

1.6.3 - Viewing the Restore Original Sync Workflow

You can view the CTCRestoreOriginalSync workflow. After users send out components for translation, they can use this workflow to relock them to restore their original inheritance.

Open the AEM WCM page, as described on Installing the Optional Workflow Package.
Locate the CTCRestoreOriginalSync workflow. Click to select it, and then right-click and select Edit from the context menu.

The workflow opens in a new browser tab.

By default, this workflow includes the Restore original Sync that unlocked by CTC translation step, which is required to integrate Adobe Experience Manager with the Connector processes. This is a process type of workflow step, where Connector relocks components and restores their original inheritance.

Warning: Do not modify this step, except for the title. Otherwise the Connector integration with the Adobe Experience Manager workflow may not work properly.

1.7 - Implementing an Event Listener to Catch Translation Events

Note: This section is not applicable for the AEM Cloud Connector as CRXDE is not available in Adobe Experience Manager Cloud.

The Connector fires events for translation-related actions. You can create an event handler to receive these events, and you can take action when these events occur.

Translation events

There are eight Connector translation events defined in the following class:

com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.Events.EventDetailType

package com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.Events;

public enum EventDetailType {
    QueueApproved,
    QueuePrepared,
    SentOut,
    Reached\_Platform,
    StartedTranslation,
    ReceivedTranslationBack,
    CompletedTranslationProcess,
    CompletedJobTranslations
}

For above Translation events one more

Event topics

An Event Topic is com/claytablet/TRANSLATION, defined in the

com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.Events.TranslationEvent class, which can be used as:

com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.Events.TranslationEvent.EVENT\_TOPIC.

Creating an event handler:

To retrieve a translation event, use: TranslationEvent translationEvent = TranslationEvent.fromEvent(Event event);
To retrieve a translation event type, use: EventDetailType eventType = translationEvent.getEventDetailType();

Event listener sample code

Note:. The following sample code is also included in the following package, which is in the following location in CRXDE Lite: /apps/CTEventHanlder/src/impl/src/main/java/com/testguru/ctevents/ hanlder/CTEventHanlder/impl/CTEventsHanlderImpl.java. You can install this package using the CRX Package Manager. For detailed instructions on using the CRX Package Manager, see Installing the Lionbridge Connector.

package com.testguru.ctevents.handler.CTEventHandler.impl;

import java.io.File;
import java.util.Iterator;
import org.apache.commons.io.FileUtils;
import org.apache.sling.event.EventUtil;
import org.osgi.service.component.ComponentContext;
import org.osgi.service.event.Event;
import org.osgi.service.event.EventConstants;
import org.osgi.service.event.EventHandler;
import com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.Utils.IdGenerator;
import com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.service.CTLogService;
import com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.service.ctcdata.PreparedItem;
import com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.service.ctcdata.Queue;
import com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.service.ctcdata.TranslatedItem;
import com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.service.ctcdata.TranslationItem;
import com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.Events.TranslationEvent;
import com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.Events.ApprovedQueueDetails;
import com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.Events.EventDetailType;
import com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.Events.PageTranslationInfo;
import com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.Events.PreparedQueueDetails;
import com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.Events.TranslationItemDetails;
import com.claytablet.cq5.ctctranslation.Events.TranslatedItemDetails;

/\*\*
\*
\* @scr.component enabled="true" immediate="true" policy="ignore"
\* @scr.service interface="EventHandler"
\* @scr.property name="event.topics" valueRef="TranslationEvent.EVENT\_TOPIC"
\*/

public class CTEventsHandlerImpl implements EventHandler {

    /\*\*
    \* @scr.reference policy="static"
    \*/
    
    private CTLogService ctcLogService;

    public void activate(ComponentContext context) {

        ctcLogService.LogDebug("[CTEventsHandler] activated.");
    }

    public void deactivate(ComponentContext context) {
        ctcLogService.LogDebug("[CTEventsHandler] de-activated.");
    }

    public void handleEvent(Event event)
    {
        ctcLogService.LogRolloutDebug("[CTEventsHandler] handleEvent called ...Start");
        try
        {

            ctcLogService.LogDebug("[CTEventsHandler] Get a event: " + event.getTopic());
            if (EventUtil.isLocal(event) )
            {
                try
                {
                    TranslationEvent translationEvent = TranslationEvent.fromEvent
                    (event);

                    if (translationEvent != null)
                    {
                        EventDetailType  eventType = translationEvent.getEventDetailType();
                        PageTranslationInfo pageTranslationInfo =
                        translationEvent.getPageTranslationInfo();
                        if (pageTranslationInfo == null)
                            ctcLogService.LogError("[CTEventsHandler] got PageTranslationInfo object as NULL.");
                        else
                        {
                            ctcLogService.LogDebug("[CTEventsHandler] got TranslationJob name: " + pageTranslationInfo.getTranslationJob().getJobName());
                            ctcLogService.LogDebug("[CTEventsHandler] TranslationJob
                            submitted by: " +
                            pageTranslationInfo.getTranslationJob().getSubmitBy());
                            ctcLogService.LogDebug("[CTEventsHandler] got SourcePagePath: "
                            + pageTranslationInfo.getSourcePagePath());
                            ctcLogService.LogDebug("[CTEventsHandler] got
                            SourcePageLanguage: " +
                            pageTranslationInfo.getSourcePageLanguage());
                            ctcLogService.LogDebug("[CTEventsHandler] got TargetPagePath: "+
                            pageTranslationInfo.getTargetPagePath() );
                            ctcLogService.LogDebug("[CTEventsHandler] got
                            TargetPageLanguage: "+
                            pageTranslationInfo.getTargetPageLanguage() );
                        }

                        if (eventType == EventDetailType.QueueApproved)
                        {
                            ctcLogService.LogDebug("[CTEventsHandler] is a QueueApproved event.");
                            ApprovedQueueDetails  approvedQueueDetails = translationEvent.getApprovedQueueDetails();
                            if (approvedQueueDetails == null)
                                ctcLogService.LogError("[CTEventsHandler] got ApprovedQueueDetails object as NULL.");
                            else
                            {
                                Queue approvedQueue = approvedQueueDetails.getQueue();
                                if (approvedQueue == null)
                                    ctcLogService.LogError("[CTEventsHandler] got Queue object as NULL.");
                                else
                                    ctcLogService.LogDebug("[CTEventsHandler] got total words:
                                    " + approvedQueue.getCountedWords());
                            }
                        }
                        else if (eventType == EventDetailType.QueuePrepared)
                        {
                            ctcLogService.LogDebug("[CTEventsHandler] is a QueuePrepared
                            event.");
                            PreparedQueueDetails  preparedQueueDetails =
                            translationEvent.getPreparedQueueDetails();
                            
                            if (preparedQueueDetails == null)
                                ctcLogService.LogError("[CTEventsHandler] got preparedQueueDetails object as NULL.");
                            else
                            {
                                PreparedItem preparedItem = preparedQueueDetails.getPreparedItem();
                                if (preparedItem == null)
                                    ctcLogService.LogError("[CTEventsHandler] got PreparedItem object as NULL.");
                                else
                                    ctcLogService.LogDebug("[CTEventsHandler] got total EST words: " + preparedItem.getEstWords());
                            }
                        }
                        else if (eventType == EventDetailType.SentOut)
                        {
                            ctcLogService.LogDebug("[CTEventsHandler] is a SentOut event.");
                            TranslationItemDetails  translationItemDetails = translationEvent.getTranslationItemDetails();
                            if (translationItemDetails == null)
                                ctcLogService.LogError("[CTEventsHandler] got TranslationItemDetails object as NULL.");
                            else
                            {
                                TranslationItem translationItem = translationItemDetails.getTranslationItem();
                                if (translationItem == null)
                                    ctcLogService.LogError("[CTEventsHandler] got TranslationItem object as NULL.");
                                else
                                    ctcLogService.LogDebug("[CTEventsHandler] got status percentage: " + translationItem.getItemPercentage());
                            }
                        }
                        else if (eventType == EventDetailType.Reached\_Platform)
                        {
                            ctcLogService.LogDebug("[CTEventsHandler] is a Reached\_Platform event.");
                            TranslationItemDetails  translationItemDetails = translationEvent.getTranslationItemDetails();
                            if (translationItemDetails == null)
                                ctcLogService.LogError("[CTEventsHandler] got TranslationItemDetails object as NULL.");
                            else
                            {
                                TranslationItem translationItem = translationItemDetails.getTranslationItem();
                                if (translationItem == null)
                                    ctcLogService.LogError("[CTEventsHandler] got TranslationItem object as NULL.");
                                else
                                    ctcLogService.LogDebug("[CTEventsHandler] got status percentage: " + translationItem.getItemPercentage());
                            }
                        }
                        else if (eventType == EventDetailType.StartedTranslation)
                        {
                            ctcLogService.LogDebug("[CTEventsHandler] is a StartedTranslation event.");
                            TranslationItemDetails  translationItemDetails = translationEvent.getTranslationItemDetails();
                            if (translationItemDetails == null)
                                ctcLogService.LogError("[CTEventsHandler] got TranslationItemDetails object as NULL.");
                            else
                            {
                                TranslationItem translationItem = translationItemDetails.getTranslationItem();
                                if (translationItem == null)
                                    ctcLogService.LogError("[CTEventsHandler] got TranslationItem object as NULL.");
                                else
                                ctcLogService.LogDebug("[CTEventsHandler] got status percentage: " + translationItem.getItemPercentage());
                            }
                        }
                        else if (eventType == EventDetailType.ReceivedTranslationBack)
                        {
                            ctcLogService.LogDebug("[CTEventsHandler] is a ReceivedTranslationBack event.");
                            TranslationItemDetails  translationItemDetails = translationEvent.getTranslationItemDetails();
                            if (translationItemDetails == null)
                                ctcLogService.LogError("[CTEventsHandler] got TranslationItemDetails object as NULL.");
                            else
                            {
                                TranslationItem translationItem = translationItemDetails.getTranslationItem();
                                if (translationItem == null)
                                    ctcLogService.LogError("[CTEventsHandler] got TranslationItem object as NULL.");
                                else
                                    ctcLogService.LogDebug("[CTEventsHandler] got status percentage: " + translationItem.getItemPercentage());
                            }   
                            TranslatedItemDetails  translatedItemDetails = translationEvent.getTranslatedItemDetails();
                            if (translatedItemDetails == null)
                                ctcLogService.LogError("[CTEventsHandler] got TranslatedItemDetails object as NULL.");
                            else
                            {
                                TranslatedItem translatedItem = translatedItemDetails.getTranslatedItem();
                                if (translatedItem == null)
                                    ctcLogService.LogError("[CTEventsHandler] got TranslatedItem object as NULL.");
                                else
                                    ctcLogService.LogDebug("[CTEventsHandler] got totsl translated fields: " +
                                        translatedItem.getTranslatedPageContent().getPropertyContents().size());
                            }
                        }
                        else if (eventType == EventDetailType.CompletedTranslationProcess)
                        {
                            ctcLogService.LogDebug("[CTEventsHandler] is a CompletedTranslationProcess event.");
                            TranslationItemDetails  translationItemDetails = translationEvent.getTranslationItemDetails();
                            if (translationItemDetails == null)
                                ctcLogService.LogError("[CTEventsHandler] got TranslationItemDetails object as NULL.");
                            else
                            {
                                TranslationItem translationItem = translationItemDetails.getTranslationItem();
                                if (translationItem == null)
                                    ctcLogService.LogError("[CTEventsHandler] got TranslationItem object as NULL.");
                                else
                                    ctcLogService.LogDebug("[CTEventsHandler] got status percentage: " + translationItem.getItemPercentage());
                            }
                            TranslatedItemDetails  translatedItemDetails = translationEvent.getTranslatedItemDetails();
                            if (translatedItemDetails == null)
                                ctcLogService.LogError("[CTEventsHandler] got TranslatedItemDetails object as NULL.");
                            else
                            {
                                TranslatedItem translatedItem = translatedItemDetails.getTranslatedItem();
                                if (translatedItem == null)
                                    ctcLogService.LogError("[CTEventsHandler] got TranslatedItem object as NULL.");
                                else
                                    ctcLogService.LogDebug("[CTEventsHandler] got totsl translated fields: " + translatedItem.getTranslatedPageContent().getPropertyContents().size());
                            }
                        }
                    }
                    else
                    {
                        ctcLogService.LogDebug("[CTEventsHandler] Is not a CT TranslationEvent event. ignore.");
                    }
                }
                catch (Exception te) {
                    ctcLogService.LogRolloutError("[CTEventsHandler] Error: " + te.getMessage() );
                }
                finally {
            }
        }
    }
    catch (Exception finale) {}
        ctcLogService.LogRolloutDebug("[CTEventsHandler] handleEvent called...Done!");
    }
}

1.8 - Installing the Connector in a Clustered Environment

Note: This section is not applicable for the AEM Cloud Connector.

This section describes how to install the Connector for Adobe Experience Manager in a clustered environment.

To install the Connector in a clustered environment, you install it on a single instance in the cluster. This installation is the same as installing the Connector in a non-clustered environment, as described in Installing the Lionbridge Connector.

After you install the Connector package on a single node in the cluster, it is automatically installed on the other nodes in the cluster, using the same configuration.

You can access each node in the cluster separately by its URL, using the Adobe Experience Manager Dispatcher. For detailed instructions, see https://docs.adobe.com/docs/en/dispatcher.html.

Before you begin to install the Connector in a clustered environment, please review the system requirements, described on System Requirements, and verify that each host that will be a cluster node in the cluster meets the requirements.

To install the Connector in a clustered environment:

Prevent users from deliberately or accidentally sending items for translation during the upgrade process.

Recommendation: Remove users from groups with permission to send new translation jobs.

Setting Your System Date, Time, and Time Zone Correctly. Do this on each host that will be a cluster node.
Downloading the Delivery Package. Do this once. Save the package to a location that is accessible to all hosts that will be cluster nodes.
Creating or Updating a Connector Database on your Database Server Instance. Ensure that the database is accessible to all hosts that will be cluster nodes.
Creating the Connector Folders. These are the optional folders where the Connector stores your licensing information and your translation data. If your environment will use these folders, then create one set of folders and sub-folders on each host that will be a cluster node.

Recommendation: These folders should not be shared folders.

1.9 - Automatically Updating Your Connector Configuration

You can configure the Connector to automatically load and update its configuration. This is useful in the following scenarios:

upgrading your instance of the Connector
moving your installation to a new environment
copying your installation to a new environment

To export your configuration from the Connector:

Each Connector configuration page corresponds to an XML configuration file. The table below indicates which Connector configuration page corresponds to a particular configuration file.

To download all these configurations as a single ZIP file, click Admin Tools > Configuration in the Lionbridge Connector rail. For information on opening the Lionbridge Connector rail, see Configuring the Connector.

The Configuration page opens.

At the bottom of the Configuration page, click Export All Configurations.

Alternatively, for pages marked below with an asterisk (*), you can download the individual configuration files from those pages. For detailed instructions, refer to the last column in the table.

Configuration Page	Corresponding Configuration File	For Details, See…
Configuration page: - configuration options * - translation options *	ctcconfig.xml	Configuring Connector Global Settings
Language Mapping page *	languagemapping.xml	Configuring Connector Languages
Component Mapping page *	fields4trans.xml	Configuring which Components and Properties to Send Out for Translation
LSP and Keys page * Note: You cannot import license-key settings from 3.x versions of the Connector to 4.x versions, because they use different license-key formats.	lspkeys.xml	Configuring Translation Providers and License Keys
Advanced Settings page *	advancedSettings.xml	Configuring Advanced Settings in the User Interface
Team Profiles page	teamprofiles.xml	Configuring Team Profiles
Queue Scheduler	queueschedules.xml	Scheduling Translation Jobs to Send Out Content from the Translation Queue
Custom Asset Handlers	assethandlers.xml	Creating a Custom Asset Handler

To set up the Connector to automatically import configuration files from the Configuration page:

Click the Import Configuration button on the Configuration page.
Choose the xml file to import then click the Upload button.

After clicking the Upload button, you can see an Imported Successfully message. Now close the pop up window.

Note: The following procedure is not applicable for the AEM Cloud Connector.

To set up the Connector to automatically import configuration files from the default location:

Place the files to import in the following location: AEM_QuickStart_Folder\CTC_Configs\Import. The Connector monitors this location and imports any new files.

To set up the Connector to automatically import configuration files from any location:

Create the CTC_INIT_HOME environment variable on the Adobe Experience Manager server.
- In Windows, you create an environment variable by clicking the Environment Variables button in the Advanced tab of the System Properties dialog box, which you can open from the Control Panel.
- In Linux, you can add the environment variable by adding the following export statement to one of the files described in the table below:

export CTC_INIT_HOME=/root/adobe/ctcdata/init_config

File	Description
~/.bash_profile	This file runs when the local user profile logs in to a terminal window. If you start Adobe Experience Manager by typing the start command, then you can use this file so that CTC_INIT_HOME is always available when you run Adobe Experience Manager.
/etc/environment	This file is the global UNIX configuration file. After adding the export statement above and rebooting the machine, CTC_INIT_HOME will be available everywhere. Note: This file is intended specifically for system-wide environment variable settings. It is not a script file, and it consists of one assignment expression per line.
startup script: crx-quickstart/bin/start	This file is the startup script of your Adobe Experience Manager instance. Adding the export statement to this file initializes the CTC_INIT_HOME variable locally, within the Adobe Experience Manager process.

Set the value of this environment variable to a directory with read and write permissions that is accessible to the Adobe Experience Manager process or instance, for example:
- Windows: C:\ctcdata\init_config\
- Linux: export CTC_INIT_HOME=/var/adobe/ctcdata/init_config
Restart the Adobe Experience Manager server.

The Connector now monitors this directory and automatically loads any configuration files in this directory. It saves the configuration files to the following location on the Adobe Experience Manager server: /etc/ctctranslation.

To specify which configuration files to import:

Copy the configuration files exported previously into the directory specified by the CTC_INIT_HOME environment variable.

The Connector automatically loads these configuration files and updates its configuration.

1.10 - Troubleshooting Installation and Configuration Issues

Issue	Description
Lionbridge Connector Does Not Load	The Lionbridge Connector does not load, or only the Connector landing page loads, but the Connector does not run.
Communication Errors When Sending Content for Translation	You experience communication errors when sending content for translation.
Error Displayed about LSPs when Submitting a Job	When attempting to send out content for translation, the Connector displays errors about checking LSP keys.
Search Agents Are Not Displayed	- The default search agents are not displayed in the Search Agents page. (Click Admin Tools > Search Agents in the Lionbridge Connector rail to open the Search Agents page.) - The default search agents are not available for selection from the Search Using Agent dropdown list in the Pages page of the Bulk Translation wizard.
Inaccurate Translation Status	Either: - A submitted job is stuck at 1% or 2% -A returned translation job is stuck at 90%.
The Connector Does Not Send Out Submitted Jobs or Return Translated Content	The Connector does not process any jobs and one or all of the Connector chains is red.
The Connector Does Not Send Out Submitted Jobs	The Connector does not process any jobs and the Upload Service chain is red.
The Translation Provider Does Not Receive Content in New or Custom Languages	The Connector successfully sends content for translation in new or custom languages but it does not reach the translation provider.
The Connector Does Not Process Returned Translations after Language Mapping Changes	Changes to language mapping occurred while content in the changed language was out for translation. After the translated content returns, the Connector does not process it.
Job Submitted for Translation Is Missing Some Strings	The Connector successfully sent the job to the LSP, but some of the source content is missing from the job and it was not sent.
Cannot Select New Translation Provider When Sending Out Content for Translation	After using an account license key to install a new translation provider (LSP), it is not available for selection when submitting a new job.
New Target Language Is Not Available When Sending Out Content for Translation	After configuring a new target language, it is not available for selection when submitting a new job.
Adobe Experience Manager Service Authentication	If you are using Adobe Experience Manager 6.3 or higher with versions 3.2.0 and higher of the Connector, the following problems may occur: You cannot save all Connector configurations. Translated content does not return to Adobe Experience Manager. You cannot perform most Globalization Tool functionality with the default settings.
Freeway Analysis Codes not Displayed when Sending Out Content for Translation	The add-on for Lionbridge Freeway is installed, and Freeway analysis codes specified, but they are not displayed or available for selection when sending out content for translation.

1.10.1 - Lionbridge Connector Does Not Load

One or both of the following issues may cause the Lionbridge Connector not to load, or may cause only the Connector landing page to load, but the Connector does not run.

Possible Issue	Explanation	Solution
Configuration files are loaded from the InitConfig Lionbridge Connector local directory, and the user accessing this directory does not have read/write permissions.	If you are trying to load configuration files from InitConfig Lionbridge Connector local directory, the user accessing this directory must have read/write permissions.	For detailed configuration instructions, see Automatically Updating Your Connector Configuration.
The configuration files are pointing to an incorrect database location.	Refer to the general log file for details. If there are database errors, such as all database statements are failing, or if there is a general communications link failure, the database may be incorrectly configured.	Check the database strings in the configuration file.

1.10.2 - Keys not Displayed

Issue

In the LSP & Keys page, in the LSP and Keys section, the license keys are not displayed or available selection after clicking Retrieve next to the License Key field.

Explanation

Your firewall is blocking access to the Content API Server.

You must configure your ports so that the Connector can communicate with the server.
You must import the SSL certificate into your browser’s certificate store.

Solutions

If you have a firewall:

Configure your ports so that the Connector can communicate with the Content API Server. The URL of this server is https://api.clay-tablet.net/license/v1. For more information, see Configuring Network Settings for a Firewall.
Download or export the SSL certificate from the Clay Tablet License Server (https://api.clay-tablet.net/license/v1). For detailed instructions, see:

Import the downloaded SSL certificate into your browser’s certificate store. For detailed instructions, see:

1.10.2.1 - Exporting an SSL Certificate in Google Chrome

This section provides detailed information about exporting an SSL certificate in Google Chrome:

from AWS S3, as instructed in Communication Errors When Sending Content for Translation
from the Clay Tablet License Server, as instructed in License Keys not Displayed

To export an SSL Certificate in Chrome:

In the Chrome browser, go to one of the following URLs:
- To resolve communication errors with the Clay Tablet License Server, use https://api.clay-tablet.net/license/v1.
- To resolve communication errors with AWS S3, use https://ct_test_create_key.s3.amazonaws.com.

The page opens.

Note: Ignore the Access Denied error message in the page that opens.

Click the padlock in the address bar.

The Connection is secure dialog box opens.

Click Certificate.

The Certificate dialog box opens, displaying the General tab.

Click the Details tab to view it.

Click Copy to File.

The Certificate Export Wizard opens.

Click Next.

The Export File Format page of the wizard opens.

Accept the default format of DER encoded binary X.509, and click Next.

The File to Export page of the wizard opens.

Do one of the following:
- In the File name text box, enter the path and name of the file in which you want to save the certificate. The file has a .cer extension. For example, enter C:\Users\jsmith\Documents\SSL certificates\AWS S3.cer.
- Click Browse, and in the Save As dialog box:
  - Navigate to the folder where you want to save the file.
  - Assign a filename with a .cer extension.
  - Click Save.
When you are done, click Next.

The Completing the Certificate Export Wizard page opens, displaying the filename, path and format.
Click Finish to close the wizard.

The Certificate Export Wizard message box states that the export was successful.

Click OK to close the Certificate dialog box.
Next, you do one of the following:

To resolve communication errors with the Clay Tablet License Server, you import the exported SSL certificate into your Chrome certificate store. For detailed instructions, see Importing an SSL Certificate into Your Chrome Certificate Store.
To resolve communication errors with AWS S3, you import the exported SSL certificate into Your Java Trusted Keystore. Do one of the following:
- If Java (JDK) is installed on the server where Adobe Experience Manager is hosted, follow these instructions: Importing an SSL Certificate into Your Java Trusted Keystore with Java (JDK).
- If JRE is installed on the server where Adobe Experience Manager is hosted, follow these instructions: Importing an SSL Certificate into Your Java Trusted Keystore with JRE.

1.10.2.2 - Downloading an SSL Certificate in Mozilla Firefox

This section provides detailed information about downloading an SSL certificate in Mozilla Firefox:

from AWS S3, as instructed in Communication Errors When Sending Content for Translation
from the Clay Tablet License Server, as instructed in License Keys not Displayed

To download an SSL Certificate from Firefox:

In the Firefox browser, go to one of the following URLs:
- To resolve communication errors with the Clay Tablet License Server, use https://api.clay-tablet.net/license/v1.
- To resolve communication errors with AWS S3, use https://ct_test_create_key.s3.amazonaws.com.

The page opens.

Click the padlock in the address bar.

Click the arrow beside Connection Secure.

Click More Information.

The Page Info dialog box opens.

Click View Certificate.

The Certificate page opens.

Scroll down to the Miscellaneous section.
In the Download row, click the PEM (cert) link.

In the dialog box that opens, click OK to save the certificate file to a known location.

Navigate to the location for saving the file, and then click Save.
Next, you do one of the following:

To resolve communication errors with the Clay Tablet License Server, you import the downloaded SSL certificate into your Firefox certificate store. For detailed instructions, see Importing an SSL Certificate into Your Firefox Certificate Store.
To resolve communication errors with AWS S3, you import the exported SSL certificate into Your Java Trusted Keystore. Do one of the following:
- If Java (JDK) is installed on the server where Adobe Experience Manager is hosted, follow these instructions: Importing an SSL Certificate into Your Java Trusted Keystore with Java (JDK).
- If JRE is installed on the server where Adobe Experience Manager is hosted, follow these instructions: Importing an SSL Certificate into Your Java Trusted Keystore with JRE.

1.10.2.3 - Importing an SSL Certificate into Your Chrome Certificate Store

You import an exported SSL certificate into your Chrome certificate store to display the license keys for the Clay Tablet License Server so that they are available for selection.

To import an SSL Certificate into your Chrome certificate store:

In the Chrome browser, click the Customize and control Google Chrome icon in the top right corner, and then click Settings.

The Settings page opens.

In the menu on the left, click Privacy and Security.
Scroll down to the bottom of the section.
In the Manage certificates sub-section, click the icon.

The Certificates dialog box opens.

Click Import.

The Certificate Import Wizard opens.

Click Next.

The File to Import page of the wizard opens.

Click Browse, and navigate to and select the SSL certificate you previously exported. Then click Open.
Click Next.
In the Certificate Store page of the wizard, browse to the certificate store where you want to save the certificate. Then click Next.

In the final page of the wizard, review your settings and click Finish.

The certificate is imported into your Chrome certificate store.

1.10.2.4 - Importing an SSL Certificate into Your Firefox Certificate Store

You import a downloaded SSL certificate into your Firefox certificate store to display the license keys for the Clay Tablet License Server so that they are available for selection.

To import an SSL Certificate into your Firefox certificate store:

In the Firefox browser, click the Open menu icon in the top-right corner, and then click Options.

The Preferences page opens.

In the menu on the left, click Privacy & Security.
Scroll down to the Security section and the Certificates sub-section.

Click View Certificates.

The Certificate Manager opens.

Click Import.
In the dialog box that opens, navigate to and select the SSL certificate you previously exported. Then click Open.

The certificate is imported into your Firefox certificate store, and a message box states that the import was successful.

1.10.3 - Communication Errors When Sending Content for Translation

Issue

Communication errors occur when sending content for translation.

Explanation

Your firewall is blocking access to AWS S3 and SQS. You must import the SSL certificates from AWS S3 and SQS into your Java trusted keystore. This enables HTTPS support, which means support for the SSL/TLS protocols.

Solution

The following general steps are required:

Downloading or exporting the AWS SSL certificates from your browser’s certificate store. For detailed instructions, see:
- Exporting an SSL Certificate in Google Chrome
- Downloading an SSL Certificate in Mozilla Firefox
Importing the downloaded/exported certificates into your Java trusted keystore. The instructions are different depending on whether Java or the JRE is installed on the server where Adobe Experience Manager is hosted. For detailed instructions, see:
- Importing an SSL Certificate into Your Java Trusted Keystore with Java (JDK)
- Importing an SSL Certificate into Your Java Trusted Keystore with JRE

Note: You must update these certificates whenever AWS renews them. This is likely once a year.

1.10.3.1 - Importing an SSL Certificate into Your Java Trusted Keystore with Java (JDK)

You import the downloaded/exported SSL certificate into your Java trusted keystore to resolve communication issues with AWS S3 and SQS. There are different instructions depending on whether Java (JDK) or JRE is installed on the server where Adobe Experience Manager is hosted.

To import an SSL certificate into your Java trusted keystore with JRE:

Run the keytool -import -alias ALIAS -file public.cert -storetype TYPE -keystore server.truststore command. For example:

keytool -import -alias teiid -file public.cert -storetype JKS -keystore server.truststore

If the specified truststore already exists, enter the existing password for that truststore, otherwise enter a new password.
When you are prompted to trust the certificate, enter yes.

The certificate in public.cert has been added to the new truststore named server.truststore.

1.10.3.2 - Importing an SSL Certificate into Your Java Trusted Keystore with JRE

To import an SSL certificate into your Java trusted keystore with JRE:

Run the Java keytool command to import the certificate into the keystore.

a. Open a command prompt and change to the following directory: <location> \bin\jre\6.0\bin.

where <location> is the file directory where Adobe Experience Manager is installed.

Note: On 64-bit computers, add the certificates to the bin64 folder.

b. Run the following command line. Although for formatting purposes the command is displayed with line breaks, you should enter the entire command on one line.

keytool -import -file "C:\&lt;location&gt;\bin\ssl\applixca.pem"

-keystore "C:\&lt;location&gt;\bin\jre\6.0\lib\security\cacerts"

-storepass "changeit"Copy

For 64-bit installations, target the 64-bit folder when dealing with the certificates. For example, this sample command targets the 64-bit jre:

cd C:\Program Files (x86)\AEM\TM1\_64\bin64\jre\6.0\binCopy

The following command is an example used on 64-bit systems. Although for formatting purposes the command is displayed with line breaks, you should enter the entire command on one line.

keytool -import -file "C:\Program Files (x86)\AEM\TM1\_64\bin64\

ssl\applixca.pem" -keystore "C:\Program Files (x86)\AEM\TM1\_64\bin64\

jre\6.0\lib\security\cacerts" -storepass "changeit"Copy

Note: If you do not correctly target the 64-bit locations for certificates when running a 64-bit installation, a warning message is displayed, indicating that you cannot contact the servers.

c. When prompted to trust or add the certificate, enter yes.

The following message is displayed: Certificate was added to keystore.

You may need to restart the server where Adobe Experience Manager is hosted for the change take effect.

1.10.4 - Error Displayed about LSPs when Submitting a Job

Issue

When attempting to send out content for translation, the Connector displays errors about checking LSP keys.

Explanation

The URLs of the Content API Server are whitelisted using the entire address, including the key names from the URL.

Solution

If you have a firewall:

Click Admin Tools > LSP and Keys in the Lionbridge Connector rail to open the LSP & Keys page.
In the Content API URLs section, which displays a list of URLs used by the Content API Platform, instead of whitelisting the entire address, exclude the key names from the URL. For example, enter ctt-platform-prod-us-east-1/*. For more information, see Editing a License Key.

1.10.5 - Search Agents Are Not Displayed

Possible Issue	Explanation	Solution
The default search agents are not displayed in the Search Agents page. (Click Admin Tools > Search Agents in the Lionbridge Connector rail to open the Search Agents page.)	The configuration files are pointing to an incorrect database location. Refer to the general log file for details. If there are database errors, such as all database statements are failing, or if there is a general communications link failure, the database may be incorrectly configured.	Check the database strings in the configuration file.
The default search agents are not available for selection from the Search Using Agent dropdown list in the Pages page of the Bulk Translation wizard.

1.10.6 - Inaccurate Translation Status

The displayed translation status is inaccurate.

Possible Issue	Explanation	Solution
Either: - A job was submitted and the translation provider has confirmed receipt, but in the Job Details tab of the Translation Status page, some but not all pages are at 10%/In Translation. - The translation provider has confirmed that all files were successfully delivered, but in the Translation Status page, some but not all pages are at 100%/Completed. An example is displayed in the screen capture below.	Either: - The key used for the translation job was duplicated in another environment. - The environment from which the job was submitted has been cloned. Do not duplicate these keys or install them on multiple Adobe Experience Manager Author Server instances, because this is a violation of the License Agreement. Using the same keys on multiple Adobe Experience Manager Author Server instances will cause the Connector to behave unexpectedly, which can result in lost translation content, orphaned projects, and inaccurate translation status reports. Lionbridge Connector Support will support technical issues caused by duplicating or incorrectly installing keys only on a time and materials basis.	1.Remove any duplicate keys or cloned environments. For detailed setup instructions, see Configuring Translation Providers and License Keys. - If some but not all pages are at 10%/In Translation, cancel the original translation job and resubmit it. - If some but not all pages are at 100%/Completed, ask the translation provider to redeliver the translation job.
	The Lionbridge Connector database has been shared with another environment. The Connector requires a unique, non-shared, database for storing translations returned to the Connector. Sharing a database can result in another environment processing the returned translations into that environment.	1. Change the database user name and password. 2. In the JDBC SQL Connection section of the Configuration page, update the Login Name and Login Password. For detailed instructions, see JDBC SQL Connection. 3. Ask the translation provider to redeliver the translation job.

1.10.7 - The Connector Does Not Send Out Submitted Jobs or Return Translated Content

The Connector does not process any jobs and one or all of the Connector chains is red.


Generally, the chain should be green:	However, at least one element in the chain is red:

Possible Issue	Explanation	Solution
One or more of the required Connector services is not running.	For the Connector to function correctly, all Connector components must be installed and active.	Verify that all Connector components are active. For detailed instructions, see Verifying that the Bundle and All Connector Components Are Active.

1.10.8 - The Connector Does Not Send Out Submitted Jobs

The Connector does not seem to process any jobs and the Upload Service is inactive (red).


Generally, the chain should be green:	However, the Upload Service in the chain is red:

Possible Issue	Explanation	Solution
Multiple jobs are stuck in Preparing and/or Sending status.	When there many failed attempts to send out jobs, the log files are spammed with job processing details. This may cause the Upload Service to become inactive (red).	Open the Translation Status page (/content/ctctranslation/status.html), and delete all the jobs that have been stuck in Preparing and/or Sending status for an extended period of time.

1.10.9 - The Translation Provider Does Not Receive Content in New or Custom Languages

The Connector successfully sends content for translation in new or custom languages but it does not reach the translation provider.

Possible Issue	Explanation	Solution
The Content API Platform does not have the updated language mapping.	Your company and your translation provider may use different language codes in their technology/workflows. The Content API Platform can map language codes in Adobe Experience Manager to those expected by the translation provider.	Contact Lionbridge Connector Support to request a review of the Connector language mapping for the translation provider to ensure that the new language is correctly mapped for the target platform. For details, see How to Contact Lionbridge Connector Support.
The translation provider requires that source-target languages pairs are configured before any new translation requests.	The translation platforms of most translation provider require that source-target language pairs are configured.	Contact the translation provider and verify that the all source-target language pairs are configured.

1.10.10 - The Connector Does Not Process Returned Translations after Language Mapping Changes

Possible Issue	Explanation	Solution
Changes to language mapping occurred while content in the changed language was out for translation. After the translated content returns, the Connector does not process it.	The changes to language mapping changed the language reference path in CRX. The Connector uses the page path to return translated content back to Adobe Experience Manager. If that page path is changed while content is out for translation, then the Connector cannot return the translated content to Adobe Experience Manager.For details, see Configuring Connector Languages.	Do not change the name of a language or delete a language if there is translation content in the Translation Queue, or if there are translation jobs in progress. If this occurs accidentally, then resend the job with the new language name, and notify your translation provider that this replaces the previous job.

1.10.11 - Job Submitted for Translation Is Missing Some Strings

The Connector successfully sent the job to the LSP, but some of the source content is missing from the job and it was not sent.

Possible Issue	Explanation	Solution
Either component mapping was not done, or it was not updated for components that were recently added or used in new content.	The content of an Adobe Experience Manager page is created from a collection of page components. A component has different properties, which are types of fields. You must configure which components and properties the Connector can send out for translation.	Update the component mapping and resend the job for translation. For detailed instructions, see Configuring which Components and Properties to Send Out for Translation. Recommendation: If you are submitting new nodes in your content tree for translation, validate component mapping in a pre-production environment to ensure that only the required components are mapped.
All components were successfully sent for translation in the pre-production environment, but they are missing in the production environment.	Component mapping is managed on a per-Adobe Experience Manager-instance basis. You must import any changes in component mapping from the pre-production environment into the production environment before submitting jobs from there.	Either: - Manually make the same component mapping changes in the production environment. - Migrate your component mapping from the pre-production environment to the production environment. For detailed instructions, see Automatically Updating Your Connector Configuration.

1.10.12 - Cannot Select New Translation Provider When Sending Out Content for Translation

After using an account license key to install a new translation provider (LSP), it is not available for selection when sending out a new job for translation.

Possible Issue	Explanation	Solution
Your team profile was not updated to support sending content to the new translation provider (LSP).	The Connector uses profiles to define the set of users who can send out content for translation to a specific translation provider (LSP). Note: Profiles also define the source-target pairs that users are allowed to send out for translation.	Ask your Adobe Experience Manager administrator to update the appropriate team profile to include the new translation provider.For detailed instructions, see Configuring Team Profiles.

1.10.13 - New Target Language Is Not Available When Sending Out Content for Translation

Possible Issue	Explanation	Solution
After configuring a new target language, it is not available for selection when submitting a new job.	Your team profile was not updated to support sending content for translation to the new target language. The Connector uses profiles to define the set of users who can send out content for translation with specific source-target language pairs. Note: Profiles also define who can send out content for translation to a specific translation provider (LSP).	Ask your Adobe Experience Manager administrator to update the appropriate team profile to include the source-target language pairs.For detailed instructions, see Configuring Team Profiles.

1.10.14 - Service Authentication

Possible issues

If you are using Adobe Experience Manager 6.3 or higher with version 3.2.0 or higher of the Connector, the following problems may occur:

You cannot save all Connector configurations.
Translated content does not return to Adobe Experience Manager.
You cannot perform most Globalization Tool functionality with the default settings.

Explanation

These problems occur because in Adobe Experience Manager 6.3 and higher, Adobe has deprecated support for administrative login methods for services.

In response, the starting with version 3.2.0, Connector adds a new system user, claytablet-service, which the claytablet bundle uses for operations.

The Connector adds the following new configurations to CRXDE Lite, which are described in detail below:

/apps/ctctranslation/config/org.apache.sling.serviceusermapping.impl.ServiceUserMapperImpl.amended-claytablet
/apps/ctctranslation/config/com.day.cq.security.ACLSetup
/home/users/system/claytablet-service

Note: Under normal circumstances, you should not need to edit any of these configurations.

Detailed explanations

/apps/ctctranslation/config/org.apache.sling.serviceusermapping.impl.ServiceUserMapperImpl.amended-claytablet.xml

This is an OSGi configuration that adds a mapping between the claytablet bundle and the claytablet-service system user for the Connector.

To locate this configuration in the system console:

In your Web browser, navigate to /system/console/configMgr.
In the Adobe Experience Manager Web Console Configuration page, search for Service Amendment.

Next, search for claytablet.

Double-click this entry to view the value in the Service Mappings field:

/apps/ctctranslation/config/com.day.cq.security.ACLSetup.xml

This OSGi configuration grants the all permission to the claytablet-service system user for /. This system user has all permissions on every path in the repository.

Note: This is the same as loginAdminstrative() in pre-3.2.0 versions of the Connector.

To locate this configuration in the system console:

In your Web browser, navigate to /system/console/configMgr.

In the Adobe Experience Manager Web Console Configuration page, search for Day CQ ACL.

Click this entry to view the details.

/home/users/system/claytablet-service

The new claytablet-service system user has permission to everything, because of the ACLSetup. If necessary, you can modify the permission settings. However, the Connector requires full permission to the following directories:

/content
/apps
/etc
/var

To locate the claytablet-service system user and view its permissions:

In your Web browser, navigate to /useradmin.
In the AEM Security page, locate the claytablet-service user in the left pane.

Tip: To simplify the permission settings for the claytable-service user, you can add claytable-service to the Adobe Experience Manager administrators user group. The reason this works is that before the API changes in Adobe Experience Manager 6.3, the Connector used the administrator permission of an admin session from Adobe Experience Manager API to perform all the actions.

For more information, refer to: https://cwiki.apache.org/confluence/display/SLING/Service+Authentication.

1.10.15 - Freeway Analysis Codes not Displayed when Sending Out Content for Translation

Issue

The add-on for Lionbridge Freeway is installed, and Freeway analysis codes specified, but they are not displayed or available for selection when sending out content for translation.

Explanation

The URLs where Lionbridge Freeway provides the authentication service and the analysis code service are not correctly configured. If you have a firewall, you must configure your ports so that the Connector can communicate with these services.

Solution

In the Freeway Config section of the Configuration page, enter the following settings:

Configuration Option	Description
Freeway Auth URL	The URL where Lionbridge Freeway provides the authentication service. This is `https://fwapi.lionbridge.com/obvibundles/freewayauth.asmx`.
Freeway Service URL	The URL where Lionbridge Freeway provides the analysis code service. This is `https://fwapi.lionbridge.com/obvibundles/service.asmx`.

For detailed instructions, see Freeway Config.

If you have a firewall, you must configure your ports so that the Connector can communicate with these URLs. For detailed instructions, see Configuring Network Settings for a Firewall.

1.11 - Testing the Connector

After you complete the configuration, your Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager installation is ready for testing. We recommend sending only a few pages for translation in one language as an initial test. For detailed instructions, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager User Guide. Once successful, you can send as many languages as required.

Please coordinate with your translation provider for this test process.

If you have any concerns or questions, please contact Lionbridge Connector Support. For details, see How to Contact Lionbridge Connector Support.

From a testing perspective, do not treat the Connector as merely standalone software. It integrates into Adobe Experience Manager and your overall translation workflow. You must test the end-to-end process, from content creation to publishing, to ensure that the Connector is working as expected and configured to support your business needs.

In addition to following the guidelines below, you should also include any internal test or use cases that would normally be applied to any software that is deployed to Adobe Experience Manager. You must robustly test the Connector and the translation process against the (non-production) MT (machine translation) service. This saves time and project costs, because trying to solve issues during the production phase is costly and delays your translation timelines.

Recommendations: Complete your testing in a pre-production environment before deploying the Connector to your production environment. If you must perform testing in your production environment, you should create test content that can be deleted after completing the tests. The connector database translation memory must also be cleared in your production environment. For detailed instructions, contact Lionbridge Connector Support, as described in How to Contact Lionbridge Connector Support. Consider any changes in functionality, configuration, or customization between pre-production and production environments in this final test pass.

Testing the connector

Verify that the Connector is configured to send all required content types for all required languages.
Ensure that the Connector sends only translatable content for translation.
Configure email notifications set and ensure that they are generated at the appropriate step in the translation workflow.

Integration with Adobe Experience Manager

Ensure that the content authors how to interact with the Connector and send content to translation. For detailed instructions, refer them to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager User Guide.
Select a method of sending content to translation that aligns with how content authors work in Adobe Experience Manager.
Ensure that the Connector users have the correct rights to access the Connector within Adobe Experience Manager.

Testing the translation workflow

Ensure that the Connector translation workflow integrates with your overall strategy of managing source and translated content.
Validate how the translated content will be reviewed during the translation process.
Verify that the translation process integrates correctly with the publishing process.

1.12 - Language Codes

For detailed instructions on setting up the correct Connector language codes for every language your company uses for translation, see Configuring Connector Languages.

The Connector has the following language codes:

Type	Language Identifier	Language Code
String	Afrikaans	“af-ZA”
String	Albanian	“sq-AL”
String	Amharic	“am-ET”
String	Arabic_Algeria	“ar-DZ”
String	Arabic_Bahrain	“ar-BH”
String	Arabic_Egypt	“ar-EG”
String	Arabic_Iraq	“ar-IQ”
String	Arabic_Jordan	“ar-JO”
String	Arabic_Kuwait	“ar-KW”
String	Arabic_Lebanon	“ar-LB”
String	Arabic_Libya	“ar-LY”
String	Arabic_MiddleEast	“ar-XR”
String	Arabic_Morocco	“ar-MA”
String	Arabic_Oman	“ar-OM”
String	Arabic_Qatar	“ar-QA”
String	Arabic_Saudi_Arabia	“ar-SA”
String	Arabic_Syria	“ar-SY”
String	Arabic_Tunisia	“ar-TM”
String	Arabic_UAE	“ar-AE”
String	Arabic_Yemen	“ar-YE”
String	Armenian	“hy-AM”
String	Assamese	“as-IN”
String	Basque	“eu-ES”
String	Belarusian	“be-BY”
String	Bengali_Bangladesh	“bn-BD”
String	Bengali_India	“bn-IN”
String	Bosnian_Bosnia_Herzegovina	“bs-BA”
String	Bulgarian	“bg-BG”
String	Burmese	“my-MM”
String	Catalan	“ca-ES”
String	Chinese_Hong_Kong	“zh-HK”
String	Chinese_Macao	“zh-MO”
String	Chinese_PRC	“zh-CN”
String	Chinese_Singapore	“zh-SG”
String	Chinese_Taiwan	“zh-TW”
String	Croatian	“hr-HR”
String	Croatian_Bosnia_Herzegovina	“hr-BA”
String	Czech	“cs-CZ”
String	Danish	“da-DK”
String	Divehi	“dv-MV”
String	Dutch	“nl-NL”
String	Dutch_Belgium	“nl-BE”
String	English_Australia	“en-AU”
String	English_Belize	“en-BZ”
String	English_Canada	“en-CA”
String	English_HongKong	“en-HK”
String	English_India	“en-IN”
String	English_Indonesia	“en-ID”
String	English_Ireland	“en-IE”
String	English_Jamaica	“en-JM”
String	English_Malaysia	“en-MY”
String	English_New_Zealand	“en-NZ”
String	English_Philippines	“en-PH”
String	English_Singapore	“en-SG”
String	English_South_Africa	“en-ZA”
String	English_Trinidad	“en-TT”
String	English_UK	“en-GB”
String	English_US	“en-US”
String	English_Zimbabwe	“en-ZW”
String	Estonian	“et-EE”
String	Faroese	“fo-FO”
String	Farsi	“fa-IR”
String	Filipino	“fil-PH”
String	Finnish	“fi-FI”
String	French	“fr-FR”
String	French_Belgium	“fr-BE”
String	French_Cameroon	“fr-CM”
String	French_Canada	“fr-CA”
String	French_Cote_d_Ivoire	“fr-CI”
String	French_Democratic_Rep_Congo	“fr-CD”
String	French_Haiti	“fr-HT”
String	French_Luxembourg	“fr-LU”
String	French_Mali	“fr-ML”
String	French_Monaco	“fr-MC”
String	French_Morocco	“fr-MA”
String	French_Reunion	“fr-RE”
String	French_Senegal	“fr-SN”
String	French_Switzerland	“fr-CH”
String	Frisian_Netherlands	“fy-NK”
String	Fulfulde_Nigeria	“ff-NG”
String	FYRO_Macedonian	“mk-MK”
String	Gaelic_Ireland	“gd-IE”
String	Gaelic_Scotland	“gd-GB”
String	Gallegan	“gl-ES”
String	Georgian	“ka-GE”
String	German	“de-DE”
String	German_Austria	“de-AT”
String	German_Liechtenstein	“de-LI”
String	German_Luxembourg	“de-LU”
String	German_Switzerland	“de-CH”
String	Greek	“el-GR”
String	Guarani	“gn-PY”
String	Gujarati	“gu-IN”
String	Hausa	“ha-NE”
String	Hawaiian	“haw-US”
String	Hebrew	“he-IL”
String	Hindi	“hi-IN”
String	Hungarian	“hu-HU”
String	Icelandic	“is-IS”
String	Igbo	“ig-NG”
String	Indonesian	“id-ID”
String	Inuktitut	“iu-CA”
String	Italian	“it-IT”
String	Italian_Switzerland	“it-CH”
String	Japanese	“ja-JP”
String	Kannada	“kn-IN”
String	Kanuri	“kr-TD”
String	Kashmiri	“ks-IN”
String	Kazakh	“kk-KZ”
String	Khmer	“km-KH”
String	Konkani	“kok-IN”
String	Korean	“ko-KR”
String	Kyrgyz	“ky-KZ”
String	Lao	“lo-LA”
String	Latin	“la-XL”
String	Latvian	“lv-LV”
String	Lithuanian	“lt-LT”
String	Malay	“ms-MY”
String	Malay_Brunei_Darussalam	“ms-BN”
String	Malayalam	“ml-IN”
String	Maltese	“mt-MT”
String	Maori	“mi-NZ”
String	Marathi	“mr-IN”
String	Mongolian	“mn-MN”
String	Nepali	“ne-NP”
String	Nepali_India	“ne-IN”
String	Norwegian	“nb-NO”
String	Norwegian_Nynorsk	“nn-NO”
String	Oriya	“or-IN”
String	Oromo	“om-ET”
String	Panjabi	“pa-PK”
String	Polish	“pl-PL”
String	Portuguese	“pt-PT”
String	Portuguese_Brazil	“pt-BR”
String	Punjabi_Pakistan	“pa-PK”
String	Pushto	“ps-AF”
String	Quechua_Ecuador	“qu-EC”
String	Quechua_Peru	“qu-PE”
String	Rhaeto_Romance	“rm-IT”
String	Romanian	“ro-RO”
String	Romanian_Moldova	“ro-MD”
String	Russian	“ru-RU”
String	Russian_Moldava	“ru-MD”
String	Sami	“se-NO”
String	Sanskrit	“sa-IN”
String	Serbian_Cyrillic	“sr-RS”
String	Serbian_Latin	“sr-SP”
String	Sindhi_India	“sd-IN”
String	Sindhi_Pakistan	“sd-PK”
String	Sinhala	“si-LK”
String	Slovak	“sk-SK”
String	Slovenian	“sl-SI”
String	Somali	“so-ET”
String	Sorbian	“wen-DE”
String	Spanish	“es-ES”
String	Spanish_Argentina	“es-AR”
String	Spanish_Bolivia	“es-BO”
String	Spanish_Chile	“es-CL”
String	Spanish_Colombia	“es-CO”
String	Spanish_Costa_Rica	“es-CR”
String	Spanish_Dominican_Republic	“es-DO”
String	Spanish_Ecuador	“es-EC”
String	Spanish_El_Salvador	“es-SV”
String	Spanish_Honduras	“es-HN”
String	Spanish_LatinAmerica	“es-XL”
String	Spanish_Mexico	“es-MX”
String	Spanish_Nicaragua	“es-NI”
String	Spanish_Panama	“es-PA”
String	Spanish_Paraguay	“es-PY”
String	Spanish_Peru	“es-PE”
String	Spanish_Puerto_Rico	“es-PR”
String	Spanish_Uruguay	“es-UY”
String	Spanish_US	“es-US”
String	Spanish_Venezuela	“es-VE”
String	Swahili	“sw-TZ”
String	Swedish	“sv-SE”
String	Swedish_Finland	“sv-FI”
String	Syriac	“syr-SY”
String	Tajik	“tg-TJ”
String	Tamil	“ta-IN”
String	Tatar	“tt-RU”
String	Telugu	“te-IN”
String	Thai	“th-TH”
String	Tibetan	“bo-CN”
String	Tigrinya_Eritrea	“ti-ER”
String	Tigrinya_Ethiopia	“ti-ET”
String	Tsonga	“ts-ZA”
String	Tswana	“tn-BW”
String	Turkish	“tr-TR”
String	Turkmen	“tk-TM”
String	Uighur	“ug-CN”
String	Ukrainian	“uk-UA”
String	Urdu	“ur-PK”
String	Urdu_India	“ur-IN”
String	Uzbek	“uz-UZ”
String	Venda	“ve-ZA”
String	Vietnamese	“vi-VN”
String	Welsh	“cy-GB”
String	Xhosa	“xh-ZA”
String	Yi	“ii-CN”
String	Yiddish	“yi-MD”
String	Yoruba	“yo-NG”
String	Zulu	“zu-ZA”

1.13 - Configuring an Adobe Experience Manager Team Profile for the Translation Integration Framework

You configure an Adobe Experience Manager team profile for Adobe Experience Manager translation integration. This enables users in the team to access the Adobe Experience Manager translation framework.

To configure keys for Adobe Experience Manager integration:

In the Lionbridge Connector rail, click Admin Tools > Team Profiles to open the Team Profiles page.
In the Name field, enter a name for this team profile.
In the Source Language column, select the check box for the source language.
In the Target Language column, select the check box(es) for the target language(s).
In the LSP column, select the MT check box.
In the Adobe Experience Manager Users column, select the admin check box.
In the Adobe Experience Manager Groups column, select the administrators check box.
Click Save.

For more information about the Team Profiles page, see Configuring Team Profiles.

1.14 - Configuring LSP and Keys for the Translation Integration Framework

You configure the translation providers and Content API Platform for Adobe Experience Manager translation integration. This supports selecting a translation provider from within the Adobe Experience Manager translation framework.

To configure keys for Adobe Experience Manager integration:

In the Lionbridge Connector rail, click Admin Tools > LSP and Keys to open the LSP & Keys page.
In the LSP and Keys section, click Add.
In the LSP Name field, enter the name of the translation provider. For example, enter MT.
In the LSP Type dropdown list, select your translation provider, if displayed. If your translation provider is not displayed, then select Generic.
Next to the Key dropdown list, click Retrieve.
Select the license key for the translation provider.
Click Add. This updates the Name, Source Account, and Platform Account columns in the LSP and Keys section.

For more detailed instructions, see Adding a New License Key.

1.15 - Configuring the Connector for the Translation Integration Framework

For each Connector configuration that you create within Adobe Experience Manager’s translation integration feature, you configure the Connector on its Configuration page:

To configure the Connector:

If the Connector’s Configuration page is not already open, then open it. Either:

Click the here link in the Lionbridge Settings page for the configuration you just created, as described at the end of Creating an Adobe Experience Manager Cloud Configuration for the Connector.

In the Lionbridge Connector rail, click Admin Tools > Configuration.

The Configuration page opens.

Scroll down to the Translation Platform section. In the License ID field, enter one of the following:

the license uuid, sent by email

the license ID from the License_ID.txt file in the package you downloaded

For more information about this section of the Configuration page, see Translation Platform.

In the JDBC SQL Connection section:

a. Enter the JDBC URL and login credentials.

b. Click Test to verify the JDBC connection and credentials.

After testing, a message box indicates whether your configuration passed the test.

For more information about this section of the Configuration page, see JDBC SQL Connection.

In the Folder and Permission section:

a. In the Data Folder field, enter the path to the location where you extracted ctc_data.zip, in step 1 of Integrating the Connector with Adobe Experience Manager’s Translation Integration Framework.

b. Click Test to verify that this path is correct.

After testing, a message box indicates whether your configuration passed the test.

For more information about this section of the Configuration page, see Folder and Permissions.

At the bottom of the page, click Save Configuration.

1.16 - Creating a Translation Integration Configuration for the Connector

In Adobe Experience Manager, you create a translation integration configuration and edit its settings. These are the Adobe Experience Manager settings for how to translate your content. You can create multiple configurations, for example, if you have different translation providers for different sites, or if there are different kinds of content that you want to send out for translation for different sites.

To creating a translation integration configuration for the Connector:

Do one of the following to return to the Adobe Cloud Services page:

In the configuration page (described in Editing Connector Cloud Configuration Settings), click the Cloud Services link in the top-left corner of the page.

In your Web browser, navigate to /etc/cloudservices.html in your Adobe Experience Manager instance.
In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click Tools > Operations > Cloud > Cloud Services in the Adobe Experience Manager rail.

Under Translation Integration, click Show Configurations.

Click the plus sign beside Available Configurations to add a new configuration for the Lionbridge Connector.

The Create Configuration dialog box opens.

In the Title field, enter a descriptive title that includes both Lionbridge and the site, for example, lionbridge-geometrix, and then click Create.

The Translation Config dialog box opens.

In the Sites tab:

For Translation Workflow, select Human Translation.
For Translation Provider, select Lionbridge. This name identifies the Connector in the Adobe Experience Manager translation integration framework.

Note about Assets tab: Adobe Experience Manager extracts text associated with metadata into an XML file, which the Connector processes. Some translation providers, such as MT, may not support translating these files.

For descriptions of the other fields and tabs, refer to “Creating a Translation Integration Configuration” in the Adobe Experience Manager documentation:

Click OK to close the dialog box.

1.17 - Creating an Adobe Experience Manager Cloud Configuration for the Connector

Within Adobe Experience Manager’s translation integration feature, you create a cloud configuration that connects to the Connector. Each configuration contains a set of Connector settings, which you will configure later. You can create multiple configurations. For example, you can create one configuration to send content to the Translation Queue, and you can created another configuration to send out content directly for translation. You can also create a different configuration for each translation provider.

To create a Connector configuration within Adobe Experience Manager’s translation integration feature:

Do one of the following to open the Adobe Cloud Services page:

In your Web browser, navigate to /etc/cloudservices.html in your Adobe Experience Manager instance.
In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, in the Adobe Experience Manager rail, either:
- Click Tools > Operations > Cloud > Cloud Services (Adobe Experience Manager versions 6.2-6.4).
- Click Tools > Cloud Services > Legacy Cloud Services (Adobe Experience Manager version 6.5).

The Adobe Cloud Services page opens.

Create a cloud configuration that connects Adobe Experience Manager to the Lionbridge Connector:

a. If you are using Adobe Experience Manager version 6.5, scroll down to the Third Party Services section at the bottom of the page.

b. Scroll down to locate the Lionbridge entry.

c. Click Show Configurations.

d. Click the plus icon to create a new configuration.

The Create Configuration dialog box opens.

e. In the Title field, enter a descriptive name to identify this configuration. For example, if you will use this configuration to send content directly to the Translation Queue, you can call this queue.

Important: Do not modify the value in the Parent Configuration field.

f. Click Create to save your changes.

The Lionbridge Settings page opens for the configuration you just created.

g. Click the following link to open the Connector’s Configuration page: For Lionbridge connector configuration, click here, as shown above.

For detailed instructions on configuring the Connector on the Configuration page for Adobe Experience Manager’s translation integration feature, see Configuring the Connector for the Translation Integration Framework.

1.18 - Editing Connector Cloud Configuration Settings

In Adobe Experience Manager, you edit the settings for your Connector cloud configuration that you created in Creating an Adobe Experience Manager Cloud Configuration for the Connector.

Do one of the following to return to the Adobe Cloud Services page:
- In your Web browser, navigate to /etc/cloudservices.html in your Adobe Experience Manager instance.
- In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click Tools > Operations > Cloud > Cloud Services in the Adobe Experience Manager rail.
Under Lionbridge, click Show Configurations.
Click the link for the configuration you created earlier.
At the top of the page that opens, click Edit.

The Edit Component – Lionbridge Translation Settings dialog box opens.

Enter values for the following settings:

Setting	Description
Submission Type	Select one of the following options: Add to queue: The Connector adds the specified pages to the Translation Queue. In the Translation Queue, you can group items together by project, priority, and target language, and you can require additional approval before sending items out for translation. Send as a new job: The Connector immediately sends out the specified pages for translation as a new translation job, according to your company’s routing rules and the options you specify below.
The remaining settings are relevant only if Submission Type, above, is Send as a new job. Specify the appropriate settings for your company.
LSP	Select the translation provider for your translation jobs.
Content Type	You can tag the content in a translation job as a specific content type. Depending on your company’s configuration, the Content API Platform may send the content to a specific translation provider based on the content type. Select one of the following content types: Marketing Technical Legal Note: You may see different content types if your company has configured custom content types.
Notification Emails	Enter one or more email addresses that will receive notification when the content leaves Adobe Experience Manager and when it returns to Adobe Experience Manager. Use a comma to separate multiple email addresses.
In-country Reviewer	Optional. This is generally the name of the localization reviewer, which is stored in the InCountryReviewer attribute in the XML sent to the translation provider. By default, this field is hidden.

Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box.

1.19 - Integrating the Connector with Adobe Experience Manager's Translation Integration Framework

This section describes how to integrate and configure Adobe Experience Manager’s translation integration feature with the Connector. For detailed information about this feature, refer to the Adobe Experience Manager documentation, “Translating Content for Multilingual Sites,” which is available at:

version 6.2: http://docs.adobe.com/docs/en/aem/6-2/administer/sites/translation.html.
version 6.3: http://docs.adobe.com/docs/en/aem/6-3/administer/sites/translation.html.
version 6.4: https://docs.adobe.com/content/help/en/experience-manager-64/administering/introduction/translation.html.
version 6.5: https://helpx.adobe.com/experience-manager/6-5/sites/administering/using/translation.html.

Note: For information on using this feature, refer to steps 4-6 in the Adobe documentation at the above link and “Using the Adobe Experience Manager Translation Integration Framework to Manage Translations” in the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager User Guide.

For detailed instructions about installing and configuring the Connector, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager User Guide.

Important: When using the Connector with the Translation Integration Framework, the Connector’s component-mapping, team-profiles, and language-mapping features are not available.

To integrate the Connector with Adobe Experience Manager’s translation integration feature:

Unzip ctc_data.zip, and save it to a location on the file system that Adobe Experience Manager can access.
Install the Connector package. For detailed instructions, see Installing the Lionbridge Connector.
In Adobe Experience Manager, create a cloud configuration that connects to the Connector. For detailed instructions, see Creating an Adobe Experience Manager Cloud Configuration for the Connector.
In the Connector, configure the Connector for Adobe Experience Manager’s Translation Integration feature. For detailed instructions, see Configuring the Connector for the Translation Integration Framework.
In the Connector, configure the translation provider and keys. For detailed instructions, see Configuring LSP and Keys for the Translation Integration Framework.
In the Connector, configure the Adobe Experience Manager team profile. For detailed instructions, see Configuring an Adobe Experience Manager Team Profile for the Translation Integration Framework.
In Adobe Experience Manager, edit the settings for your Lionbridge Connector cloud configuration. For detailed instructions, see Editing Connector Cloud Configuration Settings.
In Adobe Experience Manager, you create a translation integration configuration and edit its settings. This specifies the Adobe Experience Manager settings for translating your content. For detailed instructions, see Creating a Translation Integration Configuration for the Connector.
Optional. You can associate part of your web site (a page and descendent pages) with the Connector or with a specific Connector translation integration configuration. For detailed instructions, refer to “Configuring Pages for Translation” in the Adobe Experience Manager documentation at: http://docs.adobe.com/docs/en/aem/6-1/administer/sites/translation/tc-tic.html.
Optional. You can specify which content to translate. For detailed instructions, refer to “Identifying Content to Translate” in the Adobe Experience Manager documentation at: http://docs.adobe.com/docs/en/aem/6-1/administer/sites/translation/tc-rules.html.

2 - User Guide

2.1 - Welcome to the Connector

2.1.1 - The Translation Lifecycle

The Translation Lifecycle

The translation lifecycle is the broad process of selecting content, sending it out for translation, and then receiving the translated content back from translation.

This set of steps usually fits inside a larger, more general process called the content lifecycle, which is the process of creating, reviewing, editing, approving, and publishing content.

When you consider the translation lifecycle and the content lifecycle together, you have the global content value chain, which is the strategy for managing multilingual content.

Remember that localizing content is a subset of steps in the broader content lifecycle. This will improve your focus on key localization considerations, improve processes, and keep all content stakeholders included. Together, this results in better content management.

2.1.2 - How the Connector Helps You Manage Your Translation Lifecycle

The Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager (Connector) is a plug-in module for Adobe Experience Manager. It provides a range of features and user interface enhancements in Adobe Experience Manager that enable you to select, send, monitor, and retrieve content for translation into any language Adobe Experience Manager supports.

These features automate the process, which dramatically reduces the effort and time required to export and re-import content that needs to be localized. This is very helpful when translating large volumes of content or ensuring that translated content is quickly re-imported to meet deadlines.

When you use the Connector, you manage your translation lifecycle entirely from within Adobe Experience Manager:

The Connector exports your content from Adobe Experience Manager in XML format and delivers these content files to the central, hosted Content API Platform.
The Content API Platform delivers your content to your translation providers, based on routing rules that your company chooses and the Lionbridge Connector Team implements.
When the translated content is ready, the Content API Platform retrieves it from your translators and delivers it to the Connector.
The Connector automatically re-imports the content into the correct location in Adobe Experience Manager.

You can then review, revise, reject, or publish the translated content as needed.

Note: Neither the Connector nor the Content API Platform performs any translation. Similarly, the Lionbridge Connector Team does not provide any translation services. Your company chooses the translation provider that performs the translation.

2.1.3 - Using this Guide

Purpose of this guide

This guide describes how to use the Lionbridge Connector (Connector) for Adobe Experience Manager to manage your translation lifecycle. It describes how to send Adobe Experience Manager components for translation and receive them back from translation.

Note: This guide describes using both the Adobe Experience Manager Touch-Optimized UI and the Classic UI. The terminology in this guide is for classic devices, such desktops and laptops, although it is also relevant to mobile devices, such as tablets. For detailed information about the UIs and views, as well as differences in terminology depending on device types, refer to the Adobe Experience Manager documentation, available at http://helpx.adobe.com/marketing-cloud/experience-manager.html?t2.

Who should use this guide

This guide is intended for content editors, project, marketing, localization or translation managers, or others who are responsible for creating, editing, or approving content for translation that resides in your Adobe Experience Manager CMS. This guide is also useful for translation providers who receive content from your Adobe Experience Manager CMS, because it describes your company’s translation management process.

What your company setup should be

This document assumes that:

Your company already has a functioning instance of Adobe Experience Manager.
The Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager (Connector) has been implemented, configured, and tested on your Adobe Experience Manager CMS.
The Lionbridge Connector Team has set up the Content API Platform to send content to your translation providers.

If Lionbridge is your company’s translation provider, it assumes that Freeway is already set up for your company.

What you should already know

This document assumes that:

You are familiar with the Connector’s configuration for your Adobe Experience Manager CMS, and the reasons for choosing certain configuration options. This is important because your company’s configuration determines which features are available.
You have a strong working knowledge of the Adobe Experience Manager Content Editor.
You are familiar with your company’s translation process and requirements.
You have valid user credentials to log into Adobe Experience Manager.
You have the required permissions to access the Connector functionality described in this guide.

Note: Not all the features described in this guide may be available. Feature availability depends on both your company’s Connector setup and the roles to which you are assigned. If you cannot access functionality that you need, contact your company’s Adobe Experience Manager administrator.

How this guide is organized

This guide contains the following chapters:

Chapter	Description
Welcome to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager	A brief description of the Lionbridge for Adobe Experience Manager solution and how it fits into the translation lifecycle. It also includes information about this guide and Lionbridge Connector Support contact information.
Getting Started with the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager	How to get started and an overview of the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager interface and key features.
Sending Content for Translation	How to use the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager to send out content for translation.
Monitoring Translation Status and Jobs and Viewing Translated Content	How to monitor the translation status of content that you sent out for translation.
Post-Translation Tasks	How to perform post-translation tasks, including relocking unlocked components, updating the translation memory, and viewing log files and reports.

How to find out more about the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager

For information on installing and configuring the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager, read the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

To access all Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager documentation:

Log into Adobe Experience Manager.
Do one of the following:

In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click the Tools icon and then click Lionbridge Connector in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. (This opens the Connector in a new browser tab.)
In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, scroll down and click Lionbridge Connector in the right pane.
In your Web browser, navigate to /content/ctctranslation/status.html on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

In the Lionbridge Connector rail, click Admin Tools.

This displays the Admin Tools menu options.

Click Help.

A new Web page opens, displaying links to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager documentation.

Documentation conventions

This guide uses the following conventions:

Convention	Description
Bold	Highlights screen elements such as buttons, menu items, and fields.
Courier	Highlights input, file names, and paths.
Italics	Highlights terms for emphasis, variables, or document titles.
>	Indicates a menu choice. For example, “Select Admin Tools > Configuration.”

2.1.4 - How to Contact Lionbridge Connector Support

How to Contact Lionbridge Connector Support

You can submit a support ticket either:

by emailing connectors@lionbridge.com
from the Lionbridge Connector Zendesk page https://lionbridge-connectors.zendesk.com/

2.2 - Getting Started with the Connector

The Connector supports all web browsers that Adobe Experience Manager supports.

It supports Adobe Experience Manager versions 6.2 and higher.

To access the Connector:

Log into Adobe Experience Manager.
Do one of the following:
- In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click the Tools icon and then click Lionbridge Connector in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. (This opens the Connector in a new browser tab.)
- In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, scroll down and click Lionbridge Connector in the right pane.
- In your Web browser, navigate to /content/ctctranslation/status.html on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

2.2.1 - Key Features

The Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager (Connector) has the following key features:

2.2.1.1 - Multiple Ways to Send Content for Translation

There are six ways to collect and send content for translation using the Connector:

There are the following multiple ways to send pages out for translation:
- Send multiple content items, including pages, tags, dictionaries (i18n items), Content Fragments, Experience Fragments, adaptive forms, and digital assets (such as JPG and PDF files) using the Bulk Translation wizard. You can filter to exclude content, and send out requests for translations of one target language at a time as a separate translation job with its own requested-by date. For details, see Sending Content for Translation Using the Bulk Translation Wizard.
- In Adobe Experience Manager version 6.3 and higher, you can send pages to translation directly from the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager using the Translate Content page. For details, see Sending Pages for Translation from the Touch-Optimized UI (Adobe Experience Manager version 6.3 and higher only).
- Send multiple pages, Content Fragments, Experience Fragments, adaptive forms, and digital assets (such as JPG and PDF files) using the Globalization Tool. You can add pages from multiple site paths, and/or upload page paths stored in CSV or XLS files. You can filter these pages by publication date, on time, off time, activation state, and page template. For details, see Sending Pages and Assets for Translation Using the Globalization Tool.
- If you roll out files, the Connector can automatically send them to the Translation Queue, using the default translation settings configured for your company. For details, see Sending Files to the Translation Queue When You Roll Out Files.
- If you use Adobe Experience Manager’s Classic UI, you can send one or more pages for translation from the Adobe Experience Manager Sidekick. Depending on your company’s configuration, you can send pages only to the Translation Queue, or you can choose whether to send them to the queue or directly out for translation. Your company’s configuration also determines which translation settings you can edit from the Sidekick. For details, see Sending Pages for Translation from the Adobe Experience Manager Sidekick.
- If you are using Adobe Experience Manager’s translation workflow feature to automatically create new pages in the language branches of your site, the Connector can automatically send these new pages to the Translation Queue. For details, see Sending Content to the Translation Queue Using Workflow.
- You can send previously sent jobs for translation from the Status tab of the Translation Status page. You can modify the content items, source and target languages, translation provider, translation options, and job options before resending the job. You can also specify an LSP-specific configuration for the job to resend. For details, see Resending a Translation Job.

Note: You can send digital assets, such as JPG and PDF files, for translation from the Bulk Translation wizard and the Globalization Tool.

Depending on your company’s Connector configuration, you may be able to send content out for translation either immediately or via a queue.
- Send content immediately to the translation provider.
- Send content via the Translation Queue, which enables you to group items together by project, priority, target language, and require additional approval. For details, see Submitting Content for Translation from the Translation Queue.

Note: Your company can create schedules that automatically send out translation jobs from the Translation Queue. For details, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

2.2.1.2 - Optimizing Translation

The Optimize Translation feature helps you reduce translation costs, by reducing the quantity of content that Connector sends to translation providers. It sends only changed content fields out for translation. To do this, it checks each component in the source version of the page for any content changes, and it sends only changed components out for translation. If a component was previously translated and it has not changed, then the Connector does not send it for translation again: Instead, it uses the stored translation.

However, this feature needs Connector translation backup data, and it increases the Connector processing time before sending out the items for translation.

This feature can be configured for your company and separately for the Bulk Translation wizard. You can also specify it by selecting the Use Local TM check box when you send individual pages to the Translation Queue or when you send out pages out directly for translation.

2.2.1.3 - Selecting a Translation Provider

If your company has multiple translation providers, your company’s Connector setup may enable you to select which one to use when you send out items for translation.

This feature is available in all user interfaces where you send out content for translation.

2.2.1.4 - Using the Adobe Experience Manager Translation Integration Framework with the Connector

This section describes how to use Adobe Experience Manager’s translation integration feature with the Connector. For detailed information about this feature, refer to the Adobe Experience Manager documentation, “Translating Content for Multilingual Sites” which is available at:

version 6.2: http://docs.adobe.com/docs/en/aem/6-2/administer/sites/translation.html.
version 6.3: http://docs.adobe.com/docs/en/aem/6-3/administer/sites/translation.html.
version 6.4: https://docs.adobe.com/content/help/en/experience-manager-64/administering/introduction/translation.html.
version 6.5: https://helpx.adobe.com/experience-manager/6-5/sites/administering/using/translation.html.

Note: For information on integrating the Connector with this feature, refer to steps 1-3 in the Adobe documentation at the above link and “Integrating the Connector with the Adobe Experience Manager’s Translation Integration Framework” in the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

The Connector integrates with Adobe Experience Manager’s translation integration framework feature. This feature enables you to create translation projects and start translation jobs from within Adobe Experience Manager. When you use this integration, you create translation projects and start translation jobs in Adobe Experience Manager, but otherwise you can manage the projects and jobs in the same way that you manage them for jobs that you send directly from the Connector. With this integration, you can:

use Connector’s comprehensive settings in translation jobs sent from Adobe Experience Manager
send translation jobs to the Translation Queue or directly to translation providers
monitor translation jobs from the Connector
view translated content from the Connector
perform post-translation tasks from the Connector

Important: When using the Connector with the Translation Integration Framework, the Connector’s component-mapping, team-profiles, and language-mapping features are not available.

When using Adobe Experience Manager’s translation integration framework feature to send out content for translation, you complete the following general steps:

You create the root page of a language branch of the site to site to translate, which is called a language copy. For detailed instructions, refer to “Preparing Content for Translation” in the Adobe Experience Manager documentation at: http://docs.adobe.com/docs/en/aem/6-1/administer/sites/translation/tc-prep.html.

Note: In the Connector, this step happens automatically when you send out content for translation. Additional user action is not required.

Specify the translation integration configuration and the Connector cloud configuration for the site to translate.
- The translation integration configuration contains the Adobe Experience Manager settings for how to translate your content.
- The Connector cloud configuration contains a set of Connector settings.

For detailed instructions, see Preparing to Send Content for Translation from Adobe Experience Manager Translation Integration.

You create a translation project from Adobe Experience Manager’s Sites console. For detailed instructions, see Preparing to Send Content for Translation from Adobe Experience Manager Translation Integration.
You send out the content for translation as a translation job from a translation project in Adobe Experience Manager’s Projects console. For detailed instructions, see Sending Content for Translation from Adobe Experience Manager Translation Integration.
You can monitor the progress of translation jobs started in Adobe Experience Manager’s translation integration feature. For detailed instructions, see Monitoring Translation Jobs Created in the Adobe Experience Manager Translation Integration.
You can view translated content of translation jobs started in Adobe Experience Manager’s translation integration feature. For details, see Viewing Translated Content from Jobs Started in the Adobe Experience Manager Translation Integration.

2.2.2 - The Connector at a Glance

You access the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager (Connector) from the Lionbridge Connector rail.

Do one of the following to open the rail:
- In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click the Tools icon and then click Lionbridge Connector in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. (This opens the Connector in a new browser tab.)
- In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, scroll down and click Lionbridge Connector in the right pane.
- In your Web browser, navigate to /content/ctctranslation/status.html on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

You access Connector features from the Navigation tab on the left.

Note: The Admin Tools console is described in the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

The Connector has additional features that you access from within Adobe Experience Manager. For example:

Connector functionality in the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manger version 6.3 and higher supports sending pages directly for translation or to the Translation Queue.
Connector functionality on the Page tab of the Adobe Experience Manager Sidekick supports sending pages for translation and sending updated translated content to a translation memory.

Connector functionality can be integrated with the rollout feature, which is accessible either from the Blueprint Control Center or the Rollout button on the Pages tab of the Sidekick.
There are custom Connector workflows you can use within Adobe Experience Manager with the following functionality:
- to lock components after translation and restore their original inheritance
- to send out files for translation while rolling out files
- to extend Adobe Experience Manager’s translation workflow feature, which automatically creates new pages in the language branches of your site, by automatically sending out these pages for translation

These workflows are available in the Workflow tab of the Adobe Experience Manager Sidekick.

2.3 - Encrypting and Decrypting Content

Note:
This section is not applicable for the AEM Cloud Connector.
This feature is available only when using the Content API Translation Connector for SDL TMS or the Content API Translation Connector for Lionbridge Freeway.

You can generate your own keys to encrypt and decrypt content you send for translation from the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager (“Connector for Adobe Experience Manager”) to either:

the Content API Translation Connector for SDL TMS (“Connector for SDL TMS”)
the Content API Translation Connector for Lionbridge Freeway (“Connector for Freeway”)

Before translation:

The Connector for Adobe Experience Manager uses the generated keys to encrypt the content once it is ready for translation.
The Connector for Adobe Experience Manager sends the encrypted content via the Content API Platform to the Connector for SDL TMS or to the Connector for Freeway.
Either:
- The Connector for SDL TMS uses the generated keys to decrypt the content before sending it to SDL TMS.
- The Connector for Freeway delivers encrypted content to Freeway.

After translation:

Relevant to SDL TMS only. The Connector for SDL TMS uses the generated keys to encrypt the translated content once it is ready to send back to Adobe Experience Manager.
The Connector for SDL TMS or the Connector for Freeway sends the encrypted content via the Content API Platform to the Connector for Adobe Experience Manager.
The Connector for Adobe Experience Manager uses the generated keys to decrypt the content before sending it to Adobe Experience Manager.

For instructions on configuring the Connector this feature, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

Which encryption standards does the Connector support?

The Connector supports Java Cryptography Extension (JCE), which is an officially released Standard Extension to the Java Platform. This is described here: https://docs.oracle.com/javase/7/docs/technotes/guides/security/SunProviders.html#SunJCEProvider.
The Connector supports the following Advanced Encryption Standards (AES):

Other requirements

Cipher: AES/CBC/PKCS5Padding
Initialization vector: 16 bytes, as required by AES (Advanced Encryption Standards), from a cryptographically strong random number generator.

How to set up your keystore

Use the following commands and options to set up your keystore.

keytool -genseckey -keystore C:\work\aem\6.5\ctc_data\ctctranslation_data\crypt\cttkeystore -storetype jceks -storepass mystorepass -keyalg DES -keysize 256 -alias cttkey -keypass secretpassword

Important: The keystore should be on a file system that is readable by the Connectors.

Command and Options	Description
-genseckey	Generates a secret key and stores it in a new KeyStore.SecretKeyEntry identified by alias.
-keystore ctt-keystore -storepass mystorepass	The location and filename of the keystore, and a password to protect it from unauthorized access.
-storetype jceks	The keystore type for storing AES (Advanced Encryption Standards) keys. Important: When generating keys, do not enter other values. Other values are not supported.
-keyalg AES	The algorithm for generating the key pair. Important: When generating keys, do not enter other values. Other values are not supported.
-keysize 256	The size of the key.
-alias cttkey -keypass secretpassword	The key alias/password pair for retrieving the key entry from the keystore. The Connectors use this pair.

You can use the above commands to add additional keys to an existing keystore.

For detailed instructions, refer to: https://docs.oracle.com/javase/6/docs/technotes/tools/solaris/keytool.html.

How to encrypt and decrypt content

Use the Java keytool utility to generate, store, and retrieve keys. For detailed instructions, refer to: https://docs.oracle.com/javase/6/docs/technotes/tools/solaris/keytool.html.

2.4 - Sending Content for Translation

When the Connector sends out a page for translation, it actually sends out the components in that page for translation. There are several possible component configurations:

a component may be synchronized to a Blueprint page
a component may be in a live copy page
a component may exist on a page that has no relationship to MSM (Multi Site Manager)

Determine how your components are configured before deciding how to send out pages for translation. The Connector supports multiple ways of sending out pages for translation.

Recommendation: Consult the Adobe Experience Manager documentation to learn about the MSM, Rollout, and translation workflow features. Learn how pages and their components are locked and synchronized. The Connector uses many of these features, and extends them to enable sending pages and their components for translation.

Your system may be configured to use these features in very specific ways. You must be aware of these page relationships and processes before sending content for translation. Otherwise, unexpected outcomes may occur.

There are multiple ways to collect and send content for translation using the Connector:

For an overview and comparison of these methods, see Multiple Ways to Send Content for Translation.

Note about team profiles: If one or more paths are configured for your team profile, you can select only pages and fragments that are in these paths for translation. The path configuration does not restrict your selection of digital assets, tags, and dictionaries (i18n items).

Content Type	Method of Sending for Translation
pages	all supported methods
tags	Bulk Translation wizard only
dictionaries (i18n items)	Bulk Translation wizard only
Content Fragments and Experience Fragments	Bulk Translation wizard and Globalization Tool only
adaptive forms	Bulk Translation wizard and Globalization Tool only
digital assets, such as JPG and PDF files	Bulk Translation wizard and Globalization Tool only

The owner of the translation budget can review and approve the content that has been identified as requiring translation, and can send it out for translation. For details, see Submitting Content for Translation from the Translation Queue.

Note: Your company may be configured to automatically send content items for translation to the Translation Queue. Your company may have created schedules that automatically send out translation jobs from the Translation Queue. For details, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide or contact your Adobe Experience Manager administrator.

Adobe Experience Manager’s Translation Integration feature

You can also send out content either directly to translation or to the Translation Queue using Adobe Experience Manager’s translation integration feature (TIF).

For an overview of this feature, see Using the Adobe Experience Manager Translation Integration Framework with the Connector.
For instructions on preparing to send out content for translation from Adobe Experience Manager, see Preparing to Send Content for Translation from Adobe Experience Manager Translation Integration.
For instructions on sending out content for translation from Adobe Experience Manager, see Sending Content for Translation from Adobe Experience Manager Translation Integration.

2.4.1 - Sending Content for Translation Using the Bulk Translation Wizard

The Bulk Translation wizard enables you to select, send, and receive large quantities of content for translation in only a few clicks.

This is useful for quickly sending out entire sections, sites, or content trees for translation into one or more languages. Each group of pages you send out for translation is a separate job. You can specify different settings and create a different requested-by date for each job.

You access the Bulk Translation wizard from the Lionbridge Connector rail or directly from your Web browser address bar.

When you use the Bulk Translation wizard, you can submit content either to the Translation Queue or directly to translation.

Notes: You can submit tags and dictionaries (i18n items) for translation only using the Bulk Translation wizard. You can submit Content Fragments, Experience Fragments, and adaptive forms for translation only using the Bulk Translation wizard or the Globalization Tool. You can configure the Connector to submit for translation Content Fragments that are referenced in pages, Experience Fragments, and adaptive forms by selecting the Translate Dependent CF check box in the Translation Settings section of the Configuration page. For detailed instructions, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

Note: Depending on your company configuration, you can submit digital assets, such as PDF and JPG files, for translation, including asset metadata.

Note: Depending on your user permissions or your company configuration, you may not be able to send out content directly for translation.

To send out content for translation via the Bulk Translation wizard, you complete the following steps:

Open the Bulk Translation wizard and specify initial settings in the Settings page of the wizard. For detailed instructions, see Specifying Initial Settings in the Bulk Translation Wizard.
In the Item Type page of the wizard, you specify which content items to send for translation. For detailed instructions, see Selecting Content Items to Translate.
In the Options page of the wizard, you can specify the following options:
- whether to check the local TM (translation memory) to determine if previously translated source content has been updated
- if the target pages are MSM (Multi Site Manager) live copy pages, whether to prevent the Connector from overwriting unique source content that already exists in the target pages
- whether to translate content only from locked components
- whether to automatically unlock a component after translated content returns
- whether to send non-synchronized components (without a relationship to a Blueprint page) for translation
- whether to translate regular content fields in pages
- whether to send out for translation metadata fields, for pages, that are defined in the Page Metadata Configuration section of the Advanced Settings page
- whether to save any target content that has already been translated to the local translation memory (TM) instead of sending it out for translation
- whether to select the Level-2 Queue Metadata analysis code for content items to send for translation

For detailed instructions and descriptions of these options, see Specifying Translation Options.

Optional. If you are sending content directly out for translation (not to the Translation Queue) and If multiple translation providers are configured for your team profile, then in the LSP page of the wizard, you select your translation provider (LSP). If your translation provider is Lionbridge Freeway, you select Freeway-specific options. For detailed instructions, see Selecting Your Translation Provider.
Optional. If you are sending content directly out for translation (not to the Translation Queue), then in the Translation Job page of the wizard, you can specify the following parameters for your translation job:
- deadline
- notes for the translation provider
- reference files (support assets) that provide helpful context for the translator
- the content type of the content in the translation job
- request a quote from the translation provider before the translation process starts
- job name
- job description
- purchase order reference number
- email addresses that will receive notification emails about the status of the translation job
- localization reviewer

In this wizard page, you also send the translation job to the translation provider you specified earlier.

For detailed instructions, see Specifying Job Options and Submitting Your Job.

For information about the events that occur when the Connector sends out content for translation, see Sending Content for Translation.

2.4.1.1 - Specifying Initial Settings in the Bulk Translation Wizard

To get started, you open the Bulk Translation wizard and specify the source and target languages for the job. If you are a member of multiple teams, you also select the team profile to use in this job.

To send out content for translation via the Bulk Translation wizard:

Do one of the following to open the Bulk Translation wizard:
- In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click the Tools icon and then click Lionbridge Connector in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. (This opens the Connector in a new browser tab.) Then, click Bulk Translation in the Lionbridge Connector rail.
- In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, scroll down and click Lionbridge Connector in the right pane. Then, click Bulk Translation in the Lionbridge Connector rail.
- In your Web browser, navigate to /content/ctctranslation/bulktrans.html on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

The Settings(#) page of the Bulk Translation wizard opens.

In the Settings page, you choose the following settings:

Setting	Description
Profile	If you are a member of multiple teams, then in the Profile dropdown list, select the team profile to use with the Bulk Translation wizard. This displays the source and target languages and the translation providers specified for the team profile.
Source Language	Select the source language for translation. The Connector will send pages in this source language for translation.
Target Language	Select the check boxes for all the target languages into which you want to translate the source content. The list displays all the languages that are set up in Adobe Experience Manager for your team. To select all available languages, select the All check box.
Translate/Copy source to target only	For each language you select, choose one of the following options: Translate: This creates a copy of all the source nodes and pages in the target. The Connector sends all pages in the source site structure for translation. Copy source to target only: The Connector copies the source content to the target content item without sending it out for translation. This is useful when there is content that you do not want to translate, but that you want to include in the target version. Note: The Connector creates these pages in the target structure. If pages already exist in the target structure, including previously translated content, the Connector overwrites these pages with the source content.

Click Next.

The Item Type page of the wizard opens. For detailed instructions, see Selecting Content Items to Translate.

2.4.1.2 - Selecting Content Items to Translate

After clicking Next in the Settings page of the Bulk Translation wizard, the Item Type page opens.

To select which items to translate:

At the top of the Item Type page, select one of the following item types:
- Pages: Web pages, Content Fragments, Experience Fragments, adaptive forms, or digital assets.
- Tags: Metadata assigned to a content item within Adobe Experience Manager (usually a page), which act as keywords or labels attached to that content item.
- i18n dictionaries: Texts and their translations in a CQ5 Translator dictionary.
In the Search from Site Path field, specify the highest root folder of all source pages, tags, or dictionaries to send for translation. Either:
- Click the arrow at the end of the field , navigate to that path, select it, and click Select.

Note: By default, the dialog box opens to the path of the root folder for the source language you selected in step 2, above.

Type the path in the following format: /content/geometrixx/en. For Content Fragments, or Experience Fragments, type the path in the following format: /content/dam/en. For adaptive forms, type the path in the following format: /content/forms/af.

Tip: Alternatively, you can click Load Saved to load the last set of previously saved page paths to the list.

Note about team profiles: If one or more paths are configured for your team profile, you can select only pages that are in these paths for translation. The path configuration does not restrict your selection of digital assets, tags, and dictionaries (i18n items).

Note: To send digital assets, including their metadata, for translation, the path is under the language root under /content/dam, for example: /content/dam/geometrixx/en/icons.

Optional. In the Modification Filter From field, enter the earliest modification date for which to include items. Enter the date in the YYYY-MM-DD format. In the To field, enter the latest modification date for which to include pages. To apply this filter to the items that the search agent will collect, select the Apply Modification Filter check box. If you use this option, only items that were changed in the specified date range are included.
In the Search Using Agent field, select an agent to collect items to send for translation. Select a custom agent or one of the following pre-configured agents from the list:
- Page agents, which are available only if Pages is selected in Item Type, at the top of the page:
  - Get current page: Default. The agent collects the root page of the path specified in the Search from Site Path box, above.
  - Get all children pages: The agent collects all children pages of the path specified in the Search from Site Path box, above. It does not collect any pages in the root path.
  - Get current page and all children pages: The agent collects the root page and all children pages of the path specified in the Search from Site Path box, above.
- The Get current and child tags agent, which is available only if Tags is selected in Item Type, at the top of the page.
- The Get i18n agent, which is available only if i18n dictionaries is selected in Item Type, at the top of the page.

Note: For information on creating a custom agent, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

Click Add.

The specified agent collects all items that match the search criteria and displays them in the list. By default, the check box for each page you add is selected, and the check box for each tag or i18n dictionary is cleared.

The following summary information is displayed:

Total Displayed: The total number of items available for selection.
Total Selected (for translation): The number of items selected to send out for translation.

The following information is displayed about each item:

Column	Description
Path	The path to the item to send out for translation. Tip: Click the link to open the page, fragment, or form in a new browser tab. The page opens in either the Touch UI or the Classic UI, depending on your company’s configuration.
Content	The type of content to send out for translation. Supported values are all the types of nodes included in your company’s website. - dam:Asset [CF] is displayed for Content Fragments. - cq:Page [XF] is displayed for Experience Fragments. - cq:Page [AF] is displayed for adaptive forms.
Template	The Adobe Experience Manager template used to create the item.
Modification	- The date and time when the item was last modified, in the following format: YYYY-MM-DD kk:mm:ss, where kk is the hour represented by a 24-hour clock. - The (m) following the date and time indicates that the item was modified. The username of the user who last modified the item is displayed in parentheses, for example, [admin].

Note: You can repeat steps 5 to 8 to perform multiple searches and add multiple sets of items with different root folders to the list of items to translate. However, all sets of items must be of the same type, such as page items.

Note: You can select one dictionary item at a time for translation. To select another dictionary item for translation, run the Bulk Translation wizard again.

Optional. You can click the Toggle Filter link to display a text box at the top of the list. As you type into the this text box, the Connector automatically filters the list of page and asset paths and names and displays only the matching items.
Clear the check boxes of any items you do not want to send out for translation. Ensure that the check boxes are selected for any items you want to send out for translation.
Use the following features to modify the list of items to send out for translation:
- To select the check boxes for all the items in the list, click Select All.
- To clear the check boxes for all the items in the list, click Unselect All.
- To remove all the items from the list, even if the corresponding check boxes are selected, click Clear.
Optional. To save the page paths displayed in the list, so that you can reload them later, click Save.
Optional. To update the Total Selected (for translation) field above with the number of items with selected check boxes, click Update.
Click Next.

The Options page of the wizard opens. For detailed instructions, see Specifying Translation Options.

2.4.1.3 - Specifying Translation Options

Specifying Translation Options

After clicking Next in the Item Type page of the Bulk Translation wizard, the Options page opens. You use this page to specify translation options for the content items you selected in the previous page of the wizard.

The Options page of the wizard is displayed differently, depending on which Item Type you selected in the previous page of the wizard, because some translation options are relevant only for pages, and not for tags or I18N dictionaries.

Version displayed if Pages is selected in the Item Type page of the wizard.

Version displayed if Tags or I18N dictionaries is selected in the Item Type page of the wizard.

To specify translation options for the content items to send for translation:

Enter the following information about the translation options:

Note: Your company’s configuration determines the default value of each option.

Option	Description
Use Local TM	This feature determines whether to check each component in the source version of the item for any content changes, and send only changed components out for translation. If a component was previously translated and it has not changed, then the Connector does not send it for translation again: Instead, it uses the stored translation. This feature reduces the quantity of content that the Connector sends to translation providers, which reduces your cost. However, it needs the Connector translation backup data, and it increases the Connector processing time before sending out the items for translation. * If this check box is selected, the Connector checks whether content was already translated before sending it out for translation. * If this check box is cleared, the Connector sends out content for translation without checking whether it has already been translated. Note about i18n dictionary items: If this check box is selected, the Connector sends only previously untranslated i18n dictionary items for translation. If this check box is cleared, the Connector sends all i18n items for translation.
Select if using Blueprint/Live-copy	This option is relevant when the target pages are MSM (Multi Site Manager) live copy pages, which means that Adobe Experience Manager automatically updates a target page when the corresponding source page changes. It prevents the Connector from overwriting unique source content that already exists in the target pages. This is useful when you are sending a page for translation that has been used in the past to push content to other pages, and includes target page content which has been changed, for example, regionalized. In this scenario you do not want to overwrite the regionalized content as the translation process occurs. Select this option when you do not want the Connector to overwrite components in the target pages that include regionalized content with the newly translated content. * If this check box is selected, the Connector does not overwrite unique source content that already exists in the target pages. * If this check box is cleared, the Connector does overwrite unique source content that already exists in the target pages. Recommendation: Select this check box if you are using the live-copy feature. Note: This option is available only if Pages is selected in the Item Type page of the wizard.
Only translate content from locked components	This option enables users to send out only content from locked components for translation. * If this check box is selected, users can send out content for translation only if it is from a locked component. * If this check box is cleared, users can send out content for translation whether or not it is from a locked component. Note: Locked components have an inheritance relationship between a source Blueprint page and the connected live copy page. When sending content for translation using Sidekick, users can choose whether to send for translation the content from locked components, which is inherited from a Blueprint component. This is useful if, for example, the page has both global and regional information and you only want to translate (replace) the global content that is created via a Blueprint page. In this scenario, suppose that the regional content on the page is manually translated in house, and that it has not changed. You would not want to tamper with it. However, using the same scenario, the global content from head office has changed and needs translation. You would select this check box to separate the content and localize only the new, inherited content. Note about Blueprint pages: If the Pickup Content From Blueprint Pages setting is specified, then the Connector always acts as though this option is selected, even if it is not selected. This occurs because only content from locked components are rolled out from Blueprint pages to Livecopy pages. For more information, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide. Note: This option is available only if Pages is selected in the Item Type page of the wizard.
Unlock the component after translated content come back	This option automatically unlocks a component after translated content returns. This option is relevant only when the Select if using Blueprint/Live-copy is been selected. After translated content returns, it automatically unlocks a component, which breaks the MSM inheritance. Warning: This breaks the inheritance between the component and its Blueprint page, so that it no longer inherits new content. However, you can use the CTCRestoreOriginalSync workflow to relock the component and recreate the inheritance. For details, see Relocking Unlocked Components. * If this check box is selected, the Connector automatically unlocks a component after translated content returns. * If this check box is cleared, the Connector does not automatically unlock a component after translated content returns. Note: This option is available only if Pages is selected in the Item Type page of the wizard.
Allow translate content from Not-Sync’d components	This option enables users to send content for translation even if it is not synchronized. This means it does not have a relationship to a Blueprint page, so it cannot be synchronized with it. This can happen if you are not using the MSM (Multi Site Manager) feature of Adobe Experience Manager, or if this is a page with regionalized content that does not inherit content from a Blueprint page. * If this check box is selected, users can send out content for translation if it does not have a relationship to a Blueprint page. * If this check box is cleared, users cannot send out content for translation if it does not have a relationship to a Blueprint page. Important: The Connector treats certain page properties (`jcr:content`, `jcr:title`, `jcr:description`) as unlocked page properties. Therefore, if you want the Connector to send these page properties for translation, you must select this check box. Recommendation: Select this check box if you are using either the live-copy or the language-copy features. Note about Blueprint pages: If the Pickup Content From Blueprint Pages setting is specified, then the Connector always acts as though this option is selected, even when it is not. This occurs because only content from locked components is rolled out from Blueprint pages to Livecopy pages. For more information, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide. Note: This option is available only if Pages is selected in the Item Type page of the wizard.
Translate page content	Indicates whether to translate regular content fields in this content item. Important: To send out words on pages for translation, you must select this check box. Note: This option is available only if Pages is selected in the Item Type page of the wizard.
Translate Metadata	Select this check box to send out for translation metadata fields that are defined in the Page Metadata Configuration section of the Advanced Settings page. These are properties under the /jcr:content node. Note: This option is available only if Pages is selected in the Item Type page of the wizard.
Load existing translation to LocalTM first	This option saves any target content that has already been translated to the local translation memory (TM) instead of sending it out for translation: * When this option is selected: * The Connector does not send out for translation entries that already have translations. Instead, it stores these translations in the local TM. * The Connector sends out for translation only entries that do not have corresponding translations. * When this option is not selected, the Connector overwrites any existing translated content. Tip: Select the Use Local TM check box, described above, to instruct the Connector to check whether content was already translated before sending it out for translation. Note: This option is available only if Tags or i18n dictionaries is selected in the Item Type page of the wizard.
Queue Metadata	You can select the Level-2 Queue Metadata analysis code for these content items. If you add these items to the Translation Queue, you can filter and sort items there by this analysis code. Note: Available only when using the Content API Translation Connector for Lionbridge Freeway. Displayed only when the Use Analysis Codes as Queue Metadata check box is selected in the Freeway Config section of the Configuration page. For details, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

Do one of the following:
- If you want to send the selected items to the Translation Queue instead of sending them out directly for translation, click Add to queue. The Translation Queue opens. For details, see Submitting Content for Translation from the Translation Queue.
- To immediately send out the selected items for translation, click Next.
  - If multiple translation providers are configured for your team profile, the LSP page of the wizard opens. For detailed instructions, see Selecting Your Translation Provider.
  - Otherwise, the Translation Job page of the wizard opens. For detailed instructions, see Specifying Job Options and Submitting Your Job.

2.4.1.4 - Selecting Your Translation Provider

After clicking Next in the Options page of the Bulk Translation wizard, if multiple translation providers are configured for your team profile, the LSP page of the wizard opens. In this page, you select your translation provider (LSP) and configure any LSP-specific options.

To select your translation provider:

In the Choose LSP list, select the translation provider for this translation job from the list.

If you selected Lionbridge Freeway in the previous step, complete the following additional fields:

Field

Description

Special Instruction

Any additional instructions for Freeway, which are sent as metadata. Available only if the selected translation provider in the Choose LSP box, above, is the Lionbridge Freeway Type.

Analysis Code

The Freeway analysis codes for the translation. Displayed only if:
- In the Choose LSP box, above, the selected provider is the Lionbridge Freeway Type.
- The Connector is configured to display these fields.
You specify the analysis codes that are relevant to your content. Your Lionbridge setup determines which analysis codes are available for you to specify, and the values available for selection for each analysis code. For example, the Region, Department, and Priority analysis codes may be available for you to specify.

Click Next.

The Translation Job page of the wizard opens. For detailed instructions, see Specifying Job Options and Submitting Your Job.

2.4.1.5 - Specifying Job Options and Submitting Your Job

Specifying Job Options and Submitting Your Job

The Translation Job page of the Bulk Translation wizard opens when:

You click Next in the Options page of the wizard, if multiple translation providers are not configured for your team profile.
You click Next in the LSP page of the wizard, if multiple translation providers are configured for your team profile.

To specify job options and submit your job for translation:

In the Translation Job page of the wizard, enter the following information about the files to send out for translation:

Option	Description
Deadline	The date you are requesting for the translated content to return. Click in the field and select a date in the calendar that opens. This information is sent to the translation provider as metadata of the translation package. Recommendation: Discuss whether to use this feature with your translation provider(s).
Translation Notes	Enter any additional information about this translation job. This information is sent to the translation provider as a comment in the metadata of the translation package.
Reference Files	You can send reference files (support assets) to your translation provider as part of a translation job. This provides helpful context for the translator. For instructions on adding reference files in Adobe Experience Manager, refer to the Adobe Experience Manager documentation for uploading digital assets: * version 6.2: https://helpx.adobe.com/experience-manager/6-2/assets/using/managing-assets-touch-ui.html * version 6.3: https://helpx.adobe.com/experience-manager/6-3/assets/using/managing-assets-touch-ui.html * version 6.4: https://helpx.adobe.com/experience-manager/6-4/assets/using/managing-assets-touch-ui.html * version 6.5: https://helpx.adobe.com/experience-manager/6-5/assets/using/managing-assets-touch-ui.html Note: This feature is available only if the Allow Reference Files for Translation Job check box is selected in the UI and Default Settings section of the Configuration page. For detailed instructions, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide. ##### To add a reference file to the Connector: 1. Click the down arrow and navigate to the reference file or folder containing reference files. 2. Select the reference file or folder containing reference files and click Select. 3. Repeat the previous steps for each reference file or folder containing reference files that you want to include. The Connector will send all specified files and all files in the specified folders to the translation provider.
Content Type	You can tag the content in a translation job as a specific content type. Depending on your company’s configuration, the Content API Platform may send the content to a specific translation provider based on the content type. Select one of the following content types: * Marketing * Technical * Legal Note: You may see different content types if your company has configured custom content types.
Quote	Select this check box to inform the translation provider that you want to receive a quote before the translation process starts. Note: This check box is displayed only if the selected translation provider is configured to support providing a quote before the translation process starts.
Job Name	Your name for this translation job. By default this includes the username, date, and time when you created the job, for example: Submit by [admin] @ 2016-12-20 6.57 PM. This is stored in the CQJobName attribute in the XML that the Connector sends to the translation provider.
PO Reference	Enter the purchase order reference number.
Job Description	Additional information about this job. This is stored in the CQJobDescription attribute in the XML that the Connector sends to the translation provider.
Notification Emails	Enter one or more email addresses that will receive notification when the content leaves Adobe Experience Manager and when it returns to Adobe Experience Manager. Use a comma to separate multiple email addresses.
In-country Reviewer	Optional. This is generally the name of the localization reviewer, which is stored in the InCountryReviewer attribute in the XML sent to the translation provider. By default, this field is hidden.

Note: If you want to send the selected items to the Translation Queue instead of sending them out directly for translation, click Add to queue. The Translation Queue opens. For details, see Submitting Content for Translation from the Translation Queue.

Click Start Translation.

The Connector sends the translation job to the translation provider you specified.

The Job Details tab of the Translation Status page opens, where you can monitor the progress of your translation job. For details, see Monitoring Pages in a Translation Job and Viewing Translated Content.

For information about the events that occur when the Connector sends out content for translation, see Sending Content for Translation.

2.4.2 - Sending Pages for Translation Using the Globalization Tool

The Globalization Tool enables you to send multiple pages, digital assets, Content Fragments, Experience Fragments, and adaptive forms directly out for translation or to the Translation Queue. You can add pages from multiple site paths, and/or upload paths stored in CSV or XLS files. You can filter pages and assets by publication date, on time, off time, activation state, and page template.

Important: By default, this feature is hidden. To use the Globalization Tool, you must select the Show Globalization Tool check box in the UI and Default Settings section of the Configuration page. For detailed instructions, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

Notes: You can submit Content Fragments, Experience Fragments, and adaptive forms for translation only using the Bulk Translation wizard or the Globalization Tool. You can configure the Connector to submit for translation Content Fragments that are referenced in pages, Experience Fragments, and adaptive forms by selecting the Translate Dependent CF check box in the Translation Settings section of the Configuration page. For detailed instructions, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

Note: Depending on your company configuration, you can submit digital assets, such as PDF and JPG files, for translation, including asset metadata.

You can also use the Globalization Tool to perform Adobe Experience Manager actions on multiple pages and digital assets simultaneously. For detailed instructions, see Performing Actions on Multiple Pages and Digital Assets.

To send out pages and assets for translation via the Globalization Tool:

Do one of the following to open the Globalization Tool:
- In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click the Tools icon and then click Lionbridge Connector in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. (This opens the Connector in a new browser tab.) Then, click Globalization Tool in the Lionbridge Connector rail.
- In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, scroll down and click Lionbridge Connector in the right pane. Then, click Globalization Tool in the Lionbridge Connector rail.
- In your Web browser, navigate to /content/ctctranslation/advbulk.html on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

The Globalization Tool opens.

Optional. If you are a member of multiple teams, then in the Profile dropdown list, select the team profile to use with the Globalization Tool. This displays the source and target languages and the translation providers specified for the team profile. To always use the selected profile with the Globalization Tool, click Set as default.
In the Select Pages section, you either set the parent path of one or more files to upload, apply filters, and then use an agent to upload the files, or you upload one or more files containing the paths of pages. You repeat this step until you have added all the paths and files to add. Do one of the following to select pages:
- To set the parent path of one or more files to upload, apply filters, and then use an agent to upload the files:

Note about team profiles: If one or more paths are configured for your team profile, you can select only pages that are in these paths for translation. The path configuration does not restrict your selection of digital assets.

a. In the Search from Site Path field, specify the highest root folder of all source pages or the full path of a page of a website. Either:

Click the arrow at the end of the field , navigate to that path, select it, and click Select.
Type the path in one of the following formats: /content/geometrixx/en or http://localhost:4502/content/geometrixx/en/company.html. For Content Fragments, or Experience Fragments, type the path in the following format: /content/dam/en. For adaptive forms, type the path in the following format: /content/forms/af.

Note: To send digital assets, including their metadata, for translation, the path is under the language root under /content/dam, for example: /content/dam/geometrixx/en/icons.

Tips: You can select a previously entered path. Alternatively, you can click Load Saved to load the last set of previously saved page paths to the list.

b. Optional. Specify any of the following filters:

Filter	Description	How To Specify…
Modification Filter	The range of dates when the page was modified.	* In the From and To boxes, enter the dates in YYYY-MM-DD format. * Select the Apply modification filter check box.
Publishing Filter	The range of dates when the page was published.	* In the From and To boxes, enter the dates in YYYY-MM-DD format. * Select the Apply publishing filter check box.
Off time (expiration)	The range of dates when the page was off time, or unpublished.	* In the From and To boxes, enter the dates in YYYY-MM-DD format. * Select the Apply offtime filter check box.
On time	The range of dates when the page was on time.	* In the From and To boxes, enter the dates in YYYY-MM-DD format. * Select the Apply ontime filter check box.
Page template filter	The Adobe Experience Manager template used to create the page.	Select the check boxes for the templates to include, or select the check box in the list header to include all templates.

Tip: For precise descriptions of some of these terms, refer to the Adobe Experience Manager documentation, available at: https://docs.adobe.com/docs/en/aem/6-2/author/page-authoring/publishing-pages.html.

c. Optional. In the Page activation state section, select one or more of the following activation states for the pages to include:

Activated: The page has been activated (published).
DeActivated: The page was activated (published) and then deactivated (unpublished).
Never Activated: The page has never been activated (published).

d. In the Search Using Agent field, select an agent to collect items to send for translation. Select a custom agent or one of the following pre-configured agents from the list:

Get current page: Default. The agent collects the root page of the path specified in the Search from Site Path box, above.
Get all children pages: The agent collects all children pages of the path specified in the Search from Site Path box, above. It does not collect any pages in the root path.
Get current page and all children pages: The agent collects the root page and all children pages of the path specified in the Search from Site Path box, above.

e. Click Add.

You can repeat these steps to add multiple sets of pages with different root folders to the list of pages.

To upload a file with the paths of the source content or import pages from a previously sent translation job, click the Load pages button:

Note: If an optional package is installed, you can upload an Excel file with the target languages for a translation job. For a description of the required formatting in the Excel file, see Importing Target Languages in the Globalization Tool. To obtain this optional package, contact Lionbridge Connector Support.

The Select a file to upload dialog box opens.

Do one of the following:

To upload a file with the paths of the source content:

a. Click Choose File.

f. In the browser dialog box that opens, navigate to the XLS or CSV file containing the paths of the source files, select it, and click Open, or similar, to close the browser dialog box.

The Select a file to upload dialog box displays the path of the file you selected.

g. Click Upload to upload the file.

A message box confirms that the file is added.

h. Click OK to close the message box.

The specified agent collects all items that match the search criteria and adds them to the list. You can repeat these steps to add additional files containing paths of pages to the list.

To import pages from a previously sent translation job:

a. In the Import pages from translation job – From dropdown list, select the time range of previous translation jobs to display. The default value is Last two weeks.

b. Click the Refresh icon to populate the list of previous translation jobs in the list below.

c. Select the previous translation job to import from the dropdown list at the bottom of the dialog box.

d. Click Import.

The Connectors adds the content items from the selected job to the list.

The following summary information is displayed in the Pages x/y field, where:

X is the total number of pages available for selection.
Y is the number of pages selected to send out for translation.

The following information is displayed about each page:

Column	Description
blank	A locked padlock icon indicates if the page is locked.
Path	The path to the page. Tip: Click the link to open the page, fragment, or form in a new browser tab. The page opens in either the Touch UI or the Classic UI, depending on your company’s configuration.
Lng	The Adobe Experience Manager language of the page.
Loc	The Adobe Experience Manager locale of the page.
Template	The Adobe Experience Manager template used to create the page. * dam:Asset [CF] for Content Fragments * cq:Page for Experience Fragments * cq:Page [AF] for adaptive forms
T. Status	Optional. The custom translation status configured for the translation provider (LSP) that translated the page. Note: This column is displayed only if custom translation-status values are configured. For instructions, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
Activation	Whether the page is activated or deactivated.
Activation/De-Activation Date	* The date and time when the page was last activated or de-activated, in the following format: YYYY-MM-DD kk:mm:ss, where kk is the hour represented by a 24-hour clock. * The username of the user who activated or deactivated the page. * One of the following codes, indicating whether the page was last activated or de-activated: * CTA: Activated * CTD: Deactivated.
Modification	* The date and time when the item was last modified, in the following format: YYYY-MM-DD kk:mm:ss, where kk is the hour represented by a 24-hour clock. * The (m) following the date and time indicates that the item was modified. The username of the user who last modified the item is displayed in parentheses, for example, [admin]. * One of the following codes, indicating how the page was last modified: * CTT: Translation * CTU: Update * `CTI`: Import * `CTR`: Rollout

Select the check boxes for any pages you want to send out for translation. Ensure that the check boxes are cleared for any pages you do not want to send out for translation.
- To update the numbers of selected pages, highlighted pages, and total pages at the top-left corner of the list, click Re-Count.
- The number after the check box displays the number of selected pages.
- The number after the highlight displays the number of highlighted pages.
- The number after the slash ( / ) displays the total number of pages.

For example:

To select the check boxes for all the pages in the list, click Select All.
To clear the check boxes for all the pages in the list, click De-Select all.

Optional. Use the following features to update the list:
- To remove all the pages from the list, even if the corresponding check boxes are selected, click Clear.
- To update information about pages displayed in list, such as modification date, click Refresh.
Optional. To save the page paths displayed in the list, so that you can reload them later, click Save.
Optional. To view a page, click the path in the Path column. The page opens in a new browser tab.
In the Translation tab, specify the translation settings for the selected pages in the list.

Note: For a description of all other tabs, see Performing Actions on Multiple Pages and Digital Assets.

Setting	Description
Source language	Select the source language for translation. The Connector will send pages in this source language for translation.
Target language	Select the check boxes for all the target languages into which you want to translate the source content. The list displays all the languages that are set up in Adobe Experience Manager for your team. * To select the check boxes for all available languages, click All. * To clear all selected check boxes, click Clear.
Deadline	The date you are requesting for the translated content to return. Click in the field and select a date in the calendar that opens. This information is sent to the translation provider as metadata of the translation package. Recommendation: Discuss whether to use this feature with your translation provider(s).
Translate Page Content?	Indicates whether to translate regular content fields in this content item. Important: To send out words on pages for translation, you must select this check box.
Translate Metadata?	Select this check box to send out for translation metadata fields that are defined in the Page Metadata Configuration section of the Advanced Settings page. These are properties under the /jcr:content node.
Use local TM?	This feature determines whether to check each component in the source version of the item for any content changes, and send only changed components out for translation. If a component was previously translated and it has not changed, then the Connector does not send it for translation again: Instead, it uses the stored translation. This feature reduces the quantity of content that the Connector sends to translation providers, which reduces your cost. However, it needs the Connector translation backup data, and it increases the Connector processing time before sending out the items for translation. * If this check box is selected, the Connector checks whether content was already translated before sending it out for translation. * If this check box is cleared, the Connector sends out content for translation without checking whether it has already been translated.
Notes	Enter any additional information about this translation job. This information is sent to the translation provider as a comment in the metadata of the translation package.
MSM Options
Select if using Blueprint/Live-copy	This option is relevant when the target pages are MSM (Multi Site Manager) live copy pages, which means that Adobe Experience Manager automatically updates a target page when the corresponding source page changes. It prevents the Connector from overwriting unique source content that already exists in the target pages. This is useful when you are sending a page for translation that has been used in the past to push content to other pages, and includes target page content which has been changed, for example, regionalized. In this scenario you do not want to overwrite the regionalized content as the translation process occurs. Select this option when you do not want the Connector to overwrite components in the target pages that include regionalized content with the newly translated content. * If this check box is selected, the Connector does not overwrite unique source content that already exists in the target pages. * If this check box is cleared, the Connector does overwrite unique source content that already exists in the target pages. Recommendation: Select this check box if you are using the live-copy feature.
Only translate content from locked components	This option enables users to send out only content from locked components for translation. * If this check box is selected, users can send out content for translation only if it is from a locked component. * If this check box is cleared, users can send out content for translation whether or not it is from a locked component. Note: Locked components have an inheritance relationship between a source Blueprint page and the connected live copy page. When sending content for translation using Sidekick, users can choose whether to send for translation the content from locked components, which is inherited from a Blueprint component. This is useful if, for example, the page has both global and regional information and you only want to translate (replace) the global content that is created via a Blueprint page. In this scenario, suppose that the regional content on the page is manually translated in house, and that it has not changed. You would not want to tamper with it. However, using the same scenario, the global content from head office has changed and needs translation. You would select this check box to separate the content and localize only the new, inherited content. Note about Blueprint pages: If the Pickup Content From Blueprint Pages setting is specified, then the Connector always acts as though this option is selected, even if it is not selected. This occurs because only content from locked components are rolled out from Blueprint pages to Livecopy pages. For more information, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
Unlock the component after translated content come back	This option automatically unlocks a component after translated content returns. This option is relevant only when the Select if using Blueprint/Live-copy is been selected. After translated content returns, it automatically unlocks a component, which breaks the MSM inheritance. Warning: This breaks the inheritance between the component and its Blueprint page, so that it no longer inherits new content. However, you can use the CTCRestoreOriginalSync workflow to relock the component and recreate the inheritance. For details, see Relocking Unlocked Components. * If this check box is selected, the Connector automatically unlocks a component after translated content returns. * If this check box is cleared, the Connector does not automatically unlock a component after translated content returns.
Allow translate content from Not-Sync components	This option enables users to send content for translation even if it is not synchronized. This means it does not have a relationship to a Blueprint page, so it cannot be synchronized with it. This can happen if you are not using the MSM (Multi Site Manager) feature of Adobe Experience Manager, or if this is a page with regionalized content that does not inherit content from a Blueprint page. * If this check box is selected, users can send out content for translation if it does not have a relationship to a Blueprint page. * If this check box is cleared, users cannot send out content for translation if it does not have a relationship to a Blueprint page. Important: The Connector treats certain page properties (`jcr:content`, `jcr:title`, `jcr:description`) as unlocked page properties. Therefore, if you want the Connector to send these page properties for translation, you must select this check box. Recommendation: Select this check box if you are using either the live-copy or the language-copy features. Note about Blueprint pages: If the Pickup Content From Blueprint Pages setting is specified, then the Connector always acts as though this option is selected, even when it is not. This occurs because only content from locked components is rolled out from Blueprint pages to Livecopy pages. For more information, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

Do one of the following:
- If you want to send the selected items to the Translation Queue instead of sending them out directly for translation, click Add to Queue. The Translation Queue opens. For details, see Submitting Content for Translation from the Translation Queue.
- To immediately send out the selected items for translation as a single translation job, you must enter the following information in the Send for Translation Now section:

a. In the Choose LSP dropdown list, select your translation provider (LSP). If you select Lionbridge Freeway, the section expands to display additional fields.

b. Enter the following information about your translation job:

Setting	Description
Special Instruction	Any additional instructions for Freeway, which are sent as metadata. Available only if the selected translation provider in the Choose LSP box, above, is the Lionbridge Freeway Type.
Analysis Code	The analysis codes for the translation. Displayed only if Lionbridge Freeway is selected in the Choose LSP box, above. You specify the analysis codes that are relevant to your content. Your Lionbridge setup determines which analysis codes are available for you to specify, and the values available for selection for each analysis code. In this example, the Color, Direction, and Sense analysis codes are available for you to specify.
Translation job name	Your name for this translation job. By default this includes the username, date, and time when you created the job, for example: Submit by [admin] @ 2016-12-20 6.57 PM. This is stored in the CQJobName attribute in the XML that the Connector sends to the translation provider.
Job description	Additional information about this job. This is stored in the CQJobDescription attribute in the XML that the Connector sends to the translation provider.
Reference Files	You can send reference files (support assets) to your translation provider as part of a translation job. This provides helpful context for the translator. For instructions on adding reference files in Adobe Experience Manager, refer to the Adobe Experience Manager documentation for uploading digital assets: * version 6.2: https://helpx.adobe.com/experience-manager/6-2/assets/using/managing-assets-touch-ui.html * version 6.3: https://helpx.adobe.com/experience-manager/6-3/assets/using/managing-assets-touch-ui.html * version 6.4: https://helpx.adobe.com/experience-manager/6-4/assets/using/managing-assets-touch-ui.html * version 6.5: https://helpx.adobe.com/experience-manager/6-5/assets/using/managing-assets-touch-ui.html Note: This feature is available only if the Allow Reference Files for Translation Job check box is selected in the UI and Default Settings section of the Configuration page. For detailed instructions, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide. ##### To add a reference file to the Connector: 1. Click the down arrow and navigate to the reference file or folder containing reference files. 2. Select the reference file or folder containing reference files and click Select. 3. Repeat the previous steps for each reference file or folder containing reference files that you want to include. The Connector will send all specified files and all files in the specified folders to the translation provider.
PO Reference	The purchase order reference number for this translation job.
Content Type	You can tag the content in a translation job as a specific content type. Depending on your company’s configuration, the Content API Platform may send the content to a specific translation provider based on the content type. Select one of the following content types: * Marketing * Technical * Legal Note: You may see different content types if your company has configured custom content types.
Quote	Select this check box to inform the translation provider that you want to receive a quote before the translation process starts. Note: This check box is displayed only if the selected translation provider is configured to support providing a quote before the translation process starts.
Notification emails	Enter one or more email addresses that will receive notification when the content leaves Adobe Experience Manager and when it returns to Adobe Experience Manager. Use a comma to separate multiple email addresses.

Click Start translation.

The Connector sends the translation job to the translation provider you specified.

For information about the events that occur when the Connector sends out content for translation, see Sending Content for Translation.

2.4.2.1 - Importing Target Languages in the Globalization Tool

You can upload a Microsoft Excel file with a list of target languages when sending out files for translation from the Globalization Tool, as described in Sending Pages and Assets for Translation Using the Globalization Tool.

Microsoft Excel file format

The Microsoft Excel file must have the following format:

Excel Column	Column Header	Notes
A	GEP
B	Project Name
C	Channel
D	Sub Channel
E	Assets
F	Cycle Name
G	Production Status
H	Source Word Count
I	Translated Word Count
J	Total Cost
K	Total Project Cost
L	Markets	Target languages and codes, comma separated, for example: English(EN-GB), French(FR-CA)
M	HODate
N	HBDate
O	Actual Final HB
P	Desired HBDate
Q	Actual Localization Complete Date
R	Daily Comments
S	Field Review Start Date
T	Field Review Complete Date
U	Total Number of Language
V	Delayed Language
W	Total Number of delayed Days
X	Total Number of delayed Language
Y	Average Delay
Z	Query
AA	File Location

To upload the Excel file:

Click the Load pages button to open the Select a file to upload dialog box.
In the dialog box, browse to and select the Excel file, and click Open, or similar, to close the browser dialog box. The Select a file to upload dialog box displays the path of the file you selected.

2.4.3 - Sending Files to the Translation Queue When You Roll Out Files

If your Connector is appropriately configured, then when you roll out files, the Connector automatically sends them to the Translation Queue using your company’s default translation settings.

For more information about this feature, read:

This feature is available only if either the CTCRolloutTranslation workflow is part of your rollout configuration, or the Catch rollout pages to [Rollout] Queue check box in the Translation Settings section of the Configuration page is selected. For more information on configuring this feature, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

2.4.3.1 - Adobe Experience Manager's MSM and the Rollout Process

Some content may be common to all web sites, such as the car company’s history.
Some content may be a mix of common and specific. For example, the company may sell the same cars in many countries, but the cars may have slightly different features in some countries, depending on local regulations.
Some content may be specific to a specific version of the site, such as information about car dealerships in a particular country.

Rollout is a process that propagates the changes made from the source (Blueprint) to the target (live copy). When you roll out a site, Adobe Experience Manager copies the Blueprint (source) to the live copy (target). If the components are locked, then whenever the source content changes, Adobe Experience Manager automatically updates the target content.

The following Adobe Experience Manager concepts are helpful to understanding MSM and rollout, and how to configure and use the Connector accordingly:

Concept	Description
Blueprint	A source template for multiple pages, which can be rolled out.
Live copy	A copy of an existing page or Blueprint, which is the target. Adobe Experience Manager can automatically update the live copy when changes occur to the source. Important: If you use this feature, you must select the Select if using Blueprint/Live-copy option. The Allow translate content from Not-Sync components setting is optional.
Locked	Specifies the inheritance relationship between the target and the source. When the source changes, Adobe Experience Manager automatically updates a locked component in the target. In the car company example, this is useful for pages that have the same content in all versions, such as information about the history of the company.
Unlocked	Specifies the inheritance relationship between the target and the source. When the source changes, Adobe Experience Manager does not update an unlocked component in the target. In the car company example, this is useful for regionalized pages that should not be updated, such as a list of local car dealerships.

2.4.3.2 - Why Integrate the Connector with Rollout

	Using Rollout	Not Using Rollout
Process	Roll out pages, which automatically sends them to the Translation Queue.	1. Roll out a same-language version. 2. Translate copied version.
Number of steps	One step.	Two steps.
link between source and content	Source and target can be linked, so when source is updated, changes are automatically sent to the Translation Queue.	No linkage between source and target.

2.4.3.3 - How the Connector Fits into MSM and Rollouts

Only translate content from locked components
Select if using Blueprint/Live-copy
Unlock the component after translated content come back
Allow translated content from Not-Sync’d components

For information on configuring these options, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

Access the Rollout feature in one of the following ways:
- To roll out one or more pages, in the Blueprint Control Center, navigate to the top-level page in the source language to roll out, and select Rollout from the context menu.
- To roll out specific components on a page, in Sidekick, in the Page tab, click the Rollout Page button.

Specify which pages or components to roll out.

Select the check boxes corresponding to the live copy path for the target languages to roll out.

Click Rollout.

The Connector automatically sends the specified content to the Translation Queue. After translation, the translated content will be the target content.

After the content is in the Translation Queue, either:

You must access the Translation Queue and approve the pages you want to send out for translation. For detailed instructions, see Submitting Content for Translation from the Translation Queue.
Your company has schedules that automatically send out translation jobs from the Translation Queue. For details, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

For detailed instructions on using the rollout feature and accessing the Blueprint Control Center, refer to the Adobe Experience Manager user documentation, available at: https://helpx.adobe.com/experience-manager/6-5/sites/administering/using/msm.html.

2.4.4 - Sending Pages for Translation from the Touch-Optimized UI (Adobe Experience Manager version 6.3 and higher only)

If you are using Adobe Experience Manager version 6.3 or higher, you can send pages for translation or to the Translation Queue directly from the Touch-Optimized UI.

Tip: This method is ideal for ad-hoc translations or for sending small amounts of content for translation.

Note: Depending on your user permissions or your company configuration, you may not be able to send out content directly for translation.

Note: If one or more paths are configured for your team profile, you can send only pages that are in those paths for translation.

To send pages for translation from the Touch-Optimized UI:

In the Adobe Experience Manager Touch-Optimized UI, navigate to one of the following pages:
- the page you want to send for translation
- the parent page of sub pages you want to send for translation
Select the Edit mode. For detailed instructions, refer to the Adobe Experience Manager documentation, “Editing Page Content” which is available at: https://docs.adobe.com/docs/en/aem/6-3/author/page-authoring/editing-content.html.
In the top-left corner, click the Page Information icon .
In the menu that opens, click Translate Content, which is the second-to-last menu option.

The Pages and languages tab of the Translate Content wizard opens.

In this tab, you choose the following settings:

Setting	Description
which pages to translate	By default, Current page is selected, which sends only the current page for translation. Alternatively, you can select one of the following options from the dropdown menu: * All sub pages: The Connector sends all sub pages of the current page for translation. It does not send the current page for translation. * Current page and all sub pages: The Connector sends the current page and all sub pages of the current page for translation.
Source language	Select the source language for translation. The Connector will send pages in this source language for translation.
Select all target language(s)	Select the check boxes for all the target languages into which you want to translate the source content. The list displays all the languages that are set up in Adobe Experience Manager for your team. To select all available languages, select the Select all target language(s) check box, above the list of languages.

Click the Translation Options tab.

In this tab, you specify the following translation options:

Note: Your company’s configuration determines the default value of each option.

Option	Description
Use Local TM	This feature determines whether to check each component in the source version of the item for any content changes, and send only changed components out for translation. If a component was previously translated and it has not changed, then the Connector does not send it for translation again: Instead, it uses the stored translation. This feature reduces the quantity of content that the Connector sends to translation providers, which reduces your cost. However, it needs the Connector translation backup data, and it increases the Connector processing time before sending out the items for translation. If this check box is selected, the Connector checks whether content was already translated before sending it out for translation. If this check box is cleared, the Connector sends out content for translation without checking whether it has already been translated.
Select if using Blueprint/Live-copy	This option is relevant when the target pages are MSM (Multi Site Manager) live copy pages, which means that Adobe Experience Manager automatically updates a target page when the corresponding source page changes. It prevents the Connector from overwriting unique source content that already exists in the target pages. This is useful when you are sending a page for translation that has been used in the past to push content to other pages, and includes target page content which has been changed, for example, regionalized. In this scenario you do not want to overwrite the regionalized content as the translation process occurs. Select this option when you do not want the Connector to overwrite components in the target pages that include regionalized content with the newly translated content. If this check box is selected, the Connector does not overwrite unique source content that already exists in the target pages. If this check box is cleared, the Connector does overwrite unique source content that already exists in the target pages. Recommendation: Select this check box if you are using the live-copy feature.
Only translate content from locked components	This option enables users to send out only content from locked components for translation. * If this check box is selected, users can send out content for translation only if it is from a locked component. * If this check box is cleared, users can send out content for translation whether or not it is from a locked component. Note: Locked components have an inheritance relationship between a source Blueprint page and the connected live copy page. When sending content for translation using Sidekick, users can choose whether to send for translation the content from locked components, which is inherited from a Blueprint component. This is useful if, for example, the page has both global and regional information and you only want to translate (replace) the global content that is created via a Blueprint page. In this scenario, suppose that the regional content on the page is manually translated in house, and that it has not changed. You would not want to tamper with it. However, using the same scenario, the global content from head office has changed and needs translation. You would select this check box to separate the content and localize only the new, inherited content. Note about Blueprint pages: If the Pickup Content From Blueprint Pages setting is specified, then the Connector always acts as though this option is selected, even if it is not selected. This occurs because only content from locked components are rolled out from Blueprint pages to Livecopy pages. For more information, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
Unlock the component after translated content come back	This option automatically unlocks a component after translated content returns. This option is relevant only when the Select if using Blueprint/Live-copy is been selected. After translated content returns, it automatically unlocks a component, which breaks the MSM inheritance. Warning: This breaks the inheritance between the component and its Blueprint page, so that it no longer inherits new content. However, you can use the CTCRestoreOriginalSync workflow to relock the component and recreate the inheritance. For details, see Relocking Unlocked Components. * If this check box is selected, the Connector automatically unlocks a component after translated content returns. * If this check box is cleared, the Connector does not automatically unlock a component after translated content returns.
Allow translate content from Not-Sync’d components	This option enables users to send content for translation even if it is not synchronized. This means it does not have a relationship to a Blueprint page, so it cannot be synchronized with it. This can happen if you are not using the MSM (Multi Site Manager) feature of Adobe Experience Manager, or if this is a page with regionalized content that does not inherit content from a Blueprint page. * If this check box is selected, users can send out content for translation if it does not have a relationship to a Blueprint page. * If this check box is cleared, users cannot send out content for translation if it does not have a relationship to a Blueprint page. Important: The Connector treats certain page properties (`jcr:content`, `jcr:title`, `jcr:description`) as unlocked page properties. Therefore, if you want the Connector to send these page properties for translation, you must select this check box. Recommendation: Select this check box if you are using either the live-copy or the language-copy features. Note about Blueprint pages: If the Pickup Content From Blueprint Pages setting is specified, then the Connector always acts as though this option is selected, even when it is not. This occurs because only content from locked components is rolled out from Blueprint pages to Livecopy pages. For more information, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
Translate page content	Indicates whether to translate regular content fields in this content item. Important: To send out words on pages for translation, you must select this check box.
Translate Metadata	Select this check box to send out for translation metadata fields that are defined in the Page Metadata Configuration section of the Advanced Settings page. These are properties under the /jcr:content node.

If multiple translation providers (LSPs) are defined for your team profile, and if you want to send the specified pages immediately out for translation (rather than to the Translation Queue), then click the LSP tab.

Note: The LSP tab is displayed only if multiple translation providers (LSPs) are configured for your team profile.

In the dropdown list, select the translation provider for this translation job.

Click the Translation tab.

In this tab, you decide to either send the selected pages to the Translation Queue, or to send them out directly for translation as a single translation job.

If multiple translation providers are configured for your team profile, then you selected the translation provider in the LSP tab of this page, as described in the previous step.
If one translation provider is configured for your team profile, then that is the translation provider to whom the Connector sends your translation job.

Select one of the following options:

Add to queue: The Connector adds the specified pages to the Translation Queue. After the pages are in the Translation Queue, either:
- You must access the Translation Queue and approve the pages you want to send out for translation. For detailed instructions, see Submitting Content for Translation from the Translation Queue.
- Your company has schedules that automatically send out translation jobs from the Translation Queue. For details, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
Send as a new job: The Connector immediately sends out the specified pages for translation as a new translation job, according to your company’s routing rules and the options you specify below.

Note: This option is available only to users with permission to send pages directly out for translation.

If you decide to send the pages out for translation, then you also specify the translation job options.

Note: The following settings are relevant and available only if you select Send as a new job, above.

Setting	Description
how to process pages	Select one of the following methods for the Connector to process the selected pages: * Add to queue: The Connector sends the selected pages to the Translation Queue. This is the default value. * Send as a new job: The Connector sends the selected pages to the translation provider specified in the LSP tab.
Content Type	You can tag the content in a translation job as a specific content type. Depending on your company’s configuration, the Content API Platform may send the content to a specific translation provider based on the content type. Select one of the following content types: * Marketing * Technical * Legal Note: You may see different content types if your company has configured custom content types.
Send for quote first	Select this check box to inform the translation provider that you want to receive a quote before the translation process starts. Note: This check box is displayed only if the selected translation provider is configured to support providing a quote before the translation process starts.
Job Name	Your name for this translation job. By default this includes the username, date, and time when you created the job, for example: Submit by [admin] @ 2016-12-20 6.57 PM. This is stored in the CQJobName attribute in the XML that the Connector sends to the translation provider.
PO Reference	Enter the purchase order reference number.
Job Description	Additional information about this job. This is stored in the CQJobDescription attribute in the XML that the Connector sends to the translation provider.
Notification Emails	Enter one or more email addresses that will receive notification when the content leaves Adobe Experience Manager and when it returns to Adobe Experience Manager. Use a comma to separate multiple email addresses.

Click Submit.

The Connector sends the translation job to the translation provider you specified. A message box at the top of the page indicates that the pages were sent to the translation provider or the Translation Queue.

For information about the events that occur when the Connector sends out content for translation, see Sending Content for Translation.

Tip: You can monitor the progress of your translation job in the Job Details tab of the Translation Status page. For details, see Monitoring Pages in a Translation Job and Viewing Translated Content.

2.4.5 - Submitting Content for Translation from the Translation Queue

The goal of the Translation Queue is to control translation costs and the translation process. This design assumes that the person with the authority to send content for translation from the Translation Queue manages the translation budget of the organization.

You can send out one, multiple, or all items from the Translation Queue at one time.

Note: Your company can create schedules that automatically send out translation jobs from the Translation Queue. For details, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

You submit content for translation from the Translation Queue in the following scenarios:

You click Add to queue in the Options page of the Bulk Translation wizard. For details, see Specifying Translation Options.

Note: You can send out pages, tags, and dictionaries (i18n items) for translation using the Bulk Translation wizard. This is the only way to send out tags and dictionaries (i18n items) for translation.

You use workflow to send content for translation. For details, see Sending Content to the Translation Queue Using Workflow).
You roll out pages in Adobe Experience Manager and your Connector is configured to “catch” these pages and send them to the Translation Queue. For details, see Sending Files to the Translation Queue When You Roll Out Files.
You click Add to Queue in the Translation tab of the Globalization Tool. For details, see Sending Pages and Assets for Translation Using the Globalization Tool.
You select Add to queue from the dropdown list at the top of the Translation tab in the Translate Content page, which opens from the Touch-Optimized UI in Adobe Experience Manager version 6.3 and higher. For details, see Sending Pages for Translation from the Touch-Optimized UI (Adobe Experience Manager version 6.3 and higher only).
You submit content from the Sidekick, either if you are using the Simple UI, or if in the Submit translation option you select Add to queue when using the wizard. For details, see Sending Pages for Translation from the Adobe Experience Manager Sidekick.
You submit content from Adobe Experience Manager’s Translation Integration Framework. For details, see Sending Content for Translation from Adobe Experience Manager Translation Integration.
Users belong to a group where they are allowed to submit content only to the Translation Queue. They are not allowed to send out content directly for translation.
The Connector is configured to automatically add published pages to the Translation Queue. For more information, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

Submitting content to the Translation Queue before sending it out for translation has the following advantages:

You may not want to send out each page individually as soon as you finish reviewing it. The Translation Queue facilitates your management of reviewed pages, so that you do not forget about sending individual reviewed pages for translation.
Your translation provider may prefer receiving fewer but larger batches of items to translate, rather than individual pages, as it facilitates project preparation, resource assignment, and file analysis.
If you want to translate many items into multiple languages, but you want to translate into only one target language at a time, this is a good way to manage that process.
The Translation Queue manager may want to route jobs to certain translation providers.
The Translation Queue manager may want to add job-specific metadata, such as a purchase order number.

If you or your colleagues have added items to the Translation Queue, you must access it and approve the items you want to send out.

Note: If you do not approve items in the Translation Queue, the Connector does not send them out for translation.

To submit one or more pages from the Translation Queue for translation:

Do one of the following to open the Translation Queue:

In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click the Tools icon and then click Lionbridge Connector in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. (This opens the Connector in a new browser tab.) Then, click Translation Queue in the Lionbridge Connector rail.
In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, scroll down and click Lionbridge Connector in the right pane. Then, click Translation Queuein the Lionbridge Connector rail.
In your Web browser, navigate to /content/ctctranslation/queue.html on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

The Translation Queue displays all the items that were sent to the queue and that have not yet been sent out for translation.

Optional. In the dropdown list boxes above the list of content items, you can filter which items are displayed in the list:

Metadata: When selected, the list displays only items with the selected Level-2 Queue Metadata analysis code. This analysis code was specified when the items were submitted to the queue from the Bulk Translation wizard.

Note: Available only when using the Content API Translation Connector for Lionbridge Freeway.

From: In the dropdown list, select how the items were submitted to the Translation Queue. The submission type is one of the following:
- Bulk Wizard: The items (including pages, i18n dictionaries, and tags) were submitted to the queue from the Bulk Translation wizard.
- Globalization Tool: The pages were submitted to the queue from the Translation tab of the Globalization Tool.
- Bulk Wizard + Globalization Tool: The items were submitted to the queue from the Bulk Translation wizard or from the Translation tab of the Globalization Tool.
- Sidekick: The pages were submitted to the queue from the Sidekick.
- Touch-Optimized UI: The pages were submitted to the queue from the Translate Content page in Adobe Experience Manager’s Touch-Optimized UI.
- Experience Manager TIF: The pages were submitted to the queue from Adobe’s Translation Integration Framework (TIF).
- Rollout Workflow Process: The pages were submitted to the queue by the CTCRolloutTranslation workflow, which is part of your company’s rollout configuration.
- Rollout Event: The pages were submitted to the queue from a rollout event, based on your company’s rollout configuration.
- Rollout (Workflow + Event): The pages were submitted to the queue by the CTCRolloutTranslation workflow, which is part of your company’s rollout configuration, or from a rollout event, based on your company’s rollout configuration.
- Publish Workflow Process: The pages were submitted to the queue by the Add Published Page to Translation Queue step in your workflow, based on your company’s Connector configuration.
- Publish Events: The pages were submitted to the queue from a publish event, based on your company’s Connector configuration.
- Publish (Workflow + Event): The pages were submitted to the queue by the Add Published Page to Translation Queue step in your workflow, based on your company’s Connector configuration, or from a publish event, based on your company’s Connector configuration.

The list automatically updates and displays only the specified items submitted to the queue with the specified method.

Type: In the dropdown list, select the type of items to display. This is one of the following:
- Pages: Web pages, Content Fragments, Experience Fragments, adaptive forms, or digital assets.
- Tags: Metadata assigned to a content item within Adobe Experience Manager (usually a page), which act as keywords or labels attached to that content item.
- i18n Dictionaries: Texts and their translations in a CQ5 Translator dictionary.
- TIF Assets: Translation files packaged and sent to the Translation Queue by Adobe’s Translation Integration Framework (TIF). These files are packaged in Adobe Experience Manager TIF’s own format.
Target: In the dropdown list, select the target language specified in the translation request. In the dropdown list, target languages for translations in the queue are displayed in black. Target languages that are set up in the system, but that are not specified in translations currently in the queue, are displayed in grey, and they are not available for selection. The list automatically updates and displays only items with the specified requested target language.

Tip: This is useful if you want to send out only items for translation to a specific target language.

The following information is displayed about items in the Translation Queue:

Column	Description
Page	The path and name of the item or fragment to send for translation. Tip: Click the link to open the page, fragment, or form in a new browser tab. The page opens in either the Touch UI or the Classic UI, depending on your company’s configuration.
Source	The language code of the source language of the item to send for translation.
Target(s)	The language codes of the target languages into which to translate the content item.
Created On	The date and time when the item was created, in the following format: MM/DD/YYYY h:mm AA, where AA is two upper-case characters reflecting a.m. (after midnight) or p.m. (after noon).
User	The username of the user who submitted this item to the Translation Queue.
Deadline	The requested date for receiving the translated item back from the translation provider, in the following format: MM/DD/YYYY.
Metadata	The Level-2 Queue Metadata analysis code specified for this item when it was added to the Translation Queue. Note: Displayed only when using the Content API Translation Connector for Lionbridge Freeway.
Content In Target	Indicates whether the Select if using Blueprint/Live-copy option is specified for this item (relevant only to page items). This option is relevant when the target pages are MSM (Multi Site Manager) live copy pages, which means that Adobe Experience Manager automatically updates a target page when the corresponding source page changes. It prevents the Connector from overwriting unique source content that already exists in the target pages. If this column has a value of Yes, the Connector does not overwrite unique source content that already exists in the target pages. If this column is blank, the Connector does overwrite unique source content that already exists in the target pages.
Translate Locked	Indicates whether the Translate Locked Content/Only translate content from locked components option is specified for this item (relevant only to page items). This option enables users to send out only content from locked components for translation. If this column has a value of Yes, users can send out content for translation only if it is from a locked component. If this column is blank, users can send out content for translation whether or not it is from a locked component. Note about Blueprint pages: If the Pickup Content From Blueprint Pages setting is specified, then the Connector always acts as though this option is selected, even if it is not selected. This occurs because only content from locked components are rolled out from Blueprint pages to Livecopy pages. For more information, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
Translate Not-Sync’d	Indicates whether the Translate Non-Sync’d Components/Allow translated content from not-sync’d components option is specified for this item (relevant only to page items). This option enables users to send content for translation even if it is not synchronized. This means it does not have a relationship to a Blueprint page, so it cannot be synchronized with it. This can happen if you are not using the MSM (Multi Site Manager) feature of Adobe Experience Manager, or if this is a page with regionalized content that does not inherit content from a Blueprint page. If this column has a value of Yes, users can send out content for translation if it does not have a relationship to a Blueprint page. If this column is blank, users cannot send out content for translation if it does not have a relationship to a Blueprint page. Note about Blueprint pages: If the Pickup Content From Blueprint Pages setting is specified, then the Connector always acts as though this option is selected, even when it is not. This occurs because only content from locked components is rolled out from Blueprint pages to Livecopy pages. For more information, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
Leave Unlocked	Indicates whether the Unlock When Done/Unlock the component after translated content come back option is specified for this item (relevant only to page items). This option automatically unlocks a component after translated content returns. If this column has a value of Yes, the Connector automatically unlocks a component after translated content returns. If this column is blank, the Connector does not automatically unlock a component after translated content returns.
Translate Page Content	Indicates whether to translate regular content fields in this content item. Important: To send out words on pages for translation, this column must display Yes.
Translate Metadata	Indicates whether to translate metadata fields in this content item. The metadata fields are configured in the Page Metadata Configuration section of the Advanced Settings page. For details, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
Use Local TM	Indicates whether the Use Local TM option is specified for this item. This feature determines whether to check each component in the source version of the item for any content changes, and send only changed components out for translation. If a component was previously translated and it has not changed, then the Connector does not send it for translation again: Instead, it uses the stored translation. This feature reduces the quantity of content that the Connector sends to translation providers, which reduces your cost. However, it needs the Connector translation backup data, and it increases the Connector processing time before sending out the items for translation. If this column has a value of Yes, the Connector checks whether content was already translated before sending it out for translation. If this column is blank, the Connector sends out content for translation without checking whether it has already been translated.
Words	The number of words in the file to translate. This does not include any words that were already translated if the Use Local TM check box is selected. That word count is displayed in the Use Local TM column, described above. Note: The number of words in digital assets, such as JPG or PDF files, is not displayed.
Counted	Indicates whether the Connector counted the words in this content item. This is one of the following: 1: The Connector counted the words in this content item. 0: The Connector did not count the words in this content item.

Tip: To filter items by the values in the Page, Source, Target(s), Created On, or User columns, enter text in the text boxes at the top of the columns. The queue automatically displays only items that match the values in the text boxes.

Optional. Select the check boxes of the items to send out for translation. The Connector will send out these items for translation as a single translation job. This step is required only if you do not want to send out all the items for translation.

Note about team profiles: If one or more paths are configured for your team profile, you can select only pages that are in these paths for translation. The path configuration does not restrict your selection of digital assets, tags, and dictionaries (i18n items).

Below the list of content items, in the Translation Job tab, enter the following settings:

Setting	Description
Content Type	You can tag the content in a translation job as a specific content type. Depending on your company’s configuration, the Content API Platform may send the content to a specific translation provider based on the content type. Select one of the following content types: Marketing Technical Legal Note: You may see different content types if your company has configured custom content types.
Choose LSP	If multiple translation providers are configured for your team profile, select the translation provider to whom you want to send this translation job. If you select Lionbridge Freeway, the following additional Freeway-specific fields are displayed:
Special Instruction	Any additional instructions for Freeway, which are sent as metadata. Available only if the selected translation provider in the Choose LSP box, above, is the Lionbridge Freeway Type.
Analysis Code	The Freeway analysis codes for the translation. Displayed only if: In the Choose LSP box, above, the selected provider is the Lionbridge Freeway Type. The Connector is configured to display these fields. You specify the analysis codes that are relevant to your content. Your Lionbridge setup determines which analysis codes are available for you to specify, and the values available for selection for each analysis code. For example, the Region, Department, and Priority analysis codes may be available for you to specify.
Translation Quote	Select this check box to inform the translation provider that you want to receive a quote before the translation process starts. Note: This check box is displayed only if the selected translation provider is configured to support providing a quote before the translation process starts.
Job Name	Your name for this translation job. By default this includes the username, date, and time when you created the job, for example: Submit by [admin] @ 2016-12-20 6.57 PM. This is stored in the CQJobName attribute in the XML that the Connector sends to the translation provider.
PO Reference	Enter the purchase order reference number.
Job Description	Additional information about this job. This is stored in the CQJobDescription attribute in the XML that the Connector sends to the translation provider.
Notification Emails	Enter one or more email addresses that will receive notification when the content leaves Adobe Experience Manager and when it returns to Adobe Experience Manager. Use a comma to separate multiple email addresses.
In-country Reviewer	Optional. This is generally the name of the localization reviewer, which is stored in the InCountryReviewer attribute in the XML sent to the translation provider. By default, this field is hidden.

Optional. Click the Reference Files tab to open it. You can send reference files (support assets) to your translation provider as part of a translation job. This provides helpful context for the translator.

For instructions on adding reference files in Adobe Experience Manager, refer to the Adobe Experience Manager documentation for uploading digital assets:

Note: This feature is available only if the Allow Reference Files for Translation Job check box is selected in the UI and Default Settings section of the Configuration page. For detailed instructions, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

a. Click the down arrow and navigate to the reference file or folder containing reference files. b. Select the reference file or folder containing reference files and click Select. c. Repeat the previous steps for each reference file or folder containing reference files that you want to include.

The Connector will send all specified files and all files in the specified folders to the translation provider.

Optional. Click the Overwrite options tab to open it. You can overwrite translation settings that were specified when the items were originally submitted to the Translation Queue. Some of the settings described below may not be available, depending on your company’s configuration.

a. In the Overwrite section, if you want to overwrite any translation settings for the items to send out for translation, select this check box. b. In the Overwrite section, select or clear the check boxes for the individual settings, as described below.

Translation Setting	Description
Translate field	Indicates whether to translate regular content fields in this content item. Important: To send out words on pages for translation, you must select this check box.
Translate metadata	Select this check box to send out for translation metadata fields that are defined in the Page Metadata Configuration section of the Advanced Settings page. These are properties under the /jcr:content node.
Select if using Blueprint/Live-copy	This option is relevant when the target pages are MSM (Multi Site Manager) live copy pages, which means that Adobe Experience Manager automatically updates a target page when the corresponding source page changes. It prevents the Connector from overwriting unique source content that already exists in the target pages. If this column has a value of Yes, the Connector does not overwrite unique source content that already exists in the target pages. If this column is blank, the Connector does overwrite unique source content that already exists in the target pages Relevant only to page items.
Only translate content in locked components	See the description of Translate Locked, above. Relevant only to page items.
Leave component unlock after putting back translated content	See the description of Leave Unlock, above. Relevant only to page items.
Allow translate content from Not-Sync’d components	See the description of Translate Not-Sync’d, above. Relevant only to page items.
Deadline	The requested date for receiving the translated content back from the translation provider. Click in the field and select a date in the calendar that opens.
Use Local TM	See the description of Use Local TM, above.
Notes	Enter any additional information about this translation job. This information is sent to the translation provider as a comment in the metadata of the translation package.

Send out the items to the translation provider from the Translation Job tab. If necessary, click that tab again to open it. Do one of the following:
- To send all items in the Translation Queue to the translation provider, click Send out all pages for translation.
- To send the selected items in the Translation Queue to the translation provider, click Send out checked pages for translation.

A message box opens, confirming that you want to send the files for translation.

Click OK.

The Connector starts preparing to send the files for translation. The Job Details tab of the Translation Status page opens, where you can monitor the progress. For details, see Monitoring Pages in a Translation Job and Viewing Translated Content.

For information about the events that occur when the Connector sends out content for translation, see Sending Content for Translation.

2.4.6 - Preparing to Send Content for Translation from Adobe Experience Manager Translation Integration

Before you can send content for translation from the Adobe Experience Manager translation integration, you must specify the following configurations for the site to translate:

The translation integration configuration contains the Adobe Experience Manager settings for how to translate your content.
The Connector cloud configuration contains a set of Connector settings.

You must also create a translation project within Adobe Experience Manager.

To prepare the site for translation:

In the Adobe Experience Manager rail, click Sites, and navigate to the site to translate.
Select the site, and then select More > View Properties from the menu.
In the top-left corner, click Edit.
Click the Cloud Services tab.
In the Translation Integration section, select the appropriate translation integration configuration for the Connector. These are the Adobe Experience Manager settings for how to translate your content. For more information, contact your system administrator or refer to “Creating a Translation Integration Configuration for the Connector” in the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
In the Lionbridge section, select the appropriate Connector cloud configuration. Each configuration contains a set of Connector settings. For more information, contact your system administrator or refer to “Creating an Adobe Experience Manager Cloud Configuration for the Connector” and “Editing Connector Cloud Configuration Settings” in the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

Note: If the Lionbridge section does not exist, you can create it by clicking Add Configuration and then selecting Lionbridge from the list.

Click Done.
You create a translation project from Adobe Experience Manager’s Sites console. You can create a project either for a new language copy or to update an existing language copy. For detailed instructions, refer to “Creating Translation Projects Using the References Panel” in the Adobe Experience Manager documentation:

2.4.7 - Resending a Translation Job

You can send previously sent jobs for translation from the Status tab of the Translation Status page. You can modify the content items, source and target languages, translation provider, translation options, and job options before resending the job. You can also specify an LSP-specific configuration for the job to resend.

To resend a translation job:

Do one of the following to open the Status tab of Translation Status page:

In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click the Tools icon and then click Lionbridge Connector in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. (This opens the Connector in a new browser tab.) Then, click Translation Status in the Lionbridge Connector rail.
In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, scroll down and click Lionbridge Connector in the right pane. Then, click Translation Status in the Lionbridge Connector rail.
In your Web browser, navigate to /content/ctctranslation/status.html on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

For a detailed description of this page, see Monitoring Jobs.

In the Job column, locate the translation job to resend, and click the Re-Send button .

The Content and Languages tab of the Re-send translation job dialog box opens.

This tab displays a list of all content items that were sent for translation in the previous job, including the corresponding source and target languages. By default, all content items are selected for inclusion in the new job.

Optional. Clear the check box boxes of any content items to exclude from the new translation job.
Optional. Click the Re-Select Languages tab to open it.

This tab enables you to change the source and target languages of the translation job.

a If you want to change the source and/or target languages of the job, select the Reset source and target languages check box. b Optional. If you want to change the source language of the content items to send out for translation, then in the Select source language dropdown list, select the new source language. c Optional. If you want to change the target languages into which the content items are translated, then in Translate into the following target languages section, select the check boxes of the new target languages.

Optional. Click the LSP and Options tab to open it.

This tab displays the translation provider (LSP) and translation options from the previously sent job. Modify any of the following translation options:

Option	Description
Use Local TM	This feature determines whether to check each component in the source version of the item for any content changes, and send only changed components out for translation. If a component was previously translated and it has not changed, then the Connector does not send it for translation again: Instead, it uses the stored translation. This feature reduces the quantity of content that the Connector sends to translation providers, which reduces your cost. However, it needs the Connector translation backup data, and it increases the Connector processing time before sending out the items for translation. * If this check box is selected, the Connector checks whether content was already translated before sending it out for translation. * If this check box is cleared, the Connector sends out content for translation without checking whether it has already been translated. Note about i18n dictionary items: If this check box is selected, the Connector sends only previously untranslated i18n dictionary items for translation. If this check box is cleared, the Connector sends all i18n items for translation.
Select if using Blueprint/Live-copy	This option is relevant when the target pages are MSM (Multi Site Manager) live copy pages, which means that Adobe Experience Manager automatically updates a target page when the corresponding source page changes. It prevents the Connector from overwriting unique source content that already exists in the target pages. This is useful when you are sending a page for translation that has been used in the past to push content to other pages, and includes target page content which has been changed, for example, regionalized. In this scenario you do not want to overwrite the regionalized content as the translation process occurs. Select this option when you do not want the Connector to overwrite components in the target pages that include regionalized content with the newly translated content. * If this check box is selected, the Connector does not overwrite unique source content that already exists in the target pages. * If this check box is cleared, the Connector does overwrite unique source content that already exists in the target pages. Recommendation: Select this check box if you are using the live-copy feature. Note: This option is available only if Pages is selected in the Item Type page of the wizard.
Only translate content from locked components	This option enables users to send out only content from locked components for translation. * If this check box is selected, users can send out content for translation only if it is from a locked component. * If this check box is cleared, users can send out content for translation whether or not it is from a locked component. Note: Locked components have an inheritance relationship between a source Blueprint page and the connected live copy page. When sending content for translation using Sidekick, users can choose whether to send for translation the content from locked components, which is inherited from a Blueprint component. This is useful if, for example, the page has both global and regional information and you only want to translate (replace) the global content that is created via a Blueprint page. In this scenario, suppose that the regional content on the page is manually translated in house, and that it has not changed. You would not want to tamper with it. However, using the same scenario, the global content from head office has changed and needs translation. You would select this check box to separate the content and localize only the new, inherited content. Note about Blueprint pages: If the Pickup Content From Blueprint Pages setting is specified, then the Connector always acts as though this option is selected, even if it is not selected. This occurs because only content from locked components are rolled out from Blueprint pages to Livecopy pages. For more information, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide. Note: This option is available only if Pages is selected in the Item Type page of the wizard.
Unlock the component after translated content come back	This option automatically unlocks a component after translated content returns. This option is relevant only when the Select if using Blueprint/Live-copy is been selected. After translated content returns, it automatically unlocks a component, which breaks the MSM inheritance. Warning: This breaks the inheritance between the component and its Blueprint page, so that it no longer inherits new content. However, you can use the CTCRestoreOriginalSync workflow to relock the component and recreate the inheritance. For details, see Relocking Unlocked Components. * If this check box is selected, the Connector automatically unlocks a component after translated content returns. * If this check box is cleared, the Connector does not automatically unlock a component after translated content returns. Note: This option is available only if Pages is selected in the Item Type page of the wizard.
Allow translate content from Not-Sync components	This option enables users to send content for translation even if it is not synchronized. This means it does not have a relationship to a Blueprint page, so it cannot be synchronized with it. This can happen if you are not using the MSM (Multi Site Manager) feature of Adobe Experience Manager, or if this is a page with regionalized content that does not inherit content from a Blueprint page. * If this check box is selected, users can send out content for translation if it does not have a relationship to a Blueprint page. * If this check box is cleared, users cannot send out content for translation if it does not have a relationship to a Blueprint page. Important: The Connector treats certain page properties (`jcr:content`, `jcr:title`, `jcr:description`) as unlocked page properties. Therefore, if you want the Connector to send these page properties for translation, you must select this check box. Recommendation: Select this check box if you are using either the live-copy or the language-copy features. Note about Blueprint pages: If the Pickup Content From Blueprint Pages setting is specified, then the Connector always acts as though this option is selected, even when it is not. This occurs because only content from locked components is rolled out from Blueprint pages to Livecopy pages. For more information, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide. Note: This option is available only if Pages is selected in the Item Type page of the wizard.
Translate page content	Indicates whether to translate regular content fields in this content item. Important: To send out words on pages for translation, you must select this check box. Note: This option is available only if Pages is selected in the Item Type page of the wizard.
Translate Metadata	Select this check box to send out for translation metadata fields that are defined in the Page Metadata Configuration section of the Advanced Settings page. These are properties under the /jcr:content node. Note: This option is available only if Pages is selected in the Item Type page of the wizard.
Queue Metadata	You can select the Level-2 Queue Metadata analysis code for these content items. If you add these items to the Translation Queue, you can filter and sort items there by this analysis code. Note: Available only when using the Content API Translation Connector for Lionbridge Freeway. Displayed only when the Use Analysis Codes as Queue Metadata check box is selected in the Freeway Config section of the Configuration page. For details, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

Optional. To change the translation provider (LSP), select it in the Choose LSP dropdown list. Depending on the translation provider you select, additional fields may be displayed. For example:

If you select the SDL TMS translation provider, then the TMS Config field is displayed. Select an SDL TMS configuration that was defined in the TMS GUID Config page. For details, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide. In the second dropdown list, select your SDL TMS profile.
If you select the Lionbridge Freeway translation provider, the following additional fields are displayed:

Field

Description

Special Instruction

Any additional instructions for Freeway, which are sent as metadata. Available only if the selected translation provider in the Choose LSP box, above, is the Lionbridge Freeway Type.

Analysis Code

The Freeway analysis codes for the translation. Displayed only if:

* In the **Choose LSP** box, above, the selected provider is the Lionbridge Freeway Type.
* The Connector is configured to display these fields.

You specify the analysis codes that are relevant to your content. Your Lionbridge setup determines which analysis codes are available for you to specify, and the values available for selection for each analysis code. For example, the Region, Department, and Priority analysis codes may be available for you to specify.

Click the Translation Job tab to open it.

You use this tab to specify the following job settings:

Option	Description
Job name	Your name for this translation job. By default this is [Resend] and the name of the previously sent translation job. This is stored in the CQJobName attribute in the XML that the Connector sends to the translation provider.
Job description	Additional information about this job. This is stored in the CQJobDescription attribute in the XML that the Connector sends to the translation provider.
PO Reference	Enter the purchase order reference number.
Content Type	You can tag the content in a translation job as a specific content type. Depending on your company’s configuration, the Content API Platform may send the content to a specific translation provider based on the content type. Select one of the following content types: * Marketing * Technical * Legal Note: You may see different content types if your company has configured custom content types.
Deadline	The date you are requesting for the translated content to return. Click in the field and select a date in the calendar that opens. This information is sent to the translation provider as metadata of the translation package. Recommendation: Discuss whether to use this feature with your translation provider(s).
Quote	Select this check box to inform the translation provider that you want to receive a quote before the translation process starts. Note: This check box is displayed only if the selected translation provider is configured to support providing a quote before the translation process starts.
Reference Files	You can send reference files (support assets) to your translation provider as part of a translation job. This provides helpful context for the translator. For instructions on adding reference files in Adobe Experience Manager, refer to the Adobe Experience Manager documentation for uploading digital assets: * version 6.2: https://helpx.adobe.com/experience-manager/6-2/assets/using/managing-assets-touch-ui.html * version 6.3: https://helpx.adobe.com/experience-manager/6-3/assets/using/managing-assets-touch-ui.html * version 6.4: https://helpx.adobe.com/experience-manager/6-4/assets/using/managing-assets-touch-ui.html * version 6.5: https://helpx.adobe.com/experience-manager/6-5/assets/using/managing-assets-touch-ui.html Note: This feature is available only if the Allow Reference Files for Translation Job check box is selected in the UI and Default Settings section of the Configuration page. For detailed instructions, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide. ##### To add a reference file to the Connector: 1. Click the down arrow and navigate to the reference file or folder containing reference files. 2. Select the reference file or folder containing reference files and click Select. 3. Repeat the previous steps for each reference file or folder containing reference files that you want to include. The Connector will send all specified files and all files in the specified folders to the translation provider.
Translation Notes	Enter any additional information about this translation job. This information is sent to the translation provider as a comment in the metadata of the translation package.
Notification Emails	Enter one or more email addresses that will receive notification when the content leaves Adobe Experience Manager and when it returns to Adobe Experience Manager. Use a comma to separate multiple email addresses.
In-country Reviewer	Optional. This is generally the name of the localization reviewer, which is stored in the InCountryReviewer attribute in the XML sent to the translation provider. By default, this field is hidden.

Click Send.

The Connector submits the job.

2.4.8 - Sending Content for Translation from Adobe Experience Manager Translation Integration

When you use the Adobe Experience Manager Translation Integration feature, you send out the content for translation as a translation job from a translation project in Adobe Experience Manager’s Projects console.

From the Adobe Experience Manager rail, click Projects.
Click the translation project.
On the project’s Translation Job tile, click the commands menu in the top-right corner, and then Start to start the translation job.

If the Connector cloud configuration for the translation project sends content to the Translation Queue, then after the content is in the queue, either:

You must access the Translation Queue and approve the pages you want to send out for translation. For detailed instructions, see Submitting Content for Translation from the Translation Queue.
Your company has schedules that automatically send out translation jobs from the Translation Queue. For details, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

For more information, refer to “Starting a Translation Job” in the Adobe Experience Manager documentation:

Note: When sending out content for translation from Adobe Experience Manager’s translation integration feature, the Connector does not support Adobe Experience Manager’s Request Scope feature, which is described in the “Scoping a Translation Job” section of the Adobe Experience Manager documentation at the above link.

Note about canceling translation jobs from Adobe Experience Manager’s translation integration feature: If you cancel a job that you sent to the Translation Queue, then the Connector deletes it from the queue. If you cancel a job that you sent directly out for translation, then Adobe Experience Manager attempts to cancel the job. The job’s status changes to Cancel.

2.4.9 - Sending Pages for Translation from Adobe Experience Manager Sidekick

Note: This section is only applicable for the users who are using AEM on-premise version older than AEM 6.4.

If you are using the Adobe Experience Manager Classic UI, you can send individual pages of content for translation directly from the Adobe Experience Manager Sidekick.

Tip: This method is ideal for ad-hoc translations or for sending small amounts of content for translation.

Note: If one or more paths are configured for your team profile, you can send only pages that are in those paths for translation.

To sending pages for translation from Sidekick:

Double-click a page to open it with Sidekick, which is a floating toolbar.
In Sidekick, click the Page tab .
In the Page tab, scroll down and click the Translate Content option.

The Connector’s Sidekick translation request interface opens. One of four possible Sidekick user interfaces is displayed, depending on your company’s configuration: there are two single-page (simple) interfaces and two multiple-page (wizard) interfaces.

Use the following table to determine which user interface is displayed for your company:

Submit button/Next button	Multiple Check Boxes Are Displayed for Advanced Translation Options	For detailed instructions, see…
Submit button	no	Sidekick - Simple UI
Submit button	yes	Sidekick - Simple UI with Options
Next button	no	Sidekick - Wizard
Next button	yes	Sidekick - Wizard with Options

2.4.9.1 - Sidekick - Simple UI

You use this interface to submit content to the Translation Queue only.

Enter the following information about the translation options:

Option	Description
Translation scope	Determine the scope of the pages to send for translation. This is one of the following: * Current page: The Connector sends the current page for translation. * All sub pages: The Connector sends all the sub-pages for translation. It does not send the current page. * Current page and all sub pages: The Connector sends the current page and all its sub-pages for translation.
Source language	Select the source language to send for translation.
Target language(s)	Select one or more target languages to send for translation. The list displays all the languages that are set up in Adobe Experience Manager for your team.

Click Submit to send the content to the Translation Queue.

A message box opens, confirming that the page or pages have been added to the queue.

Click OK to close the message box.

After the content is in the Translation Queue, either:

You must access the Translation Queue and approve the pages you want to send out for translation. For detailed instructions, see Submitting Content for Translation from the Translation Queue.
Your company has schedules that automatically send out translation jobs from the Translation Queue. For details, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

2.4.9.2 - Sidekick - Simple UI with Options

Sidekick - Simple UI with Options

You use this interface to submit content to the Translation Queue only.

Enter the following information about the translation options:

Option	Description
Translation scope	Determine the scope of the pages to send for translation. This is one of the following: * Current page: The Connector sends the current page for translation. * All sub pages: The Connector sends all the sub-pages for translation. It does not send the current page. * Current page and all sub pages: The Connector sends the current page and all its sub-pages for translation.
Source language	Select the source language to send for translation.
Target language(s)	Select one or more target languages to send for translation. The list displays all the languages that are set up in Adobe Experience Manager for your team.
Select if using Blueprint/Live-copy	This option is relevant when the target pages are MSM (Multi Site Manager) live copy pages, which means that Adobe Experience Manager automatically updates a target page when the corresponding source page changes. It prevents the Connector from overwriting unique source content that already exists in the target pages. This is useful when you are sending a page for translation that has been used in the past to push content to other pages, and includes target page content which has been changed, for example, regionalized. In this scenario you do not want to overwrite the regionalized content as the translation process occurs. Select this option when you do not want the Connector to overwrite components in the target pages that include regionalized content with the newly translated content. * If this check box is selected, the Connector does not overwrite unique source content that already exists in the target pages. * If this check box is cleared, the Connector does overwrite unique source content that already exists in the target pages. Recommendation: Select this check box if you are using the live-copy feature.
Translate Locked Content	This option enables users to send out only content from locked components for translation. * If this check box is selected, users can send out content for translation only if it is from a locked component. * If this check box is cleared, users can send out content for translation whether or not it is from a locked component. Note: Locked components have an inheritance relationship between a source Blueprint page and the connected live copy page. When sending content for translation using Sidekick, users can choose whether to send for translation the content from locked components, which is inherited from a Blueprint component. This is useful if, for example, the page has both global and regional information and you only want to translate (replace) the global content that is created via a Blueprint page. In this scenario, suppose that the regional content on the page is manually translated in house, and that it has not changed. You would not want to tamper with it. However, using the same scenario, the global content from head office has changed and needs translation. You would select this check box to separate the content and localize only the new, inherited content. Note about Blueprint pages: If the Pickup Content From Blueprint Pages setting is specified, then the Connector always acts as though this option is selected, even if it is not selected. This occurs because only content from locked components are rolled out from Blueprint pages to Livecopy pages. For more information, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
Unlock When Done	This option automatically unlocks a component after translated content returns. This option is relevant only when the Select if using Blueprint/Live-copy is been selected. After translated content returns, it automatically unlocks a component, which breaks the MSM inheritance. Warning: This breaks the inheritance between the component and its Blueprint page, so that it no longer inherits new content. However, you can use the CTCRestoreOriginalSync workflow to relock the component and recreate the inheritance. For details, see Relocking Unlocked Components. * If this check box is selected, the Connector automatically unlocks a component after translated content returns. * If this check box is cleared, the Connector does not automatically unlock a component after translated content returns.
Translate Non-Sync’d Components on this page	This option enables users to send content for translation even if it is not synchronized. This means it does not have a relationship to a Blueprint page, so it cannot be synchronized with it. This can happen if you are not using the MSM (Multi Site Manager) feature of Adobe Experience Manager, or if this is a page with regionalized content that does not inherit content from a Blueprint page. * If this check box is selected, users can send out content for translation if it does not have a relationship to a Blueprint page. * If this check box is cleared, users cannot send out content for translation if it does not have a relationship to a Blueprint page. Important: The Connector treats certain page properties (`jcr:content`, `jcr:title`, `jcr:description`) as unlocked page properties. Therefore, if you want the Connector to send these page properties for translation, you must select this check box. Recommendation: Select this check box if you are using either the live-copy or the language-copy features. Note about Blueprint pages: If the Pickup Content From Blueprint Pages setting is specified, then the Connector always acts as though this option is selected, even when it is not. This occurs because only content from locked components is rolled out from Blueprint pages to Livecopy pages. For more information, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
Use local TM	This feature determines whether to check each component in the source version of the item for any content changes, and send only changed components out for translation. If a component was previously translated and it has not changed, then the Connector does not send it for translation again: Instead, it uses the stored translation. This feature reduces the quantity of content that the Connector sends to translation providers, which reduces your cost. However, it needs the Connector translation backup data, and it increases the Connector processing time before sending out the items for translation. * If this check box is selected, the Connector checks whether content was already translated before sending it out for translation. * If this check box is cleared, the Connector sends out content for translation without checking whether it has already been translated.

Note: Your company’s Connector configuration determines the default settings of these last five options. For more information, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

Click Submit to send the content to the Translation Queue.

A message box opens, confirming that the page or pages have been added to the queue.

Click OK to close the message box.

After the content is in the Translation Queue, either:

You must access the Translation Queue and approve the pages you want to send out for translation. For detailed instructions, see Submitting Content for Translation from the Translation Queue.
Your company has schedules that automatically send out translation jobs from the Translation Queue. For details, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

2.4.9.3 - Sidekick - Wizard

You use this interface to submit content to the Translation Queue or directly for translation.

Note: Depending on your user permissions or your company configuration, you may not be able to send out content directly for translation.

Enter the following information about the translation options:

Option	Description
Translation scope	Determine the scope of the pages to send for translation. This is one of the following: * Current page: The Connector sends the current page for translation. * All sub pages: The Connector sends all the sub-pages for translation. It does not send the current page. * Current page and all sub pages: The Connector sends the current page and all its sub-pages for translation.
Source language	Select the source language to send for translation.
Target language(s)	Select one or more target languages to send for translation. The list displays all the languages that are set up in Adobe Experience Manager for your team.

Click Next.

The second page of the wizard opens.

The following options are available:

Option	Description
Source language	The source language you selected in the previous page of the wizard. Read-only. To change this value, click Back.
Target languages	The target languages, including the number of target languages, you selected in the previous page of the wizard. Read-only. To change this value, click Back.
Deadline	The requested translation deadline. This is the date when you expect the translated content to return. Click in the field and select a date in the calendar that opens. This information is sent to the translation provider as metadata of the translation package. Recommendation: Discuss with your translation provider whether to use the information in this field.
Page Path/Status	This list displays the path and the name of all pages you are sending for translation.
Queue Metadata	You can select the Level-2 Queue Metadata analysis code for these content items. If you add these items to the Translation Queue, you can filter and sort items there by this analysis code. Note: Available only when using the Content API Translation Connector for Lionbridge Freeway. Displayed only when the Use Analysis Codes as Queue Metadata check box is selected in the Freeway Config section of the Configuration page. For details, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
Submit Translation	Indicate where to submit the specified pages for translation. This is one of the following: * Add to queue: The Connector adds the specified pages to the Translation Queue. After the content is in the Translation Queue, either: * You must access the Translation Queue and approve the pages you want to send out for translation. For detailed instructions, see Submitting Content for Translation from the Translation Queue. * Your company has schedules that automatically send out translation jobs from the Translation Queue. For details, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide. * Send as a new job: The Connector immediately sends out the specified pages for translation as a new translation job, according to your company’s routing rules and the options you specify below. Note: This option is available only to users with permission to send pages directly out for translation.
Reference Files	You can send reference files (support assets) to your translation provider as part of a translation job. This provides helpful context for the translator. For instructions on adding reference files in Adobe Experience Manager, refer to the Adobe Experience Manager documentation for uploading digital assets: * version 6.2: https://helpx.adobe.com/experience-manager/6-2/assets/using/managing-assets-touch-ui.html * version 6.3: https://helpx.adobe.com/experience-manager/6-3/assets/using/managing-assets-touch-ui.html * version 6.4: https://helpx.adobe.com/experience-manager/6-4/assets/using/managing-assets-touch-ui.html * version 6.5: https://helpx.adobe.com/experience-manager/6-5/assets/using/managing-assets-touch-ui.html Note: This feature is available only if the Allow Reference Files for Translation Job check box is selected in the UI and Default Settings section of the Configuration page. For detailed instructions, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide. ##### To add a reference file to the Connector: 1. Click the Search icon and navigate to the reference file or folder containing reference files. 2. Select the reference file or folder and click OK. The path you selected is displayed in the text box below. 1. Repeat the previous steps for each reference file or folder containing reference files that you want to send to Freeway. The Connector will send all files in the specified paths to Freeway. Note: Displayed only if you select Lionbridge Freeway as the translation provider (LSP) in the Choose LSP field below.
Job Name	Your name for this translation job. This information is sent to your translation provider. Required and relevant only when Send as a new job is selected in the Submit Translation field, above.
Job Description	Your description for the translation job. This information is sent to your translation provider. Required and relevant only when Send as a new job is selected in the Submit Translation field, above.
Notification Emails	Enter one or more email addresses that will receive notification when the content leaves Adobe Experience Manager and when it returns to Adobe Experience Manager. Use a comma to separate multiple email addresses. Required and relevant only when Send as a new job is selected in the Submit Translation field, above.
In-country Reviewer	Optional. This is generally the name of the localization reviewer, which is stored in the InCountryReviewer attribute in the XML sent to the translation provider. By default, this field is hidden. Required and relevant only when Send as a new job is selected in the Submit Translation field, above.
Content Type	You can tag the content in a translation job as a specific content type. Depending on your company’s configuration, the Content API Platform may send the content to a specific translation provider based on the content type. Select one of the following content types: * Marketing * Technical * Legal Note: You may see different content types if your company has configured custom content types. Required and relevant only when Send as a new job is selected in the Submit Translation field, above.
Choose LSP	Select the translation provider for your translation job. Your Connector administrator specifies the default translation provider. Required and relevant only when Send as a new job is selected in the Submit Translation field, above.
Special Instruction	Any additional instructions for Freeway. Note: Displayed only if the selected translation provider in the Choose LSP box, above, is the Lionbridge Freeway Type.
Freeway Analysis Codes	The Freeway analysis codes for the translation. Displayed only if: * In the Choose LSP box, above, the selected provider is the Lionbridge Freeway Type. * The Connector is configured to display these fields. You specify the analysis codes that are relevant to your content. Your Lionbridge setup determines which analysis codes are available for you to specify, and the values available for selection for each analysis code. For example, the Region, Department, and Priority analysis codes may be available for you to specify.

Click Submit to submit the specified pages either to the Translation Queue or directly to translation, as you indicated above.
If you submitted the pages directly for translation, a message box opens, confirming that you want to send out the translation job. Click OK to proceed.
The wizard page displays a green box in the Status column, indicating that the translation submission was successful.
Click Close to close the wizard.

For information about the events that occur when the Connector sends out content for translation, see Sending Content for Translation.

Tip: You can monitor the translation progress from within the Connector. For detailed instructions, see Monitoring Translation Status and Jobs and Viewing Translated Content.

2.4.9.4 - Sidekick - Wizard with Options

You use this interface to submit content to the Translation Queue or directly for translation.

Note: Depending on your user permissions or your company configuration, you may not be able to send out content directly for translation.

Enter the following information about the translation options:

Option	Description
Translation scope	Determine the scope of the pages to send for translation. This is one of the following: * Current page: The Connector sends the current page for translation. * All sub pages: The Connector sends all the sub-pages for translation. It does not send the current page. * Current page and all sub pages: The Connector sends the current page and all its sub-pages for translation.
Source language	Select the source language to send for translation.
Target language(s)	Select one or more target languages to send for translation. The list displays all the languages that are set up in Adobe Experience Manager for your team.
Select if using Blueprint/Live-copy	This option is relevant when the target pages are MSM (Multi Site Manager) live copy pages, which means that Adobe Experience Manager automatically updates a target page when the corresponding source page changes. It prevents the Connector from overwriting unique source content that already exists in the target pages. This is useful when you are sending a page for translation that has been used in the past to push content to other pages, and includes target page content which has been changed, for example, regionalized. In this scenario you do not want to overwrite the regionalized content as the translation process occurs. Select this option when you do not want the Connector to overwrite components in the target pages that include regionalized content with the newly translated content. * If this check box is selected, the Connector does not overwrite unique source content that already exists in the target pages. * If this check box is cleared, the Connector does overwrite unique source content that already exists in the target pages. Recommendation: Select this check box if you are using the live-copy feature.
Translate Locked Content	This option enables users to send out only content from locked components for translation. * If this check box is selected, users can send out content for translation only if it is from a locked component. * If this check box is cleared, users can send out content for translation whether or not it is from a locked component. Note: Locked components have an inheritance relationship between a source Blueprint page and the connected live copy page. When sending content for translation using Sidekick, users can choose whether to send for translation the content from locked components, which is inherited from a Blueprint component. This is useful if, for example, the page has both global and regional information and you only want to translate (replace) the global content that is created via a Blueprint page. In this scenario, suppose that the regional content on the page is manually translated in house, and that it has not changed. You would not want to tamper with it. However, using the same scenario, the global content from head office has changed and needs translation. You would select this check box to separate the content and localize only the new, inherited content. Note about Blueprint pages: If the Pickup Content From Blueprint Pages setting is specified, then the Connector always acts as though this option is selected, even if it is not selected. This occurs because only content from locked components are rolled out from Blueprint pages to Livecopy pages. For more information, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
Unlock When Done	This option automatically unlocks a component after translated content returns. This option is relevant only when the Select if using Blueprint/Live-copy is been selected. After translated content returns, it automatically unlocks a component, which breaks the MSM inheritance. Warning: This breaks the inheritance between the component and its Blueprint page, so that it no longer inherits new content. However, you can use the CTCRestoreOriginalSync workflow to relock the component and recreate the inheritance. For details, see Relocking Unlocked Components. * If this check box is selected, the Connector automatically unlocks a component after translated content returns. * If this check box is cleared, the Connector does not automatically unlock a component after translated content returns.
Translate Non-Sync’d Components on this page	This option enables users to send content for translation even if it is not synchronized. This means it does not have a relationship to a Blueprint page, so it cannot be synchronized with it. This can happen if you are not using the MSM (Multi Site Manager) feature of Adobe Experience Manager, or if this is a page with regionalized content that does not inherit content from a Blueprint page. * If this check box is selected, users can send out content for translation if it does not have a relationship to a Blueprint page. * If this check box is cleared, users cannot send out content for translation if it does not have a relationship to a Blueprint page. Important: The Connector treats certain page properties (`jcr:content`, `jcr:title`, `jcr:description`) as unlocked page properties. Therefore, if you want the Connector to send these page properties for translation, you must select this check box. Recommendation: Select this check box if you are using either the live-copy or the language-copy features. Note about Blueprint pages: If the Pickup Content From Blueprint Pages setting is specified, then the Connector always acts as though this option is selected, even when it is not. This occurs because only content from locked components is rolled out from Blueprint pages to Livecopy pages. For more information, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
Use local TM	This feature determines whether to check each component in the source version of the item for any content changes, and send only changed components out for translation. If a component was previously translated and it has not changed, then the Connector does not send it for translation again: Instead, it uses the stored translation. This feature reduces the quantity of content that the Connector sends to translation providers, which reduces your cost. However, it needs the Connector translation backup data, and it increases the Connector processing time before sending out the items for translation. * If this check box is selected, the Connector checks whether content was already translated before sending it out for translation. * If this check box is cleared, the Connector sends out content for translation without checking whether it has already been translated.

Note: Your company’s Connector configuration determines the default settings of these last five options. For more information, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

Click Next.

The second page) of the wizard opens.

The following options are available:

Option	Description
Source language	The source language you selected in the previous page of the wizard. Read-only. To change this value, click Back.
Target languages	The target languages, including the number of target languages, you selected in the previous page of the wizard. Read-only. To change this value, click Back.
Deadline	The requested translation deadline. This is the date when you expect the translated content to return. Click in the field and select a date in the calendar that opens. This information is sent to the translation provider as metadata of the translation package. Recommendation: Discuss with your translation provider whether to use the information in this field.
Page Path/Status	This list displays the path and the name of all pages you are sending for translation.
Queue Metadata	You can select the Level-2 Queue Metadata analysis code for these content items. If you add these items to the Translation Queue, you can filter and sort items there by this analysis code. Note: Available only when using the Content API Translation Connector for Lionbridge Freeway. Displayed only when the Use Analysis Codes as Queue Metadata check box is selected in the Freeway Config section of the Configuration page. For details, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
Submit Translation	Indicate where to submit the specified pages for translation. This is one of the following: * Add to queue: The Connector adds the specified pages to the Translation Queue. After the content is in the Translation Queue, either: * You must access the Translation Queue and approve the pages you want to send out for translation. For detailed instructions, see Submitting Content for Translation from the Translation Queue. * Your company has schedules that automatically send out translation jobs from the Translation Queue. For details, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide. * Send as a new job: The Connector immediately sends out the specified pages for translation as a new translation job, according to your company’s routing rules and the options you specify below. Note: This option is available only to users with permission to send pages directly out for translation.
Reference Files	You can send reference files (support assets) to your translation provider as part of a translation job. This provides helpful context for the translator. For instructions on adding reference files in Adobe Experience Manager, refer to the Adobe Experience Manager documentation for uploading digital assets: * version 6.2: https://helpx.adobe.com/experience-manager/6-2/assets/using/managing-assets-touch-ui.html * version 6.3: https://helpx.adobe.com/experience-manager/6-3/assets/using/managing-assets-touch-ui.html * version 6.4: https://helpx.adobe.com/experience-manager/6-4/assets/using/managing-assets-touch-ui.html * version 6.5: https://helpx.adobe.com/experience-manager/6-5/assets/using/managing-assets-touch-ui.html Note: This feature is available only if the Allow Reference Files for Translation Job check box is selected in the UI and Default Settings section of the Configuration page. For detailed instructions, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide. ##### To add a reference file to the Connector: 1. Click the Search icon and navigate to the reference file or folder containing reference files. 2. Select the reference file or folder and click OK. The path you selected is displayed in the text box below. 1. Repeat the previous steps for each reference file or folder containing reference files that you want to send to Freeway. The Connector will send all files in the specified paths to Freeway. Note: Displayed only if you select Lionbridge Freeway as the translation provider (LSP) in the Choose LSP field below.
Job Name	Your name for this translation job. This information is sent to your translation provider. Required and relevant only when Send as a new job is selected in the Submit Translation field, above.
Job Description	Your description for the translation job. This information is sent to your translation provider. Required and relevant only when Send as a new job is selected in the Submit Translation field, above.
Notification Emails	Enter one or more email addresses that will receive notification when the content leaves Adobe Experience Manager and when it returns to Adobe Experience Manager. Use a comma to separate multiple email addresses. Required and relevant only when Send as a new job is selected in the Submit Translation field, above.
In-country Reviewer	Optional. This is generally the name of the localization reviewer, which is stored in the InCountryReviewer attribute in the XML sent to the translation provider. By default, this field is hidden. Required and relevant only when Send as a new job is selected in the Submit Translation field, above.
Content Type	You can tag the content in a translation job as a specific content type. Depending on your company’s configuration, the Content API Platform may send the content to a specific translation provider based on the content type. Select one of the following content types: * Marketing * Technical * Legal Note: You may see different content types if your company has configured custom content types. Required and relevant only when Send as a new job is selected in the Submit Translation field, above.
Choose LSP	Select the translation provider for your translation job. Your Connector administrator specifies the default translation provider. Required and relevant only when Send as a new job is selected in the Submit Translation field, above.
Special Instruction	Any additional instructions for Freeway. Note: Displayed only if the selected translation provider in the Choose LSP box, above, is the Lionbridge Freeway Type.
Freeway Analysis Codes	The Freeway analysis codes for the translation. Displayed only if: * In the Choose LSP box, above, the selected provider is the Lionbridge Freeway Type. * The Connector is configured to display these fields. You specify the analysis codes that are relevant to your content. Your Lionbridge setup determines which analysis codes are available for you to specify, and the values available for selection for each analysis code. For example, the Region, Department, and Priority analysis codes may be available for you to specify.

Click Submit to submit the specified pages either to the Translation Queue or directly to translation, as you indicated above.
If you submitted the pages directly for translation, a message box opens, confirming that you want to send out the translation job. Click OK to proceed.
The wizard page displays a green box in the Status column, indicating that the translation submission was successful.
Click Close to close the wizard.

For information about the events that occur when the Connector sends out content for translation, see Sending Content for Translation.

Tip: You can monitor the translation progress from within the Connector. For detailed instructions, see Monitoring Translation Status and Jobs and Viewing Translated Content.

2.4.10 - Sending Content to the Translation Queue Using Workflow

Note: This section is not applicable for the the AEM Cloud Connector. You can send content to the Translation Queue using the Sample_CT_Workflow_Translation workflow. For detailed integration instructions, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

You can send content to the Translation Queue using workflow:

from the Inbox, as described on Sending Content to the Translation Queue Using Workflow from the Inbox

After the content is in the Translation Queue, either:

You must access the Translation Queue and approve the pages you want to send out for translation. For detailed instructions, see Submitting Content for Translation from the Translation Queue.
Your company has schedules that automatically send out translation jobs from the Translation Queue. For details, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

2.4.10.1 - Sending Content to the Translation Queue Using Workflow from the Inbox

Note about team profiles: If one or more paths are configured for your team profile, you can select only pages that are in these paths for translation. The path configuration does not restrict your selection of digital assets, tags, and dictionaries (i18n items).

To send content to the Translation Queue while using workflow from the Inbox:

Do one of the following to open the Inbox:

In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click Tools in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. Then, in the Tasks section, click Inbox.
In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click Inbox.
In your Web browser, navigate to /inbox.html on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

The Inbox opens and displays workflow items.

Select a workflow item, right-click, and select Complete from the context menu.

The Complete Work Item dialog box opens.

The Next Step is Add page translation.

In the Target Languages section, select the check boxes for the target languages into which to translate the content. The list displays all the languages that are set up in Adobe Experience Manager for your team.
Click the Collapse icon to hide the Target Languages section. Alternatively, you can scroll down in the dialog box.

The Translation Options section is displayed.

Notes: The default settings for these options are specified in the Translation Default Settings section in the Configuration page. For details, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide. Depending on your company’s configuration, some of the options described below may not be available:

Option	Description
Use Local TM	This feature determines whether to check each component in the source version of the item for any content changes, and send only changed components out for translation. If a component was previously translated and it has not changed, then the Connector does not send it for translation again: Instead, it uses the stored translation. This feature reduces the quantity of content that the Connector sends to translation providers, which reduces your cost. However, it needs the Connector translation backup data, and it increases the Connector processing time before sending out the items for translation. * If this check box is selected, the Connector checks whether content was already translated before sending it out for translation. * If this check box is cleared, the Connector sends out content for translation without checking whether it has already been translated.
Target pages have content in source language	This option is relevant when the target pages are MSM (Multi Site Manager) live copy pages, which means that Adobe Experience Manager automatically updates a target page when the corresponding source page changes. It prevents the Connector from overwriting unique source content that already exists in the target pages. This is useful when you are sending a page for translation that has been used in the past to push content to other pages, and includes target page content which has been changed, for example, regionalized. In this scenario you do not want to overwrite the regionalized content as the translation process occurs. Select this option when you do not want the Connector to overwrite components in the target pages that include regionalized content with the newly translated content. * If this check box is selected, the Connector does not overwrite unique source content that already exists in the target pages. * If this check box is cleared, the Connector does overwrite unique source content that already exists in the target pages. Recommendation: Select this check box if you are using the live-copy feature.
Only translate content from locked components	This option enables users to send out only content from locked components for translation. * If this check box is selected, users can send out content for translation only if it is from a locked component. * If this check box is cleared, users can send out content for translation whether or not it is from a locked component. Note: Locked components have an inheritance relationship between a source Blueprint page and the connected live copy page. When sending content for translation using Sidekick, users can choose whether to send for translation the content from locked components, which is inherited from a Blueprint component. This is useful if, for example, the page has both global and regional information and you only want to translate (replace) the global content that is created via a Blueprint page. In this scenario, suppose that the regional content on the page is manually translated in house, and that it has not changed. You would not want to tamper with it. However, using the same scenario, the global content from head office has changed and needs translation. You would select this check box to separate the content and localize only the new, inherited content. Note about Blueprint pages: If the Pickup Content From Blueprint Pages setting is specified, then the Connector always acts as though this option is selected, even if it is not selected. This occurs because only content from locked components are rolled out from Blueprint pages to Livecopy pages. For more information, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
Unlock the component after translated content come back	This option automatically unlocks a component after translated content returns. This option is relevant only when the Select if using Blueprint/Live-copy is been selected. After translated content returns, it automatically unlocks a component, which breaks the MSM inheritance. Warning: This breaks the inheritance between the component and its Blueprint page, so that it no longer inherits new content. However, you can use the CTCRestoreOriginalSync workflow to relock the component and recreate the inheritance. For details, see Relocking Unlocked Components. * If this check box is selected, the Connector automatically unlocks a component after translated content returns. * If this check box is cleared, the Connector does not automatically unlock a component after translated content returns.
Allow translate content from Not-Sync components	This option enables users to send content for translation even if it is not synchronized. This means it does not have a relationship to a Blueprint page, so it cannot be synchronized with it. This can happen if you are not using the MSM (Multi Site Manager) feature of Adobe Experience Manager, or if this is a page with regionalized content that does not inherit content from a Blueprint page. * If this check box is selected, users can send out content for translation if it does not have a relationship to a Blueprint page. * If this check box is cleared, users cannot send out content for translation if it does not have a relationship to a Blueprint page. Important: The Connector treats certain page properties (`jcr:content`, `jcr:title`, `jcr:description`) as unlocked page properties. Therefore, if you want the Connector to send these page properties for translation, you must select this check box. Recommendation: Select this check box if you are using either the live-copy or the language-copy features. Note about Blueprint pages: If the Pickup Content From Blueprint Pages setting is specified, then the Connector always acts as though this option is selected, even when it is not. This occurs because only content from locked components is rolled out from Blueprint pages to Livecopy pages. For more information, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

Click the Collapse icon to hide the Translation options section. Alternatively, you can scroll down in the dialog box.
Optional. In the Comments section, enter any additional information about this workflow step. This is stored in Adobe Experience Manager.
Click OK to send the content to the Translation Queue.

Note: To save your changes without sending the content to the Translation Queue, click Skip. You can return later to send the content to the queue.

After the content is in the Translation Queue, either:

You must access the Translation Queue and approve the pages you want to send out for translation. For detailed instructions, see Submitting Content for Translation from the Translation Queue.
Your company has schedules that automatically send out translation jobs from the Translation Queue. For details, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

2.5 - Monitoring Translation Status and Viewing Translations

You can view the status of your translation jobs from the Translation Status page. The Connector updates the status at different milestones in the translation process.

You can view the translation status of all translation jobs together in the Status tab, as described on Monitoring Jobs.
You can view the translation status of individual pages within a translation job, and view translated pages, in the Job Details tab, as described on Monitoring Pages in a Translation Job and Viewing Translated Content.

For a list and description of translation statuses, see Translation Statuses.

If you create a translation project and start a translation job in Adobe Experience Manager’s translation integration feature, you can also:

Monitor its status within Adobe Experience Manager, as described in Monitoring Translation Jobs Created in the Adobe Experience Manager Translation Integration.
View translated content within Adobe Experience Manager’s translation integration feature, as described in Viewing Translated Content from Jobs Started in the Adobe Experience Manager Translation Integration

2.5.1 - Translation Statuses

Content items have one of the following translation statuses:

Translation Status	Description	Percentage Translation Complete
Preparing	The Connector is preparing to send out the item to the translation provider.	0%
Paused	The Connector has prepared the item to send out to the translation provider, but it has been paused, either automatically, if configured to do so, or by clicking the Pause button in the Status tab of the Translation Status page.	0%
Sending	The Connector is sending out the item to the translation provider.	1%
Sent out	The Connector sent the item to the translation provider. Note: This status is relevant only if a quote was not requested for the translation job.	2%
Sent out for quote	The Connector sent the item to the translation provider and requested a quote. Note: This status is relevant only if a quote was requested for the translation job.	2%
Sent to translator	The Connector completed sending out the item to the translation provider. Note: This status is relevant only if a quote was not requested for the translation job.	5%
Sent to translator for quote	The Connector completed sending out the item to the translation provider and requesting a quote. Note: This status is relevant only if a quote was requested for the translation job.	5%
In Translation	The translation provider has received the item for translation and has not yet returned the translated item. Note: Started translation process is displayed in the Job Details tab of the Translation Status page.	10%
Received	The Connector received the translated item back from the translation provider. This is displayed in green in the Job Details tab of the Translation Status page.	90%
Completed	The Connector has returned the translated item to Adobe Experience Manager. This is displayed in green in the Job Details tab of the Translation Status page.	100%
No Translation Required	There are no components to translate in the page. (The components may have been excluded from translation by your company’s configuration, or they may have been translated already, if the Use Local TM option is specified.)	100%

2.5.2 - Monitoring Jobs

You monitor translation jobs in the Status tab of Translation Status page.

Do one of the following to monitor the status of jobs sent for translation:
- In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click the Tools icon and then click Lionbridge Connector in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. (This opens the Connector in a new browser tab.) Then, click Translation Status in the Lionbridge Connector rail.
- In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, scroll down and click Lionbridge Connector in the right pane. Then, click Translation Status in the Lionbridge Connector rail.
- In your Web browser, navigate to /content/ctctranslation/status.html on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

The Status tab of the Translation Status page opens.

By default, if you are a non-admin user, you can view jobs that you and your team submitted. If you are a member of the Translation Admin group or if Display all jobs and Delete button for non-admin users has been configured for your company in the Folder and Permissions section of the Configuration page, then you can view all company jobs. For more information about these configuration options, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

To filter the jobs by date, in the Period and to fields, enter the date range of when the jobs were submitted in the YYYY-MM-DD format, or select the dates in the calendar that opens.
- To filter the jobs by submitter, in the Submitted By dropdown list:
  - Select Me to display all your jobs.
  - Select My Team or My Team(s) to display all jobos submitted by members of your team.

This tab displays the following information about each translation job:

Information	Description
Job	The name of this translation job. By default this includes the username, date, and time when the job was created, for example: Submit by [admin] @ 2013-12-20 6.57 PM.
Created On	The date and time when the job was submitted, in the following format: MM/DD/YYYY h:mm AA, where AA is two upper-case characters reflecting a.m. (after midnight) or p.m. (after noon).
Created By	The username of the user who created and submitted this translation job. By default, jobs in this tab are sorted by username. Note: If a translation job was created in Adobe Experience Manager’s translation integration feature, the username is admin.
Est. Words	The estimated number of words to translate in the translation job. If there is a number in brackets, it represents the number of words that have been previously translated and are stored in the local TM (translation memory). Note: The number of words in digital assets, such as JPG or PDF files, is not displayed.
LSP	This is one of the following: If you are not using the Content API Translation Connector for SDL TMS, then this is translation provider to whom the Content API Platform sends the translation job. If you are using the Content API Translation Connector for SDL TMS, and you have not specified an SDL TMS configuration, then this is translation provider to whom the Content API Platform sends the translation job. If you are using the Content API Translation Connector for SDL TMS, and you have specified an SDL TMS configuration, then this is your meaningful name for that configuration, for example, Default GUID. You define an SDL TMS configuration in the TMS GUID Config page. For details, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
Liox Job Id	Liox Job Id is the Global Tracking Id, which gets created in content API dashboard for corresponding job in AEM Connector.
Preparing	The number of pages in this job that the Connector is currently preparing to send out for translation.
Sending	The number of pages in this job that the Connector is currently sending out for translation.
Sent out	The number of pages in this job that sent out for translation.
In trans	The number of pages in this job that are currently being translated by the translation provider.
Received	The number of pages in this job that the Connector has received back from translation.
Completed	The number of pages in this job that the Connector has returned to Adobe Experience Manager. If a job was redelivered by the translation provider, then the number of times it was delivered is displayed, in brackets, following the number of pages. For example, if a job has 3 pages and was delivered 4 times, this column displays 3 (D:4).
Error	If there is an error with the job, or an error message from the translation provider (LSP) about displayed content items, then the number of errors is displayed in red. Click the number to open another tab, displaying the error details.
TM Updating History	* Hold your mouse over the TM icon to view the following information about updates to the translation memory from this translation job: the name of the update the target language in which content was updated the date and time when the content was updated the username of the user who updated the content the number of updates that the user sent to the translation memory Click the TM icon to view these updates in the TM Updates tab of the TM Update page. For details, see Viewing Updates to a Translation Memory.
Liox job ID	User can double click on the Liox Job ID to copy the ID and then paste it in the content API, and check status of that job in content API.

By default, the jobs are displayed alphabetically by the value in the Created column.

Actions

You can perform the following actions in the Status tab of Translation Status page:

To refresh the jobs displayed in the list, click the Refresh icon .
To export a summary report about all displayed translation jobs to a Microsoft Excel file (.xls) file, click the Export button in the top-right corner of the Status tab. The Connector downloads the file to your computer.
To reverse the sort order or to sort the jobs by another column, click the column heading. The triangle on the right side of the column indicates if the column is sorted in ascending or descending order.
To view detailed information about each page in a translation job, do one of the following:
- Click the job name in the Job column.
- Click the Job Details tab, if it is already open. The job that is already open is highlighted in orange.

For details, see Monitoring Pages in a Translation Job and Viewing Translated Content.

To cancel the job, in the Cancel column, click Cancel.
- If the Connector has not yet sent out the job (it has Preparing, Paused, or Sending status), then the the cancellation request is automatically approved. The column displays Approved.
- Cancel button is not available when translation job is in Sent out, In translation, Translation received and completed status for admin users as well as non-admin users.

Important: This step does not cancel the translation job in your LSP. If the Connector has already sent out the job, you must also contact your LSP project manager immediately to cancel the project there.

To pause the job if the Connector has not yet sent it out for translation, click the Pause button . Depending on your company’s configuration, this button may be available only for users assigned to the Translation Admin group.
To resume a paused job, click the Resume button . Depending on your company’s configuration, this button may be available only for users assigned to the Translation Admin group.
To export a report about a translation job to a Microsoft Excel file (.xls) file, click the Export Translation Statuses button . The Connector downloads the file to your computer.

Tip: The Source Page column in the report includes the source path. You can use the Load pages button in the Globalization Tool to re-import the source paths of content to send out for translation. For detailed instructions, see Sending Pages and Assets for Translation Using the Globalization Tool.

To download a zipped file of the XML files with the content to translate, click the Download Translation Contents button .
To delete the translation job, so that the Connector does not send it to the translation provider, and it is removed from the Connector database, click the Delete button . A message box opens, confirming that you want to delete this translation job. Click OK to continue.

Tip: To delete multiple translation jobs, press the Ctrl key and click in each row to select the corresponding job. (However, do not click directly on the job name, which opens the Job Details tab.) Then click the Delete button in any row to delete all selected jobs.

Note: This button is available only if you are a member of the Translation Admin group or if your company is configured to display this button for non-admin users.

To resend the translation job, click the Re-Send button .

The Re-send translation job dialog box opens, enabling you to modify the content items, source and target languages, translation provider, translation options, and job options and specify an LSP-specific configuration for the job to resend. For detailed instructions, see Resending a Translation Job.

To update the translation memory for this job based on translated pages that you updated, click the Update TM button . For detailed instructions, see Updating a Translation Memory for Multiple Pages.

Note: Relevant only if you already updated the translated content of one or more pages in the translation job.

2.5.3 - Monitoring Pages in a Translation Job and Viewing Translated Content

You monitor the status of individual pages in a translation job in the Job Details tab of the Translation Status page.

Open the Status tab of the Translation Status page, as described in Monitoring Jobs.

This tab displays the status of jobs that were sent for translation.

Click a job to view detailed translation-status information for each page in the job in the Job Details tab, which displays information for each page in the job.

Note: The Job Details tab opens automatically when you send a job for translation from the Translation Queue, described on Submitting Content for Translation from the Translation Queue, or from the Bulk Translation wizard, described on Sending Content for Translation Using the Bulk Translation Wizard.

This page displays the following information about the translation job:

Translation Job: The name of the translation job.
Description: If a description was entered when the job was sent out for translation, it is displayed here.

This page displays the following information about each page in the translation job:

Column	Description
Page	The path and the name of the page, fragment, i18n dictionary item, tag, form, or digital asset (DAM) sent for translation.
Source	The language code of the source language of the page sent for translation.
Target	The language codes of the target languages into which to translate the content item. Note: When the Connector is preparing to send out the page for translation, multiple target languages are grouped into a single row. After the page is sent for translation, each target language is displayed in a separate row.
Est. Words	The estimated number of words to translate in this page. If there is a number in brackets, it represents the number of words that have been previously translated and are stored in the local TM (translation memory). For digital assets (DAM), this column displays n/a.
Percentage	A percentage indicating how much of the content item has been translated. This is based on the translation status, which is described in Translation Statuses.
Status	For a list and description of translation statuses, see Translation Statuses. If a content item is in Completed status, and it was redelivered by the translation provider, then the number of times it was delivered is also displayed, in brackets. For example, if a content item was delivered 4 times, this column displays Completed (D:4).
Liox Job Id	Liox Job Id is the Global Tracking Id, which gets created in content API dashboard for corresponding job in AEM Connector.
Liox Aseet Id	This is an “Asset Task Id” which is created in the Content API dashboard for each language pair for the corresponding job that is sent from AEM connector (Asset tasks are translation tasks for source files. An asset task specifies the necessary information for file transfer, as well as the source language it is in and the target language it needs to be translated into).
Submit User	The username of the user who submitted this page for translation.
Sent out	Displays the date on which the page was sent for translation and the time it was sent.
Updated	Displays the date on which the page was updated and the time it was updated.
Published	This column displays the published date, published time, and the user who published the page. For example, it shows as 2020-01-05 11:50AM(admin). For an unpublished page, this column is blank.
Liox job ID	User can double click on the Liox Job ID to copy the ID and then paste it in the content API, and check status of that job in content API.

Optional. You can filter which pages are displayed in the list.

From the Translation Job dropdown list, select the translation job whose pages you want to view in the list.

From the Status dropdown list, select the status of the pages to display in the list. For a list and description of statuses, see Translation Statuses.
Optional. To view the translated page or fragment, click the link in the Page column. The translated page or fragment opens in a new browser tab. It opens in either the Touch UI or the Classic UI, depending on your company’s configuration. Available only for pages or fragments that have Completed status.
Optional. To cancel the translation of a content item, in the Cancel column, click Cancel.

If the Connector has not yet sent out the job (it has Preparing, Paused, or Sending status), then the the cancellation request is automatically approved. The column displays Approved.
If the Connector has already sent out the job, (it has Sent out, Sent out for quote, Sent to translator, Sent to translator for quote, Quote approved, or Started translation process status), then the column displays the Requested button, which you can click to resend the cancellation request. After approval, the column displays Approved.

Important: This step does not cancel the translation job in your LSP. If the Connector has already sent out the job, you must also contact your LSP project manager immediately to cancel the project there.

The bottom of this page displays a summary of the status of pages and the estimated number of words by target language.

To update the translation status of the displayed pages, click the Refresh button.
To view information about other translation jobs, click the Close button or click the Status tab. For details, see Monitoring Jobs.

2.5.4 - Monitoring Translation Jobs Created in Adobe Experience Manager Translation Integration

After you start a translation job in Adobe Experience Manager’s translation integration, you can monitor its progress from within Adobe Experience Manager.

You can monitor translation jobs created in Adobe Experience Manager’s translation integration feature, either:

From within Adobe Experience Manager, on the corresponding translation project’s Translation Job tile, as described in “Monitoring the Status of a Translation Job” in the Adobe Experience Manager documentation:

Notes: The Scope Requested status is not relevant to jobs sent from Adobe Experience Manager’s translation integration feature using the Connector.

Important: From within Adobe Experience Manager, you can view the status only of translation jobs only that were started in Adobe Experience Manager’s translation integration feature, as described in Sending Content for Translation from Adobe Experience Manager Translation Integration. For example, if content is submitted for translation from the Adobe Experience Manager Sidekick, you cannot monitor its progress from Adobe Experience Manager’s translation integration feature.

On the Connector’s Translation Status page, as described in Monitoring Jobs and Monitoring Pages in a Translation Job and Viewing Translated Content.

2.5.5 - Viewing Translated Content from Jobs Created in Adobe Experience Manager Translation Integration

You can view translated content of translation jobs started in Adobe Experience Manager’s translation integration feature, either:

From within Adobe Experience Manager, if the Translation Job tile displays the Ready for review status, then the translated files are ready for review.

For detailed instructions, see “Reviewing and Promoting Updated Content” in the Adobe Experience Manager documentation:

Note: If some, but not all, pages are translated, then the Translation Job tile displays the Translation in progress status. In this scenario, click Translation Job in the tile to display the list of pages in the project. Select the check box for any page with Ready for review status, and in the top-left corner, click Reveal in Sites.

In the Connector, on the Job Details tab of the Translation Status page, by clicking the link to the translated page, as described in Monitoring Pages in a Translation Job and Viewing Translated Content.

2.6 - Post-Translation Tasks

In general, you use the Adobe Experience Manager workflow to review, approve and publish translated content.

After the translation is complete, you can perform the following additional optional tasks:

Task	Description	Details
relock unlocked components	If you set your translation setting to unlock translated components after they return from translation, you can use the CTCRestoreOriginalSync workflow to restore the components' original inheritance.	Relocking Unlocked Components
update translation memory for a single page	If an in-country reviewer updates your translated content, you can send these updates to the translation memory, so that they will be available to the translation provider for subsequent translations.	Updating a Translation Memory for a Single Page from the Adobe Experience Manager Sidekick
update translation memory for multiple pages		Updating a Translation Memory for Multiple Pages
view updates to translation memory	You can review and update translated content and then send these updates to the translation memory, so that they will be available for future translations.	Viewing Updates to a Translation Memory
view reports	Open the Reports folder in the Tools console.	Viewing Adobe Experience Manager Reports
view log files	View log files to troubleshoot and to optimize your installation.	Viewing Log Files

2.6.1 - Relocking Unlocked Components

If you set your translation setting to unlock translated components after they return from translation, you can use the CTCRestoreOriginalSync workflow to restore the components' original inheritance. This translation setting is one of the following:

Option Name	User Interface
Unlock When Done	Sidekick (simple UI with options and wizard with options)
Unlock the component after translated content come back	Sidekick workflow
Leave Unlock	Translation Queue (columns)
Leave component unlock after putting back translated content	Translation Queue (Overwrite section)
Unlock the component after translated content come back	Bulk Translation wizard, Options page
Unlock the component after translated content come back	I and Default Settings section of the Configuration page (used for rollout)

In general you set this option when you use roll out a site, Adobe Experience Manager copies the Blueprint (source) to the (target), as described in Adobe Experience Manager’s MSM and the Rollout Process.

To relock unlocked components and restore their inheritance relationship:

Ensure that you are using the Adobe Experience Manager Classic UI.
Double-click a page to open it with Sidekick, which is a floating toolbar.
In Sidekick, click the Workflow tab .
In the Workflow tab, select the CTCRestoreOriginalSync workflow from the Workflow list, and then click Start Workflow.

2.6.2 - Updating a Remote Translation Memory (TM)

After the Connector returns translated content from the translation provider to Adobe Experience Manager, in-country marketers or reviewers can review the translation and update it in Adobe Experience Manager. These reviewers can then send their post-translation updates to their translation technology or provider. The translation provider can then update the translation memory (TM) with these content updates. This means that the updates will be available to the translation provider for subsequent translations. This makes the translation process more efficient.

To send updates to the translation provider’s translation memory:

Do one of the following:
- Send updates for multiple pages in a job from the Translation Status page in the Connector. For detailed instructions, see Updating a Translation Memory for Multiple Pages.
- Send updates for a single page from the Sidekick, which is available only in Adobe Experience Manager’s Classic UI. For detailed instructions, see Updating a Translation Memory for a Single Page from the Adobe Experience Manager Sidekick.
- Send updates for a single page from the Touch-Optimzed UI, which is available only in Adobe Experience Manager 6.3 and higher. For detailed instructions, see Updating a Translation Memory for a Single Page from the Touch-Optimized UI (Adobe Experience Manager version 6.3 and higher only).

The Connectors sends a TMX file to the translation technology or provider with the updates. This file includes:

the original source content
the original translated content
the updated translated content
the name of the translation job
the page path and the property name

Tip: When you send an update for a single page, you can add a comment for your translator about why you are updating the translation for that page.

Best practices for updating a remote translation memory (TM):

Make only small post- translation updates in the Adobe Experience Manager authoring environment, and then use this feature to send those updates to the translation provider. If you require large updates or rewrites, discuss this directly with your translation provider to ensure that all changes are captured efficiently. In this scenario, the translation provider can redo the translations and redeliver the updates via the Connector.
Create a primary review process for translation that captures most changes to translated content, so that the translation provider can update its TM directly. The secondary review process in Adobe Experience Manager then captures only small and minor post-translation updates.
Review your remote TM updates on the TM Update page in the Connector. For detailed instructions, see Viewing Updates to a Translation Memory. If you have any changes that you do not want to send to the remote TM, you can delete them on the TM Update page.
A project manager at the translation provider should review the suggested updates and ensure that the translation memory is updated with these changes.

Important: Updating the remote TM is not an automatic process. The translation provider must review all the changes and transform them into a format to update the TM. The translation provider may charge a service fee for this work.

2.6.2.1 - Updating a Translation Memory for a Single Page from the Adobe Experience Manager Sidekick

After translated content returns from the translation provider to Adobe Experience Manager, you can review the translation and update it. You can then send these updates to the translation memory, so that they will be available to the translation provider for subsequent translations.

If you are using the Adobe Experience Manager Classic UI, you can update translated content and send these changes to the translation memory using Sidekick.

Tips: If you update translated content in multiple pages of a translation job, you can send all the updates to the translation memory in a single action using the Update TM button in the Status tab of the Translation Status page. For details, see Updating a Translation Memory for Multiple Pages. In Adobe Experience Manager version 6.3 and higher, you can update translated content and send these changes to the translation memory from the Touch-Optimized UI. For details, see Updating a Translation Memory for a Single Page from the Touch-Optimized UI (Adobe Experience Manager version 6.3 and higher only).

To update the translation memory for a single page from the Sidekick:

In Adobe Experience Manager, click the open icon to open a translated page with Sidekick, which is a floating toolbar.
Update the translated content.
Reload the page in your browser window.
In Sidekick, click the Page tab .
In the Page tab, scroll down and click the Update Remote TM option.

Note: This option is available only from a source language page, and only when the Use Local TM check box is not selected on the Configuration page. This option is described in detail in the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

The Update Remote TM dialog box opens, displaying the paragraph you edited.

The following information about the translation is displayed in read-only fields at the top of the dialog box:

Field	Description
Translation Job	The name of the translation job in which this page was sent out for translation.
Translation	The language code of the source language that was translated, followed by an arrow, followed by the language code of the target language of the translation, for example: en ==> it_it. This indicates that the page was translated from English to Italian.
Total Updates	The number of times that this content has been updated.

Optional. In the Comments field, you can add a comment for your translator about why you are updating the translation of this page.

The large text box below these fields displays the content:

The source-language content is displayed on top, with no background.
The translated content is displayed on a yellow background.
Your changes to the translated content are displayed on a green background.

Click Submit.

A message box opens, confirming that the content has been sent to the translation memory.

Click OK to close the message box and the dialog box.

2.6.2.2 - Updating a Translation Memory for a Single Page from the Touch-Optimized UI (Adobe Experience Manager version 6.3 and higher only)

In Adobe Experience Manager version 6.3 and higher, you can update translated content and send these changes to the translation memory from the Touch-Optimized UI.

Tips: If you update translated content in multiple pages of a translation job, you can send all the updates to the translation memory in a single action using the Update TM button in the Status tab of the Translation Status page. For details, see Updating a Translation Memory for Multiple Pages. In the Adobe Experience Manager Classic UI, you can also update translated content and send these changes to the translation memory from the Sidekick. For details, see Updating a Translation Memory for a Single Page from the Adobe Experience Manager Sidekick.

To update the translation memory for a single page from the Touch-Optimized UI:

In the Adobe Experience Manager Touch-Optimized UI, navigate to the page you want to update.
Hover over the page to update, and then click the Edit button to open the page for editing.

The page opens for editing in a new browser tab.
Click the component to edit, and then click the Edit button in the floating toolbar.
Update the translated content.
In the top-left corner, click the Page Information icon .
In the menu that opens, click Update Remote TM, which is the last menu option.

Note: This option is available only from a target language page, and only when the Use Local TM check box is not selected on the Configuration page. This option is described in detail in the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

The Update Remote TM dialog box opens, displaying the paragraph you edited.

The following information about the translation is displayed in read-only fields at the top of the dialog box:

Field	Description
Translation Job	The name of the translation job in which this page was sent out for translation. The text above the field displays the language code of the source language that was translated, followed by an arrow, followed by the language code of the target language of the translation, for example: en ==> de_de. This indicates that the page was translated from English to German.
Total Updates	The number of times that this content has been updated.

Optional. In the Comments field, you can add a comment for your translator about why you are updating the translation of this page.

The large text box below these fields displays the updated content:

The source-language content is displayed on top, with no background.
The translated content is displayed on a pink background, with strikethrough.
Your changes to the translated content are displayed on a green background, underlined.

Click Submit.

A message box at the top of the page indicates that the content was sent to the translation memory.

2.6.2.3 - Updating a Translation Memory for Multiple Pages

You can send updates for multiple translated pages from the Status tab of Translation Status page.

To update the translation memory for multiple pages in a single job:

In Adobe Experience Manager, update one or more translated pages that were part of a single translation job.
Do one of the following to open the Status tab of Translation Status page:

In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click the Tools icon and then click Lionbridge Connector in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. (This opens the Connector in a new browser tab.) Then, click Translation Status in the Lionbridge Connector rail.
In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, scroll down and click Lionbridge Connector in the right pane. Then, click Translation Status in the Lionbridge Connector rail.
In your Web browser, navigate to /content/ctctranslation/status.html on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

For a detailed description of this page, see Monitoring Jobs.

In the Job column, locate the translation job with the updated translation, and click the Update TM button .

The Update TM] dialog box opens, displaying all the languages in which the translation has been modified.

Click Submit to submit the updates to the specified target languages to the translation memory.

A message box opens, confirming that you want to send the updates to the translation memory.

Click OK to proceed.

2.6.2.4 - Viewing Updates to a Translation Memory

You can view your in-country reviewers' updates to your translated content that are sent to the translation memory.

To view a list of these updates:

Do one of the following to open the TM Update page:
- In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click the Tools icon and then click Lionbridge Connector in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. (This opens the Connector in a new browser tab.) Then, click TM Update in the Lionbridge Connector rail.
- In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, scroll down and click Lionbridge Connector in the right pane. Then, click TM Update in the Lionbridge Connector rail.
- In your Web browser, navigate to /content/ctctranslation/updatetm.html on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

The TM Updates tab of the TM Update page opens.

Tip: This page also opens when you click the TM icon in the Status tab of the Translation Status page. For details, see Monitoring Jobs.

This page displays a list of updates to the translation memory. The page displays the following information about each update:

Column	Description
Name	The name of this update. * For updates sent from the Translation Status page, this is a concatenation of TM Update and the name of the translation job. * For updates sent from Sidekick, this is a concatenation of Sidekick, TM Update, and the name of the translation job.
Target Languages	The language code of the target language of the page that was updated.
Created On	The date and time when the page was last updated, in the following format: MM/DD/YYYY h:mm AA, where AA is two upper-case characters reflecting a.m. (after midnight) or p.m. (after noon).
Created By	The username of the user who updated the page and sent the update to the translation memory.
From Sidekick	Indicates whether or not the user sent the update to the translation memory from the Sidekick. It has the following values: * Yes: The user sent the update from the Sidekick. * No: The user did not send the update from the Sidekick. The user sent the update from the Translation Status page or from the Touch-Optimized UI.
Related Translation Job	The name of the translation job in which this page was originally translated.
# Updated	The number of updates to this page after the initial translation.

To view the update, click Report in the Reports column.

The Update TM Details](#) tab opens.

The left column displays the path of the page that was updated.
Each row displays a separate update.
In the right column:
- The source-language content is displayed on top, with no background.
- The translated content is displayed on a yellow background.
- Updates to the translated content are displayed on a green background.

Click Close to close this tab and return to the TM Updates tab.
Optional. To refresh the list of updates, click the Refresh icon in the TM Updates tab.
Optional. To remove updates from this list, select the corresponding check boxes and click Remove Selected at the bottom of the page.

2.6.3 - Viewing Adobe Experience Manager Reports

The Connector provides a quick link to the Reports folder in the Tools console.

To access this folder, do one of the following:

In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click the Tools icon and then click Lionbridge Connector in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. (This opens the Connector in a new browser tab.) Then, click Reports in the Lionbridge Connector rail.
In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, scroll down and click Lionbridge Connector in the right pane. Then, click Reports in the Lionbridge Connector rail.

For information about Adobe Experience Manager reports, refer to the Adobe Experience Manager documentation, available at: https://helpx.adobe.com/ca/experience-manager/6-5/sites/administering/using/reporting.html.

2.6.4 - Viewing Log Files

You can view log files to troubleshoot and to optimize your installation.

To view log files:

Do one of the following to open the Translation Log page:
- In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click the Tools icon and then click Lionbridge Connector in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. (This opens the Connector in a new browser tab.) Then, click Logs in the Lionbridge Connector rail.
- In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, scroll down and click Lionbridge Connector in the right pane. Then, click Logs in the Lionbridge Connector rail.
- In your Web browser, navigate to /content/ctctranslation/ctclog.html on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

The Log Files tab of the Translation Log page opens.

This page displays a list of log files. There is a different log file for each day and type of file. The page displays the following information about each file:

Column	Description
File	The name of the log file. This is made up of the date and the type of log file, in the following format: YYYY_MM_DD.Type.log, for example: 2014_01_24.Update.log.
Type	The type of log file. Each type describes a different type of activities. This is one of the following: * AlarmFields: The Connector checks the specified paths for new components and sends relevant email notifications. * CTT: Captures events that are not captured in other log files, such as workflow messages. The maximum size of this log file is 10 MB. When a log file reaches this size, it is renamed from YYYY_MM_DD.Ctt.log, for example, 2015_06_24.Ctt.log, to YYYY_MM_DD.Ctt.log.1, for example, 2015_05_24.Ctt.log.1. The next time this log file reaches 10 MB, it is renamed to YYYY_MM_DD.Ctt.log.2. These files are stored in the ctcdata/logs folder. * Download: The Connector receives translated files to return to Adobe Experience Manager. * General (type not specified in the file name): General activities, such as connecting to the database and configuring CRX access, which do not fit into other types of log files. * Status: The Connector checks for updates about translation status. * UpdateTM: The Connector updates the translation memory. * Upload: The Connector is preparing to send files for translation. * Web: User actions, such as submitting a new translation job, removing translation files from the queue, creating translation requests based on user actions, such as in the Sidekick UI.
Size	The size of the file.
Last Updated	The date and time when the file was last updated, in the following format: MM/DD/YYYY h:mm AA, where AA is two upper-case characters reflecting a.m. (after midnight) or p.m. (after noon).

By default, the list of jobs are displayed in reverse chronological order by the value in the Last Updated column.

Optional. To download log files, select the corresponding check boxes and click Download.
Click View to view a log file.

The log file opens in a new tab.

To refresh the information displayed, click the Refresh icon .
To close the tab displaying the log file, click Close.
To return to the main page and refresh the list of log files, click the Log Files tab.

Note: You can change the type of information in the log files and the number of days that the Connector maintains logs. For detailed instructions, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

2.7 - Performing Actions on Multiple Pages and Digital Assets

You can use the Globalization Tool to perform actions on multiple pages and digital assets simultaneously, sometimes including multiple language copies of those items. You can perform the following action using the Globalization Tool:

generate reports
update page properties
update DAM (digital-asset) metadata
activate pages
deactivate pages
set future activation date of pages
lock pages
unlock pages
create a new version of pages
delete multiple pages and the corresponding translated pages
import page content from XML
export page content to XML
copy page metadata
run workflows
roll out changes (MSM)
create livecopy relationships (MSM)
remove livecopy relationships (MSM)

For detailed instructions on sending out pages for translation using the Globalization Tool, see Sending Pages and Assets for Translation Using the Globalization Tool.

Important: By default, this feature is hidden. To use the Globalization Tool, you must select the Show Globalization Tool check box in the UI and Default Settings section of the Configuration page. For detailed instructions, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

To perform bulk actions on multiple pages and digital assets:

Do one of the following to open the Globalization Tool:

In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click the Tools icon and then click Lionbridge Connector in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. (This opens the Connector in a new browser tab.) Then, click Globalization Tool in the Lionbridge Connector rail.
In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, scroll down and click Lionbridge Connector in the right pane. Then, click Globalization Tool in the Lionbridge Connector rail
In your Web browser, navigate to /content/ctctranslation/advbulk.html on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

The Globalization Tool opens.

Optional. If you are a member of multiple teams, then in the Profile dropdown list, select the team profile to use with the Globalization Tool. This displays the source and target languages and the translation providers specified for the team profile. To always use the selected profile with the Globalization Tool, click Set as default.
In the Select Pages section, you either set the parent path of one or more files to upload, apply filters, and then use an agent to upload the files, or you upload one or more files containing the paths of pages. You repeat this step until you have added all the paths and files to add. Do one of the following to select pages:

To set the parent path of one or more files to upload, apply filters, and then use an agent to upload the files:

a. In the Search from Site Path field, specify the highest root folder of all source pages or the full path of a page of a website. Either:

Click the arrow at the end of the field , navigate to that path, select it, and click Select.
Type the path in one of the following formats: /content/geometrixx/en or http://localhost:4502/content/geometrixx/en/company.html.

Tips: You can select a previously entered path. Alternatively, you can click Load Saved to load the last set of previously saved page paths to the list.

b. Optional. Specify any of the following filters:

Filter	Description	How To Specify…
Modification Filter	The range of dates when the page was modified.	* In the From and To boxes, enter the dates in YYYY-MM-DD format. * Select the Apply modification filter check box.
Publishing Filter	The range of dates when the page was published.	* In the From and To boxes, enter the dates in YYYY-MM-DD format. * Select the Apply publishing filter check box.
Off time (expiration)	The range of dates when the page was off time, or unpublished.	* In the From and To boxes, enter the dates in YYYY-MM-DD format. * Select the Apply offtime filter check box.
On time	The range of dates when the page was on time.	* In the From and To boxes, enter the dates in YYYY-MM-DD format. * Select the Apply ontime filter check box.
Page template filter	The Adobe Experience Manager template used to create the page.	Select the check boxes for the templates to include, or select the check box in the list header to include all templates.

Tip: For precise descriptions of some of these terms, refer to the Adobe Experience Manager documentation, available at: https://docs.adobe.com/docs/en/aem/6-2/author/page-authoring/publishing-pages.html.

c. Optional. In the Page activation state section, select one or more of the following activation states for the pages to include:

Activated: The page has been activated (published).
DeActivated: The page was activated (published) and then deactivated (unpublished).
Never Activated: The page has never been activated (published).

d. In the Search Using Agent field, select an agent to collect items to send for translation. Select a custom agent or one of the following pre-configured agents from the list:

Get current page: Default. The agent collects the root page of the path specified in the Search from Site Path box, above.
Get all children pages: The agent collects all children pages of the path specified in the Search from Site Path box, above. It does not collect any pages in the root path.
Get current page and all children pages: The agent collects the root page and all children pages of the path specified in the Search from Site Path box, above.

e. Click Add.

You can repeat these steps to add multiple sets of pages with different root folders to the list of pages.

To upload a file with the paths of the source content or import pages from a previously sent translation job, click the Load pages button:

The Select a file to upload dialog box opens.

Do one of the following:

To upload a file with the paths of the source content:
- Click Choose File.
- In the browser dialog box that opens, navigate to the XLS or CSV file containing the paths of the source files, select it, and click Open, or similar, to close the browser dialog box.
- The Select a file to upload dialog box displays the path of the file you selected.
- Click Upload to upload the file.
A message box confirms that the file is added.
- Click OK to close the message box.
The specified agent collects all items that match the search criteria and adds them to the list. You can repeat these steps to add additional files containing paths of pages to the list.
To import pages from a previously sent translation job:

a. In the Import pages from translation job – From dropdown list, select the time range of previous translation jobs to display. The default value is Last two weeks.

b. Click the Refresh icon to populate the list of previous translation jobs in the list below.

c. Select the previous translation job to import from the dropdown list at the bottom of the dialog box.

d. Click Import.

The Connectors adds the content items from the selected job to the list.

The following summary information is displayed in the Pages x/y field, where:

X is the total number of pages available for selection.
Y is the number of pages selected to send out for translation.

The following information is displayed about each page:

Column	Description
blank	A locked padlock icon indicates if the page is locked.
Path	The path to the page. Tip: Click the link to open the page, fragment, or form in a new browser tab. The page opens in either the Touch UI or the Classic UI, depending on your company’s configuration.
Lng	The Adobe Experience Manager language of the page.
Loc	The Adobe Experience Manager locale of the page.
Template	The Adobe Experience Manager template used to create the page.
T. Status	Optional. The custom translation status configured for the translation provider (LSP) that translated the page. Note: This column is displayed only if custom translation-status values are configured. For instructions, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
Activation	Whether the page is activated or deactivated.
Activation/De-Activation Date	* The date and time when the page was last activated or de-activated, in the following format: YYYY-MM-DD kk:mm:ss, where kk is the hour represented by a 24-hour clock. * The username of the user who activated or deactivated the page. * One of the following codes, indicating whether the page was last activated or de-activated: * CTA: Activated * CTD: Deactivated.
Modification	* The date and time when the item was last modified, in the following format: YYYY-MM-DD kk:mm:ss, where kk is the hour represented by a 24-hour clock. * The (m) following the date and time indicates that the item was modified. The username of the user who last modified the item is displayed in parentheses, for example, [admin]. * One of the following codes, indicating how the page was last modified: * CTT: Translation * CTU: Update * `CTI`: Import * `CTR`: Rollout

Highlight pages to apply actions from the tabs (in the bottom part of the page) to them. The tabs are described in step 8, below.

To highlight a page, click in the corresponding row.

Note: Do not click the actual path in the Path column, because that is a link to the page.

To highlight multiple adjacent pages, press and hold the Shift key.
To highlight multiple non-adjacent pages, press and hold the Ctrl key.
To highlight all the pages in the list, click Highlight All.
To remove the highlight all the pages in the list, click Remove Highlighted.

Optional. Use the following features to update the page list:

To remove all the pages from the list, even if they are highlighted, click Clear.
To update information about pages displayed in list, such as modification date, click Refresh.
To switch the language version of all highlighted pages in the list, click Switch Languages. A dialog box opens, displaying the available language versions. Highlight one or more languages, and click Switch.

Tip: This enables you to roll out content from secondary Blueprint pages to country pages. For example, you can roll out content from us-en to xa-en (Asia English) and then from xa-en to kr-ko and other country sites. To roll out content, you use the Rollout tab of the Globalization Tool, as described in Rolling Out Changes to Multiple Pages.

To save the page paths displayed in the list, so that you can reload them later, click Save.

Optional. To view a page, click the path in the Path column. The page opens in a new browser tab.
Specify settings for highlighted pages in the list in the following tabs:

Note: For a description of the Translation tab, see Sending Pages and Assets for Translation Using the Globalization Tool.

Tab	Description	For Details, See
Reporting	You can generate the following Adobe Experience Manager reports about multiple pages: * Field report: Displays which of specified fields are in multiple pages, including multiple language versions of these pages. * Lock report: Displays which of multiple pages, including multiple language versions of these pages, are locked or unlocked. * Content report: Displays the relationships between multiple page paths and all associated language versions. * Sitemap report: Displays the sitemap relationships among multiple pages for all languages. * Translation report: Displays the translation history for a date range and specified LSPs (translation providers) and TMSs.	Generating Reports about Multiple Pages
Page Property Updating	You can update page properties for multiple pages, including multiple language copies of those pages.	Updating Page Properties for Multiple Pages
DAM Metadata Update	You can update the metadata of multiple digital assets, including multiple language copies of those digital assets.	Updating Metadata of Multiple Digital Assets
Activation	You can perform the same action on multiple pages, including multiple language copies. You can perform the following types of actions: * activate pages * deactivate pages * set future activation date of pages * lock pages * unlock pages * create a new version of pages * delete pages and the corresponding translated pages * import page content from XML * export page content to XML	Activating Multiple Pages and Digital Assets
Copy Metadata	You can copy metadata to multiple pages, including multiple language copies of those pages. This includes copying metadata from source Blueprint pages to the corresponding livecopy language copies of those pages.	Copying Metadata to Multiple Pages
Run Workflows	You can run workflows on multiple pages, including multiple language copies of those pages.	Running Workflows on Multiple Pages
Rollout	You can perform the following MSM (Multi Site Manager) tasks on multiple pages, including language versions of those pages: * rolling out changes from the source (Blueprint) pages to the target (live copy), including language versions of those pages * creating livecopy relationships from the source (Blueprint) pages to the target (live copy), including language versions of those pages * removing livecopy relationships between the source (Blueprint) pages to the target (live copy), including language versions of those pages	Performing Rollout Tasks on Multiple Pages

2.7.1 - Generating Reports about Multiple Pages

You use the Reporting tab of the Globalization Tool to generate reports about multiple pages that you highlight in the page list in the Globalization Tool.

You can generate the following reports:

Report Name	Description	For Detailed Instructions, See…
Field Report	Displays which of specified fields are in multiple pages, including multiple language versions of these pages. Note: In the Report Fields Configuration section of the Advanced Settings page, you can configure which fields are available for selection when generating the Field report from the Reporting tab of the Globalization Tool. For detailed instructions, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.	Field Report
Lock Report	Displays which of multiple pages, including multiple language versions of these pages, are locked or unlocked.	Lock Report
Content Report	Displays the relationships between multiple page paths and all associated language versions.	Content Report
Sitemap Report	Displays the sitemap relationships among multiple pages for all languages.	Sitemap Report
Translation Report	Displays the translation history for a date range and specified LSPs (translation providers) and TMSs.	Translation Report

2.7.1.1 - Field Report

You can generate the Field report about multiple pages, which displays which of the specified fields are in multiple pages, including multiple language versions of these pages.

The report includes field contents for multiple language versions of the selected pages. This information is displayed in a separate tab in the Microsoft Excel file for each language version. It can indicate if pages are missing specific language versions.

If configured, it can also include the PageTemplate and PageType Adobe Experience Manager standard fields and the custom TranslationStatus field.

Note: You can configure which fields are available for selection when generating the Field report. For detailed instructions, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

To generate the Field report:

In the Globalization Tool, display and highlight the pages you want this report to include. For detailed instructions, see Performing Actions on Multiple Pages and Digital Assets.

To highlight a page, click in the corresponding row.

Note: Do not click the actual path in the Path column, because that is a link to the page.

To highlight multiple adjacent pages, press and hold the Shift key.
To highlight multiple non-adjacent pages, press and hold the Ctrl key.
To highlight all the pages in the list, click Highlight All.
To remove the highlight from all the pages in the list, click Remove Highlighted.
To update the numbers of selected pages, highlighted pages, and total pages at the top-left corner of the list, click Re-Count.
- The number after the check box displays the number of selected pages.
- The number after the highlight displays the number of highlighted pages.
- The number after the slash ( / ) displays the total number of pages.

For example:

Important: Ensure that you highlight the pages in the list, instead of selecting the check boxes.

In the bottom of the Globalization Tool, click the Reporting tab.

You generate the Field report in the leftmost section of this tab, which is highlighted in the following screen capture:

In the dropdown list at the top of the section, select whether to generate the report for the highlighted pages in the source language or in the specified target languages. Select one of the following:

Highlighted Pages for Languages: The Connector will generate the report for highlighted pages in the languages selected in the list below the dropdown list. All source and target languages defined for your team profile are displayed in this list.
- To select multiple adjacent languages, press and hold the Shift key.
- To select multiple non-adjacent languages, press and hold the Ctrl key.
Highlighted Pages Only: The Connector will generate the report for highlighted pages only.

In the Fields list, select the fields to include in the generated report. By default, all available fields are selected.

To select multiple adjacent fields, press and hold the Shift key.
To select multiple non-adjacent fields, press and hold the Ctrl key.

Click Field Report.

The Submit a new task dialog box opens.

The generated report will be displayed as a task on the Backend Tasks page.

Define the parameters for this task:

Field	Description
Priority	One of the following priority levels for this task: * Normal: The Connector generates the corresponding report with normal priority. * Urgent: The Connector generates the corresponding report before generating reports for tasks with Normal priority. * Wait for approval: This task must be approved before the Connector generates the corresponding report.
Task Name	The name of the report, as it will be displayed on the Backend Tasks page.
Notification	To receive an email notification when the report is generated and ready for viewing, select the Need email notification check box.
Email addresses	If you selected the Need email notification check box, described above, enter the email addresses that will receive a notification when the report is generated and ready for viewing.

Click Submit.

A message box states that the task has been saved.

Click OK to close the message box.

You can access your report from the Backend Tasks page, which you open by clicking Tasks in the Lionbridge Connector rail. If the task requires approval before the report is generated, you can approve it there. For detailed instructions, see Managing Tasks and Accessing Reports.

2.7.1.2 - Lock Report

You can generate the Lock report about multiple pages. This report displays which pages, including multiple language versions, are locked or unlocked.

To generate the Lock report:

In the Globalization Tool, display and highlight the pages you want this report to include. For detailed instructions, see Performing Actions on Multiple Pages and Digital Assets.

To highlight a page, click in the corresponding row.

Note: Do not click the actual path in the Path column, because that is a link to the page.

To highlight multiple adjacent pages, press and hold the Shift key.
To highlight multiple non-adjacent pages, press and hold the Ctrl key.
To highlight all the pages in the list, click Highlight All.
To remove the highlight from all the pages in the list, click Remove Highlighted.
To update the numbers of selected pages, highlighted pages, and total pages at the top-left corner of the list, click Re-Count.
1. The number after the check box displays the number of selected pages.
2. The number after the highlight displays the number of highlighted pages.
3. The number after the slash ( / ) displays the total number of pages.

For example:

Important: Ensure that you highlight the pages in the list, instead of selecting the check boxes.

In the bottom of the Globalization Tool, click the Reporting tab.

You generate the Lock report in the middle section of this tab, which is highlighted in the following screen capture:

Select the languages for which to generate the report for the highlighted pages in the list.

To select multiple adjacent languages, press and hold the Shift key.
To select multiple non-adjacent languages, press and hold the Ctrl key.

Click Lock Report.

The Submit a new task dialog box opens.

The generated report will be displayed as a task on the Backend Tasks page.

Define the parameters for this task:

Field	Description
Priority	One of the following priority levels for this task: * Normal: The Connector generates the corresponding report with normal priority. * Urgent: The Connector generates the corresponding report before generating reports for tasks with Normal priority. * Wait for approval: This task must be approved before the Connector generates the corresponding report.
Task Name	The name of the report, as it will be displayed on the Backend Tasks page.
Notification	To receive an email notification when the report is generated and ready for viewing, select the Need email notification check box.
Email addresses	If you selected the Need email notification check box, described above, enter the email addresses that will receive a notification when the report is generated and ready for viewing.

Click Submit.

A message box states that the task has been saved.

Click OK to close the message box.

2.7.1.3 - Content Report

You can generate the Content report about multiple pages. This report displays the relationships between multiple page paths and all associated language versions.

To generate the Content report:

In the Globalization Tool, display and highlight the pages you want this report to include. For detailed instructions, see Performing Actions on Multiple Pages and Digital Assets.

To highlight a page, click in the corresponding row.

Note: Do not click the actual path in the Path column, because that is a link to the page.

To highlight multiple adjacent pages, press and hold the Shift key.
To highlight multiple non-adjacent pages, press and hold the Ctrl key.
To highlight all the pages in the list, click Highlight All.
To remove the highlight from all the pages in the list, click Remove Highlighted.
To update the numbers of selected pages, highlighted pages, and total pages at the top-left corner of the list, click Re-Count.
1. The number after the check box displays the number of selected pages.
2. The number after the highlight displays the number of highlighted pages.
3. The number after the slash ( / ) displays the total number of pages.

For example:

Important: Ensure that you highlight the pages in the list, instead of selecting the check boxes.

In the bottom of the Globalization Tool, click the Reporting tab.

You generate the Content report in the middle section of this tab, which is highlighted in the following screen capture:

Select the languages for which to generate the report for the highlighted pages in the list.

To select multiple adjacent languages, press and hold the Shift key.
To select multiple non-adjacent languages, press and hold the Ctrl key.

Click Content Report.

The Submit a new task dialog box opens.

The generated report will be displayed as a task on the Backend Tasks page.

Define the parameters for this task:

Field	Description
Priority	One of the following priority levels for this task: * Normal: The Connector generates the corresponding report with normal priority. * Urgent: The Connector generates the corresponding report before generating reports for tasks with Normal priority. * Wait for approval: This task must be approved before the Connector generates the corresponding report.
Task Name	The name of the report, as it will be displayed on the Backend Tasks page.
Notification	To receive an email notification when the report is generated and ready for viewing, select the Need email notification check box.
Email addresses	If you selected the Need email notification check box, described above, enter the email addresses that will receive a notification when the report is generated and ready for viewing.

Click Submit.

A message box states that the task has been saved.

Click OK to close the message box.

2.7.1.4 - Sitemap Report

You can generate the Sitemap report about multiple pages. This report displays the sitemap relationships among multiple pages for all languages.

To generate the Sitemap report:

In the Globalization Tool, display and highlight the pages you want this report to include. For detailed instructions, see Performing Actions on Multiple Pages and Digital Assets.

To highlight a page, click in the corresponding row.

Note: Do not click the actual path in the Path column, because that is a link to the page.

To highlight multiple adjacent pages, press and hold the Shift key.
To highlight multiple non-adjacent pages, press and hold the Ctrl key.
To highlight all the pages in the list, click Highlight All.
To remove the highlight from all the pages in the list, click Remove Highlighted.
To update the numbers of selected pages, highlighted pages, and total pages at the top-left corner of the list, click Re-Count.
1. The number after the check box displays the number of selected pages.
2. The number after the highlight displays the number of highlighted pages.
3. The number after the slash ( / ) displays the total number of pages.

For example:

Important: Ensure that you highlight the pages in the list, instead of selecting the check boxes.

In the bottom of the Globalization Tool, click the Reporting tab.

You generate the Sitemap report in the middle section of this tab, which is highlighted in the following screen capture:

Select the languages for which to generate the report for the highlighted pages in the list.

To select multiple adjacent languages, press and hold the Shift key.
To select multiple non-adjacent languages, press and hold the Ctrl key.

Click Sitemap Report.

The Submit a new task dialog box opens.

The generated report will be displayed as a task on the Backend Tasks page.

Define the parameters for this task:

Field	escription
Priority	One of the following priority levels for this task: * Normal: The Connector generates the corresponding report with normal priority. * Urgent: The Connector generates the corresponding report before generating reports for tasks with Normal priority. * Wait for approval: This task must be approved before the Connector generates the corresponding report.
Task Name	The name of the report, as it will be displayed on the Backend Tasks page.
Notification	To receive an email notification when the report is generated and ready for viewing, select the Need email notification check box.
Email addresses	If you selected the Need email notification check box, described above, enter the email addresses that will receive a notification when the report is generated and ready for viewing.

Click Submit.

A message box states that the task has been saved.

Click OK to close the message box.

2.7.1.5 - Translation Report

You can generate the Translation report. This report displays the translation history for a date range for the specified LSPs (translation providers) and TMSs.

Note: This report does not reference highlighted pages.

To generate the Translation report:

In the bottom of the Globalization Tool, click the Reporting tab.

You generate the Translation report in the rightmost section of this tab, which is highlighted in the following screen capture:

In the From and To fields, select the date range to include in the generated report.
In the LSP Filter section, select the LSPs (translation providers) for which to generate the report.

To select multiple adjacent LSPs, press and hold the Shift key.
To select multiple non-adjacent LSPs, press and hold the Ctrl key.
To select all LSPs, click All.
To clear all selected LSPs, click None.

In the TMS Filter section, select the TMSs for which to generate the report.

To select multiple adjacent TMSs , press and hold the Shift key.
To select multiple non-adjacent TMSs , press and hold the Ctrl key.
To select all TMSs , click All.
To clear all selected TMSs , click None.

Click Translation Report.

The Submit a new task dialog box opens.

The generated report will be displayed as a task on the Backend Tasks page.

Define the parameters for this task:

Field	Description
Priority	One of the following priority levels for this task: * Normal: The Connector generates the corresponding report with normal priority. * Urgent: The Connector generates the corresponding report before generating reports for tasks with Normal priority. * Wait for approval: This task must be approved before the Connector generates the corresponding report.
Task Name	The name of the report, as it will be displayed on the Backend Tasks page.
Notification	To receive an email notification when the report is generated and ready for viewing, select the Need email notification check box.
Email addresses	If you selected the Need email notification check box, described above, enter the email addresses that will receive a notification when the report is generated and ready for viewing.

Click Submit.

A message box states that the task has been saved.

Click OK to close the message box.

2.7.2 - Updating Page Properties for Multiple Pages

You use the Page Property Updating tab of the Globalization Tool to update page properties for multiple pages that you highlight in the page list in the Globalization Tool, including multiple language copies of those pages.

Note: If the Connector is configured to translate and copy metadata fields, these are displayed in the right side of the tab. For information about this feature, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

To update page properties for multiple pages:

In the Globalization Tool, display and highlight the pages for which you want to update the page properties. For detailed instructions, see Performing Actions on Multiple Pages and Digital Assets.

To highlight a page, click in the corresponding row.

Note: Do not click the actual path in the Path column, because that is a link to the page.

To highlight multiple adjacent pages, press and hold the Shift key.
To highlight multiple non-adjacent pages, press and hold the Ctrl key.
To highlight all the pages in the list, click Highlight All.
To remove the highlight of all the pages in the list, click Remove Highlighted.
To update the numbers of selected pages, highlighted pages, and total pages at the top-left corner of the list, click Re-Count.
1. The number after the check box displays the number of selected pages.
2. The number after the highlight displays the number of highlighted pages.
3. The number after the slash ( / ) displays the total number of pages.

For example:

Important: Ensure that you highlight the pages in the list, instead of selecting the check boxes.

In the bottom of the Globalization Tool, click the Page Property Updating tab.

In the Update Options dropdown list, select one of the following:

Highlighted Page: The Connector will update the page properties for the highlighted pages.
Language Page (of Highlighted): The Connector will update the page properties for highlighted pages in the languages selected in the Language section. All source and target languages defined for your team profile are displayed in this list.
Highlighted Page and Language Page: The Connector will update the page properties for the highlighted pages and in the languages selected in the Language section. All source and target languages defined for your team profile are displayed in this list.

In the Language section, select the language copies of the highlighted pages that will have updated page properties. This is relevant only if Language Page (of Highlighted) or Highlighted Page and Language Page is selected in the Update Options dropdown list, as described in the previous step.

To select multiple adjacent languages, press and hold the Shift key.
To select multiple non-adjacent languages, press and hold the Ctrl key.
To select all languages, click All.
To clear all selected languages, click Clear.

In the right side of the tab, you specify the page properties to update and their values. For a description of these page properties, refer to the Adobe Experience Manager documentation, available at: https://helpx.adobe.com/experience-manager/6-3/sites/authoring/using/editing-page-properties.html.

To remove a value from a page property, type [del] in the corresponding field.
To remove a page property, type [remove] in the corresponding field.
To clear all values, including those in the Language section, click Clear.
To display additional page-property fields, click More data for update. The page expands, displaying additional fields. Click this button again to collapse the page.

Click Update.

The Submit a new task dialog box opens.

Updating page properties will be displayed as a task on the Backend Tasks page.

Define the parameters for this task:

Field	Description
Priority	The priority level for this task. This is one of the following: * Normal: The Connector executes this task with normal priority. * Urgent: The Connector executes this task before executing tasks with Normal priority. * Wait for approval: This task must be approved before the Connector executes it.
Task Name	The name of the task, as it will be displayed on the Backend Tasks page.
Notification	To receive an email notification when the task is executed, select the Need email notification check box.
Email addresses	If you selected the Need email notification check box, described above, enter the email addresses that will receive a notification when the task is executed.

Click Submit.

A message box states that the task has been saved.

Click OK to close the message box.

You can view your task on the Backend Tasks page, which you open by clicking Tasks in the Lionbridge Connector rail. If the task requires approval before the report is generated, you can approve it there. For detailed instructions, see Managing Tasks and Accessing Reports.

2.7.3 - Updating Metadata of Multiple Digital Assets

You use the DAM Metadata Update tab of the Globalization Tool to update the metadata of multiple digital assets that you highlight in the list in the Globalization Tool, including multiple language copies of those digital assets.

To update metadata of multiple digital assets:

In the Globalization Tool, display and highlight the digital assets for which you want to update the metadata. For detailed instructions, see Performing Actions on Multiple Pages and Digital Assets.

To highlight a digital asset, click in the corresponding row.

Note: Do not click the actual path in the Path column, because that is a link to the digital asset.

To highlight multiple adjacent digital assets, press and hold the Shift key.
To highlight multiple non-adjacent digital assets, press and hold the Ctrl key.
To highlight all the digital assets in the list, click Highlight All.
To remove the highlight of all the digital assets in the list, click Remove Highlighted.
To update the numbers of selected digital assets, highlighted digital assets, and total digital assets at the top-left corner of the list, click Re-Count.
1. The number after the check box displays the number of selected digital assets.
2. The number after the highlight displays the number of highlighted digital assets.
3. The number after the slash ( / ) displays the total number of digital assets.

For example:

Important: Ensure that you highlight the pages in the list, instead of selecting the check boxes.

In the bottom of the Globalization Tool, click the DAM Metadata Update tab.

In the Update Options dropdown list, select one of the following:

Highlighted Asset: The Connector will update the metadata of the highlighted digital assets.
Language Asset(of Highlighted): The Connector will update the metadata of the highlighted digital assets in the languages selected in the Language section. All target languages defined for your team profile are displayed in this list.

Note: Languages that are defined only as source languages for your team profile are not displayed here.

Highlighted Asset and Language Asset: The Connector will update the metadata for highlighted digital assets and in the languages selected in the Language section. All source and target languages defined for your team profile are displayed in this list.

In the Language section, select the language copies of the highlighted assets that will have updated metadata. This is relevant only if Language Asset (of Highlighted) or Highlighted Asset and Language Asset is selected in the Update Options dropdown list, as described in the previous step.

To select multiple adjacent languages, press and hold the Shift key.
To select multiple non-adjacent languages, press and hold the Ctrl key.
To select all languages, click All.
To clear all selected languages, click Clear.

In the right side of the tab, you specify the metadata fields to update and their new values. These fields are defined in the DAM Metadata Configuration section of the Advanced Settings page. For detailed instructions, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

To remove a value from a metadata field, type [del] in that field.
To remove a metadata field, type [remove] in that field.
To clear all values, including those in the Language section, click Clear.

Click Update.

The Submit a new task dialog box opens.

DAM metadata updating will be displayed as a task on the Backend Tasks page.

Define the parameters for this task:

Field	Description
Priority	The priority level for this task. This is one of the following: * Normal: The Connector executes this task with normal priority. * Urgent: The Connector executes this task before executing tasks with Normal priority. * Wait for approval: This task must be approved before the Connector executes it.
Task Name	The name of the task, as it will be displayed on the Backend Tasks page.
Notification	To receive an email notification when the task is executed, select the Need email notification check box.
Email addresses	If you selected the Need email notification check box, described above, enter the email addresses that will receive a notification when the task is executed.

Click Submit.

A message box states that the task has been saved.

Click OK to close the message box.

You can view your task on the Backend Tasks page, which you open by clicking Tasks in the Lionbridge Connector rail. If the task requires approval before the report is generated, you can approve it there. For detailed instructions, see Managing Tasks and Accessing Reports.

2.7.4 - Activating Multiple Pages

You use the Activation tab of the Globalization Tool to perform the same action on multiple pages that you highlight in the list in the Globalization Tool, including multiple language copies of those items. You can perform the following types of actions:

activate pages
deactivate pages
set future activation date of pages
lock pages
unlock pages
create a new version of pages
delete pages and the corresponding translated pages
import page content from XML
export page content to XML

To perform actions on multiple pages:

In the Globalization Tool, display and highlight the pages on which you want to perform the actions. For detailed instructions, see Performing Actions on Multiple Pages and Digital Assets.

To highlight a page, click in the corresponding row.

Note: Do not click the actual path in the Path column, because that is a link to the page.

To highlight multiple adjacent pages, press and hold the Shift key.
To highlight multiple non-adjacent pages, press and hold the Ctrl key.
To highlight all the pages in the list, click Highlight All.
To remove the highlight all the pages in the list, click Remove Highlighted.
To update the numbers of selected, highlighted, and total pages at the top-left corner of the list, click Re-Count.
1. The number after the check box displays the number of selected pages.
2. The number after the highlight displays the number of highlighted pages.
3. The number after the slash ( / ) displays the total number of pages.

For example:

Important: Ensure that you highlight the pages in the list, instead of selecting the check boxes.

In the bottom of the Globalization Tool, click the Activation tab.

In the dropdown list at the top of the page, select one of the following:

Highlighted pages for languages: The Connector will perform the action on the highlighted pages in the languages selected in the section below the dropdown list. All source and target languages defined for your team profile are displayed in this list.
Highlighted pages only: The Connector will perform the action on the highlighted pages.

In the section below the dropdown list, select the language copies of the highlighted pages on which you will perform the action. This is relevant only if Highlighted pages for languages was selected in the dropdown list, as described in the previous step.

To select multiple adjacent languages, press and hold the Shift key.
To select multiple non-adjacent languages, press and hold the Ctrl key.

Do one of the following to specify which action to perform:

To activate the specified pages, in the Activate/Deactivate section, click Activate.
To deactivate the specified pages, in the Activate/Deactivate section, click Deactivate.
To set the future activation date of the specified pages, in the Activate Later section: a. Click in the Activation Date field and select the activation date in the calendar that opens. b. In the adjacent dropdown list, select the activation time. c. Click Activate Later.
To lock the specified pages, in the Page Lock/Unlock section, click Lock.
To unlock the specified pages, in the Page Lock/Unlock section, click Unlock.
To create a new version for the specified pages, in the Versioning section, click Create new version.
To delete the specified pages, in the Page Deletion section, click Delete highlighted pages and their translated pages.
To export page content for the specified pages to XML, on the right side of the tab, select the languages for the language copies of the pages to export, and then click Export XML.
To import page content for the specified pages from XML, on the right side of the tab, select the languages for the language copies of the pages to import, and then click Import XML.

Click Update.

The Submit a new task dialog box opens.

The action will be displayed as a task on the Backend Tasks page.

Define the parameters for this task:

Field	Description
Priority	The priority level for this task. This is one of the following: * Normal: The Connector executes this task with normal priority. * Urgent: The Connector executes this task before executing tasks with Normal priority. * Wait for approval: This task must be approved before the Connector executes it.
Task Name	The name of the task, as it will be displayed on the Backend Tasks page.
Notification	To receive an email notification when the task is executed, select the Need email notification check box.
Email addresses	If you selected the Need email notification check box, described above, enter the email addresses that will receive a notification when the task is executed.

Click Submit.

A message box states that the task has been saved.

Click OK to close the message box.

2.7.5 - Copying Metadata to Multiple Pages

You use the Copy Metadata tab of the Globalization Tool to copy metadata to multiple pages that you highlight in the page list in the Globalization Tool, including multiple language copies of those pages. This includes copying metadata from source Blueprint pages to the corresponding livecopy language copies of those pages.

As an optional next step, you can then send out for translation, as a single job, the metadata that was copied over. For details, see Sending Metadata in Multiple Pages for Translation.

Note: In the Page Metadata Configuration section of the Advanced Settings page, you configure which metadata fields are available for selection in the Copy Metadata tab. For detailed configuration instructions, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

To copy metadata to multiple pages:

In the Globalization Tool, display and highlight the pages to which you want to copy metadata. For detailed instructions, see Performing Actions on Multiple Pages and Digital Assets.

To highlight a page, click in the corresponding row.

Note: Do not click the actual path in the Path column, because that is a link to the page.

To highlight multiple adjacent pages, press and hold the Shift key.
To highlight multiple non-adjacent pages, press and hold the Ctrl key.
To highlight all the pages in the list, click Highlight All.
To remove the highlight of all the pages in the list, click Remove Highlighted.
To update the numbers of selected pages, highlighted pages, and total pages at the top-left corner of the list, click Re-Count.
1. The number after the check box displays the number of selected pages.
2. The number after the highlight displays the number of highlighted pages.
3. The number after the slash ( / ) displays the total number of pages.

For example:

Important: Ensure that you highlight the pages in the list, instead of selecting the check boxes.

In the bottom of the Globalization Tool, click the Copy Metadata tab.

In the Metadata Updating Options dropdown list, select one of the following:

Copy from highlighted pages to languages: The Connector will copy the specified metadata from the highlighted pages to the corresponding language copies of those pages. You specify the languages in the section below the list. All source and target languages defined for your team profile are displayed in this list.
Copy from Blueprint for languages: The Connector copies to the livecopy pages specified in the Language list from the corresponding livecopy source pages.

In the section below the Metadata Updating Options dropdown list, select the language copies of the highlighted pages to which the Connector will copy the specified metadata.

To select multiple adjacent languages, press and hold the Shift key.
To select multiple non-adjacent languages, press and hold the Ctrl key.

In the Metadata fields to copy section, you select which metadata fields to copy.

Select the check boxes for the metadata fields to copy, or select the Check All check box to select the check boxes for all available metadata fields.

Note: By default, no fields are configured. You must configure these fields in the Page Metadata Configuration section of the Advanced Settings page. For detailed instructions, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

Click Update metadata.

The Submit a new task dialog box opens.

Copying metadata will be displayed as a task on the Backend Tasks page.

Define the parameters for this task:

Field	Description
Priority	The priority level for this task. This is one of the following: * Normal: The Connector executes this task with normal priority. * Urgent: The Connector executes this task before executing tasks with Normal priority. * Wait for approval: This task must be approved before the Connector executes it.
Task Name	The name of the task, as it will be displayed on the Backend Tasks page.
Notification	To receive an email notification when the task is executed, select the Need email notification check box.
Email addresses	If you selected the Need email notification check box, described above, enter the email addresses that will receive a notification when the task is executed.

Click Submit.

A message box states that the task has been saved.

Click OK to close the message box.

Important: If you want to send out for translation the metadata that was copied over, first ensure that the Copy metadata task you submitted, described above, has completed. Next, follow the instructions in Sending Metadata in Multiple Pages for Translation.

2.7.5.1 - Sending Metadata in Multiple Pages for Translation

After you copy metadata to multiple pages in the Copy Metadata tab of the Globalization Tool, as described in Copying Metadata to Multiple Pages, you can send the copied metadata for translation as a single job.

Important: Ensure that the Copy metadata task is complete before sending out the copied metadata for translation.

Note: In the Page Metadata Configuration section of the Advanced Settings page, you configure which metadata fields are available for selection in the Copy Metadata tab. For detailed configuration instructions, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

To send for translation metadata that was copied to multiple pages:

In the Globalization Tool, display and highlight the pages to which you want to copy metadata. For detailed instructions, see Performing Actions on Multiple Pages and Digital Assets.

To highlight a page, click in the corresponding row.

Note: Do not click the actual path in the Path column, because that is a link to the page.

To highlight multiple adjacent pages, press and hold the Shift key.
To highlight multiple non-adjacent pages, press and hold the Ctrl key.
To highlight all the pages in the list, click Highlight All.
To remove the highlight of all the pages in the list, click Remove Highlighted.
To update the numbers of selected pages, highlighted pages, and total pages at the top-left corner of the list, click Re-Count.
1. The number after the check box displays the number of selected pages.
2. The number after the highlight displays the number of highlighted pages.
3. The number after the slash ( / ) displays the total number of pages.

For example:

Important: Ensure that you highlight the pages in the list, instead of selecting the check boxes.

Tip: Ensure that you highlight the same pages that you highlighted previously, when you copied over the metadata, as described in Copying Metadata to Multiple Pages.

In the bottom of the Globalization Tool, click the Copy Metadata tab.

Note: When sending out metadata for translation, the Connector ignores the setting in the Metadata Updating Options dropdown list. That setting is relevant only when copying metadata.

In the section below the Metadata Updating Options dropdown list, select the language copies of the highlighted pages to which the Connector will copy the specified metadata.

Tip: Select the same languages that you selected previously, when you copied over the metadata.

To select multiple adjacent languages, press and hold the Shift key.
To select multiple non-adjacent languages, press and hold the Ctrl key.

In the Metadata fields to copy section, you select which metadata fields to copy.

Select the check boxes for the metadata fields to copy, or select the Check All check box to select the check boxes for all available metadata fields.

Tip: Select the same languages that you selected previously, when you copied over the metadata.

Note: By default, no fields are configured. You must configure these fields in the Page Metadata Configuration section of the Advanced Settings page. For detailed instructions, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

In the Metadata translation section, enter the following translation settings:

Field	Description
Source language	Select the source language for translation. The Connector will send metadata in this source language for translation.
Choose LSP	Select your translation provider (LSP). If you select Lionbridge Freeway, the section expands to display additional fields.
Special Instruction	Any additional instructions for Freeway, which are sent as metadata. Available only if the selected translation provider in the Choose LSP box, above, is the Lionbridge Freeway Type.
Analysis Code	The analysis codes for the translation. Displayed only if Lionbridge Freeway is selected in the Choose LSP box, above. You specify the analysis codes that are relevant to your content. Your Lionbridge setup determines which analysis codes are available for you to specify, and the values available for selection for each analysis code. In this example, the Color, Functional Team, and Reference 3 analysis codes are available for you to specify.
Translation job name	Your name for this translation job. By default this includes information that this is a metadata translation job, the username, date, and time when you created the job, for example: Metadata Translation by [admin] @ 2017-02-16 4.11 PM. This is stored in the CQJobName attribute in the XML that the Connector sends to the translation provider.
Job description	Additional information about this job. This is stored in the CQJobDescription attribute in the XML that the Connector sends to the translation provider.
Deadline	The date you are requesting for the translated content to return. Click in the field and select a date in the calendar that opens. This information is sent to the translation provider as metadata of the translation package. Recommendation: Discuss whether to use this feature with your translation provider(s).
Use Local TM?	This feature determines whether to check each component in the source version of the item for any content changes, and send only changed components out for translation. If a component was previously translated and it has not changed, then the Connector does not send it for translation again: Instead, it uses the stored translation. This feature reduces the quantity of content that the Connector sends to translation providers, which reduces your cost. However, it needs the Connector translation backup data, and it increases the Connector processing time before sending out the items for translation. * If this check box is selectedcolumn has a value of Yes, the Connector checks whether content was already translated before sending it out for translation. * If this check box is clearedcolumn is blank, the Connector sends out content for translation without checking whether it has already been translated.
PO Reference	The purchase order reference number for this translation job.
Content Type	You can tag the content in a translation job as a specific content type. Depending on your company’s configuration, the Content API Platform may send the content to a specific translation provider based on the content type. Select one of the following content types: * Marketing * Technical * Legal Note: You may see different content types if your company has configured custom content types.
Send for quote first	Select this check box to inform the translation provider that you want to receive a quote before the translation process starts. Note: This check box is displayed only if the selected translation provider is configured to support providing a quote before the translation process starts.
Notification emails	Enter one or more email addresses that will receive notification when the content leaves Adobe Experience Manager and when it returns to Adobe Experience Manager. Use a comma to separate multiple email addresses.

Click Translate metadata.

The Connector sends the translation job to the translation provider you specified.

2.7.6 - Running Workflows on Multiple Pages

You use the Run Workflows tab of the Globalization Tool to run workflows on multiple pages that you highlight in the page list in the Globalization Tool, including multiple language copies of those pages.

Note: In the Workflow Selections section of the Advanced Settings page, you configure which workflows are available for selection in the Run Workflows tab. For detailed configuration instructions, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

To run workflows on multiple pages:

In the Globalization Tool, display and highlight the pages on which you want to run workflows. For detailed instructions, see Performing Actions on Multiple Pages and Digital Assets.

To highlight a page, click in the corresponding row.

Note: Do not click the actual path in the Path column, because that is a link to the page.

To highlight multiple adjacent pages, press and hold the Shift key.
To highlight multiple non-adjacent pages, press and hold the Ctrl key.
To highlight all the pages in the list, click Highlight All.
To remove the highlight of all the pages in the list, click Remove Highlighted.
To update the numbers of selected pages, highlighted pages, and total pages at the top-left corner of the list, click Re-Count.
1. The number after the check box displays the number of selected pages.
2. The number after the highlight displays the number of highlighted pages.
3. The number after the slash ( / ) displays the total number of pages.

For example:

Important: Ensure that you highlight the pages in the list, instead of selecting the check boxes.

In the bottom of the Globalization Tool, click the Run Workflows tab.

In the Select pages dropdown list, select one of the following:

Highlighted pages for languages: The Connector will run the selected workflow on the highlighted pages for the corresponding language copies of those pages. You specify the languages in the section below the list. All source and target languages defined for your team profile are displayed in this list.
Highlighted pages only: The Connector will run the selected workflow on the highlighted pages.

In the section below the Select pages dropdown list, select the language copies of the highlighted pages on which the Connector will run the selected workflow. This is relevant only if you selected Highlighted pages for languages from the Select pages dropdown list.

To select multiple adjacent languages, press and hold the Shift key.
To select multiple non-adjacent languages, press and hold the Ctrl key.

In the Run Workflow section, you select the workflow to run from the Select workflow to start dropdown list. When you select a workflow in the list, its description is displayed below.

Note: By default, no workflows are configured for selection. You must configure these workflows in the Workflow Selections section of the Advanced Settings page. For detailed instructions, refer to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

Click Start workflow.

The Submit a new task dialog box opens.

Running the workflow will be displayed as a task on the Backend Tasks page.

Define the parameters for this task:

Field	Description
Priority	The priority level for this task. This is one of the following: * Normal: The Connector executes this task with normal priority. * Urgent: The Connector executes this task before executing tasks with Normal priority. * Wait for approval: This task must be approved before the Connector executes it.
Task Name	The name of the task, as it will be displayed on the Backend Tasks page.
Notification	To receive an email notification when the task is executed, select the Need email notification check box.
Email addresses	If you selected the Need email notification check box, described above, enter the email addresses that will receive a notification when the task is executed.

Click Submit.

A message box states that the task has been saved.

Click OK to close the message box.

2.7.7 - Performing Rollout Tasks on Multiple Pages

You use the Rollout tab of the Globalization Tool to perform the following rollout tasks on multiple pages, including language versions of those pages:

Rollout Task	For Detailed Instructions, See…
rolling out changes from the highlighted source (Blueprint) pages to the target (live copy), including language versions of those pages	Rolling Out Changes to Multiple Pages
resuming livecopy relationships from the highlighted source (Blueprint) pages to the target (live copy), including language versions of those pages	Resuming or Suspending Livecopy Relationships on Multiple Pages
suspending livecopy relationships between the highlighted source (Blueprint) pages to the target (live copy), including language versions of those pages

2.7.7.1 - Rolling Out Changes to Multiple Pages

You use the MSM Rollout section in the Rollout tab of the Globalization Tool to roll out changes from the highlighted source (Blueprint) pages to the target (live copy), including language versions of those pages.

To roll out changes to multiple pages:

In the Globalization Tool, display and highlight the Blueprint pages you want to roll out. For detailed instructions, see Performing Actions on Multiple Pages and Digital Assets.

To highlight a page, click in the corresponding row.

Note: Do not click the actual path in the Path column, because that is a link to the page.

To highlight multiple adjacent pages, press and hold the Shift key.
To highlight multiple non-adjacent pages, press and hold the Ctrl key.
To highlight all the pages in the list, click Highlight All.
To remove the highlight of all the pages in the list, click Remove Highlighted.
To update the numbers of selected pages, highlighted pages, and total pages at the top-left corner of the list, click Re-Count.
1. The number after the check box displays the number of selected pages.
2. The number after the highlight displays the number of highlighted pages.
3. The number after the slash ( / ) displays the total number of pages.

For example:

Important: Ensure that you highlight the pages in the list, instead of selecting the check boxes.

In the bottom of the Globalization Tool, click the Rollout tab.

In the MSM Rollout section, select the language version of the target (live copy) pages to which the Connector will roll out the Blueprint pages.

To select multiple adjacent languages, press and hold the Shift key.
To select multiple non-adjacent languages, press and hold the Ctrl key.

Click Rollout.

A message box states that the Connector will roll out the highlighted pages to the specified target languages.

Click OK to close the message box.

A progress bar indicates the rollout progress.

2.7.7.2 - Resuming or Suspending Livecopy Relationships on Multiple Pages

You use the MSM Relationship section in the Rollout tab of the Globalization Tool to resume or suspend livecopy relationships from the highlighted source (Blueprint) pages to the target (live copy), including language versions of those pages.

Note: The livecopy relationship is resumed, rather than created, based on the assumption that the page was a livecopy of the Blueprint. Similarly, a livecopy relationship is suspended, rather than deleted. The functionality described in this section is relevant only for pages that are already in a livecopy relationship. It is not applicable to non-related pages.

To resume or suspend livecopy relationships on multiple pages:

In the Globalization Tool, display and highlight the source (Blueprint) pages for which you want to resume or suspend livecopy relationships. For detailed instructions, see Performing Actions on Multiple Pages and Digital Assets.

To highlight a page, click in the corresponding row.

Note: Do not click the actual path in the Path column, because that is a link to the page.

To highlight multiple adjacent pages, press and hold the Shift key.
To highlight multiple non-adjacent pages, press and hold the Ctrl key.
To highlight all the pages in the list, click Highlight All.
To remove the highlight of all the pages in the list, click Remove Highlighted.
To update the numbers of selected pages, highlighted pages, and total pages at the top-left corner of the list, click Re-Count.
1. The number after the check box displays the number of selected pages.
2. The number after the highlight displays the number of highlighted pages.
3. The number after the slash ( / ) displays the total number of pages.

For example:

Important: Ensure that you highlight the pages in the list, instead of selecting the check boxes.

In the bottom of the Globalization Tool, click the MSM tab.

In the MSM Relationship section, select one of the following options from the dropdown list:
- Highlighted pages for languages: The Connector will resume or suspend livecopy relationships on the highlighted pages for the corresponding language versions of those pages. You specify the languages in the section below the list. All source and target languages defined for your team profile are displayed in this list.
- Highlighted pages only: The Connector will resume or suspend livecopy relationships on the highlighted pages.
If you selected Highlighted pages for languages in the previous step, then select the language versions of the Blueprint pages for which the Connector will resume or suspend livecopy relationships.
- To select multiple adjacent languages, press and hold the Shift key.
- To select multiple non-adjacent languages, press and hold the Ctrl key.
Do one of the following:
1. To resume the livecopy relationships, click Resume.
2. To suspend the livecopy relationships, click Suspend.

The Submit a new task dialog box opens.

The MSM task will be displayed on the Backend Tasks page.

Define the parameters for this task:

Field	Description
Priority	The priority level for this task. This is one of the following: * Normal: The Connector executes this task with normal priority. * Urgent: The Connector executes this task before executing tasks with Normal priority. * Wait for approval: This task must be approved before the Connector executes it.
Task Name	The name of the task, as it will be displayed on the Backend Tasks page.
Notification	To receive an email notification when the task is executed, select the Need email notification check box.
Email addresses	If you selected the Need email notification check box, described above, enter the email addresses that will receive a notification when the task is executed.

Click Submit.

A message box states that the task has been saved.

Click OK to close the message box.

2.8 - Managing Tasks and Accessing Reports

If you created a task in the Globalization Tool, you can view and update the priority of this task in the Backend Tasks page. You can also access generated reports from this page.

To manage tasks and access generated reports:

Do one of the following to open the Backend Tasks page:

In the Touch-Optimized UI of Adobe Experience Manager, click the Tools icon and then click Lionbridge Connector in the Adobe Experience Manager rail. (This opens the Connector in a new browser tab.) Then, click Tasks in the Lionbridge Connector rail.
In the Classic UI of Adobe Experience Manager, scroll down and click Lionbridge Connector in the right pane. Then, click Tasks in the Lionbridge Connector rail.
In your Web browser, navigate to /content/ctctranslation/tasks.html on your Adobe Experience Manager instance.

The Tasks tab of the Backend Tasks page opens.

This tab displays tasks that were created in the Globalization Tool. If your task generated a report, you can access it here.

Optional. You can filter the list of tasks by date.

In the Period and to date fields, enter the date range of when the tasks were submitted, in the following format: YYYY-MM-DD, or click in the date fields and select the dates in the calendar that opens.
Click the Refresh icon to update the list based on your selection and with any new tasks that were added since opening the page.

The following information is displayed about each task in the list:

Column	Description
Name	The name of the task, which you created when you submitted it.
Type	The type of task. * For a report-generation task, you can see a list and description of report types in Generating Reports about Multiple Pages. * For other tasks, this is related to the type of action you performed before submitting the task.
Details	Click the ellipsis button to display additional information about the parameters of the task. This information is displayed in the pane below the list. The parameters that are displayed depend on the type of task. For detailed information about the report parameters, see the description of the specific report type: * For a report-generation task, you can see a list and description of report parameters: * Field Report * Lock Report * Content Report * Sitemap Report * Translation Report * For other tasks,refer to the description of the relevant user interface in a tab at the bottom of the Globalization Tool.
Created	The date and time that this task was submitted, in the following format: YYYY-MM-DD h:mm AA, where AA is two upper-case characters reflecting a.m. (after midnight) or p.m. (after noon).
By	The username of the user who created and submitted the task.
Priority	The priority level for this task. This is one of the following: * Normal: The Connector executes this task with normal priority. * Urgent: The Connector executes this task before executing tasks with Normal priority. * Wait for approval: This task must be approved before the Connector executes it.
Status	The status of the report-generation task. This is one of the following: * Waiting: The task has not yet been completed, so the report has not yet been generated. This may be because the task priority is Wait for approval, or it may be because there are currently other tasks being processed. * Completed: The task has been completed, and the report has been generated. * Cancelled: The task has been cancelled, and the corresponding report will not be generated.
Report	If the task has Completed status, you can view the corresponding generated report by clicking the link to it.
Information	If the task has Completed status, this displays the date and time that this report was generated, in the following format: YYYY-MM-DD h:mm AA, where AA is two upper-case characters reflecting a.m. (after midnight) or p.m. (after noon).

You can change the priority level of tasks if they have not yet been executed. This step is required for tasks submitted with the Wait for approval priority level.

Note: You cannot change the priority level for a task with Cancelled or Completed status.

a. In the list, highlight the tasks whose priority level you want to change. For example, highlight the tasks with the Wait for approval priority level.

Important: Do not select the check boxes for the tasks.

To select multiple adjacent tasks, press and hold the Shift key.
To select multiple non-adjacent tasks, press and hold the Ctrl key.

b. In the Priority dropdown list in the top-left corner of the page, select the new priority level to apply to the highlighted tasks. For example, select the Normal priority level.

c. Click Change for highlighted tasks.

The priority changes for the highlighted tasks. If any tasks with the Wait for approval priority level now have the Normal priority level, they are ready to be executed.

You can also perform the following actions on this page:

To update the list for recently added tasks or for changes to the date filter at the top of the page, click the Refresh icon .
To view or download a generated report in XLS format, click the link in the Report column.
To view the parameters of a task, click the ellipsis button in the Details column.

The parameters are displayed in the bottom pane of the page, below the task list.

To cancel tasks for reports that the Connector has not yet executed:

Important: You cannot execute tasks (including generating reports) for tasks that you cancel.

Highlight the tasks to cancel. The tasks must have Waiting status.

Important: Do not select the check boxes for the tasks.

To select all tasks, click the Check All button at the top of the page.
To select multiple adjacent tasks, press and hold the Shift key.
To select multiple non-adjacent tasks, press and hold the Ctrl key.
To clear all selected tasks, click the Uncheck All button at the top of the page.

Click Cancel highlighted tasks.

The status of the tasks changes to Cancelled.

To delete tasks:

Important: Download any generated report for a task before you delete it. Otherwise, you will lose the report.

Select the check boxes for the tasks to delete.

Tip: To select all tasks, click the Check All button at the top of the page.

Click Delete selected tasks.

A message box confirms that you want to delete the tasks.

Click OK to continue.

The tasks are deleted. If the tasks had Completed status, the corresponding generated reports are also deleted.

3 - Adobe Experience Manager Translation Integration Framework

3.1 - Welcome to the Connector

Welcome to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Translation Integration Framework (AEM TIF) version 1.0.0. This is Lionbridge’s connector between Adobe Experience Manager Translation Integration Framework and the Clay Tablet.

3.1.1 - Terminology


Freeway	The name of the Lionbridge translation portal for submitting content to and retrieving content from the Lionbridge translation provider.
FTP Server	File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a standard network protocol used to transfer files from one host to another host over a TCP-based network, such as the Internet. Translation providers may receive and send files for translation using an FTP server.
Lionbridge	The publisher of the Freeway translation portal and a translation provider. Users connect to the Freeway translation portal to submit content to and retrieve content from the Lionbridge translation provider.
Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager Translation Integration Framework (“Connector”)	The connector software that Lionbridge has developed and provides, which plugs into your Adobe Experience Manager Translation Integration Framework instance to provide connectivity to the Lionbridge translation services. In this document it is referred to as the Connector. This is the software you are configuring as you work through this document.
MT	Machine translation. The translation provider can be a machine translation service, such as Google Translate.
Producer	Content system that sends content or documents out for translation. In this case, this is Adobe Experience Manager Translation Integration Framework.
Provider	A provider of translation services. The delivery of assets to the provider may be via an FTP server or a TMS connector.
TMS	Translation management system that the translation provider users.

3.1.2 - How the Connector works with AEM TIF

The Lionbridge Connector (Connector) is an important part of the Lionbridge translation solution.

The Connector is installed on the AEM content system. Its functionality is displayed to the users as part of AEM TIF.

Your translation systems architecture might look like the configuration above. It may have additional content systems or translation providers, but the core concepts remain the same. If your translation provider is Lionbridge, it is accessed via Freeway.

During implementation, Lionbridge Connector Support works with you and your translation providers to configure and test the other elements of your translation solution, which are the connections to your translation providers' systems.

3.1.3 - Using this Guide

Purpose of this guide

This guide describes everything you need to know to configure Lionbridge Connector (Connector) for AEM TIF.

Who should use this guide

This guide is intended for Adobe Experience Manager administrators and system integrators.

What you should already know

Documentation conventions

This guide uses the following conventions:

Convention	Description
Bold	Highlights screen elements such as buttons, menu items, and fields.
Courier	Highlights input, file names, and paths.
Italics	Highlights terms for emphasis, variables, or document titles.
>	Indicates a menu choice. For example, “Select Admin Tools > Configuration.”

3.1.4 - How to Contact Lionbridge Connector Support

How to Contact Lionbridge Connector Support

You can submit a support ticket either:

by emailing connectors@lionbridge.com
from the Lionbridge Connector Zendesk page https://lionbridge-connectors.zendesk.com/

3.2 - Lionbridge Connector for AEM TIF Installation Guide

There are 4 sections for Lionbridge Connector for AEM TIF:

Note: AEM Cloud connector has the TIF translation build-in, there is no separate package needed. In case TIF has not been bundled along with AEM Cloud, perform the following steps.

How to Install Lionbridge TIF Connector Package for Adobe Experience Manager (AEM) Cloud

Log in to the AEM using your User name and Password.
Click Tools (Hammer icon), select General, and Click CRXDE (Full repository access with code editor and nodes/properties management) option.
In CRXDE home page header. Click Package and install Lionbridge Translation Connector for AEM Cloud.

Click Upload Package to upload, Lionbridge TIF connector package name as lionbridge-connector.all-1.0-SNAPSHOT.

You can browse and choose lionbridge-connector.all-1.0-SNAPSHOT.zip package for installation in AEM Cloud.

3.3 - To Validate global project Configuration with Content API's Provider

To configure Lionbridge Translation Connector for AEM Cloud.

On AEM, click Tools (Hammer icon), select Cloud Services, and click Translation Cloud Services (Translation Cloud Service Configurations) option.
Click conf (Do not check) and click global (Do not check). You can see Lionbridge Translation Connector installed. Click Lionbridge Connector (Do not check) and click Create button appearing on the top right corner (See the following figure).

See the following figure if you are using AEM on-premise version:
In the Create Configuration box, enter the the Title and Name then click Create.
To configure, select Licensed Key from the dropdown according to the requirement (Note: Only one Licensed key will be provided to one customer) and click Save & Close.
The Lionbridge Connector message is displayed as The configuration has been saved.

3.4 - Creating Translation Project with TIF Connector for AEM Cloud

On AEM, click Navigation (compass icon) and select Projects.
To create new project for translation, click Create, and select Project.
Select Translation Project (Template) from the available template and click Next.
To configure the project for Translation. You need to configure Basic and Advance (mandatory) sections.
- In Basic section, enter the following details:
  1. Title: Enter the valid title name (mandatory field).
  2. Description: Enter the description.
  3. Start Date: Select the start date.
  4. Due Date: Select the due date.
  5. User: Select any User from the dropdown toggle according to the requirement (example: select Administrator, Owner), and click Add (to add the Members under User).
- In Advanced section, enter the following details:
  1. Name: By default Name is taken from Basic section.
  2. Source Language: You can select any language according to the requirement (example: Select English).
  3. Target Language: You can select multiple languages as per the requirement to which you need to translate from the dropdown (Example: Select French and Italian).
  4. Cloud Configuration: Select Configuration Path (You can select global or lionbridgeexchangepartnerpro..).
  5. Translation Method: Select Human Translation from the dropdown.
  6. Translation Provider: By default, it is Lionbridge-Translation when Translation Method is selected as Human Translation (refer previous point vi).
  7. Translation Provider Credentials: Lionbridge Connect Title is displayed which was created in earlier steps.
  8. You can select or de-select Automatically Promote Translation Launches, Delete Launch After Promotion, and Automatically Approve Translations.
  9. Repeat Translation: In Creates new translation job(s), inside the project you can select any one option as per the requirements (example: None/Daily/Weekly/Monthly/Yearly) to repeat the translation job and click Create.
  10. A Success message is displayed as The Project was created. To verify the project, you can click Open or simply click Done.

Note:
When you send a TIF job, the language pairs are controlled by the Team Profiles, just like the Bulk Translation with All Team Profiles.
Turn on AEM Build-in Languages to show up in Language Mappings.

3.5 - Connector Translation Verification

On AEM, click on Navigation (compass icon). Click Projects.
Select the latest created Translation Job (Target Languages). The Status is Draft. The Pages, Assets, Content Fragments, I18n Dictionaries, and Tags are zero (0). To add assets to the existing Job, click on more (three dots (…)).
Click + Add and select Assets\Pages.
Select your assets path tree item as We.Retail » Language Masters » English » Men and Women for translation (You can select multiple assets according to the requirement for translation), and click Select.
You can see three options Create Language Copy (Update Language Copy for existing project instance), Overwrite Language Master, and Cancel. Select Create Language Copy (If Update Language Copy appears you are updating the existing Translation.
To add all mentioned assets into the translation job, Click Translation Job header dropdown, and choose Job Name to add the assets to the job.
You can see the updated Translation Job (Pages and |18n Dictionaries are updated).
To start the translation for added assets to the job, click on the dropdown of the Translation Job (Target Language) and click Start (to start the translation for Translation Job).
To monitor the translation status, refresh the browser or add /bin/lionbridge/debug/jobs after your AEM instance in the URL section. You can check the Status in the Project Details (Target Language).
After the successful round trip, you can see the final job status as Approved.

Adobe Experience Manager

Documentation Resources

Adobe Experience Manager Translation Integration Framework (TIF) Connector

1 - Installation and Configuration Guide

1.1 - Welcome to the Connector

Welcome to the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager

1.1.1 - Terminology

1.1.2 - About the Content API Platform

About the Content API Platform

1.1.3 - How the Connector Works with Adobe Experience Manager

1.1.4 - Using this Guide

Purpose of this guide

Who should use this guide

What you should already know

How to find out more about the Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager

To access all Lionbridge Connector for Adobe Experience Manager documentation:

Documentation conventions

1.1.5 - How to Contact Lionbridge Connector Support

How to Contact Lionbridge Connector Support

See also:

1.2 - Before You Install

1.2.1 - System Requirements

1.2.2 - Setting Your System Date, Time, and Time Zone Correctly

1.2.3 - Downloading the Delivery Package

1.2.4 - Deploying the connector through the Cloud Manager CI/CD Pipelines

1.2.5 - Creating the Connector Folders

1.2.6 - Creating or Updating a Connector Database on your Database Server Instance

Translation Database Size Requirements

1.3 - Installing the Lionbridge Connector

To install the Connector into Adobe Experience Manager:

1.3.1 - Installing the Add-On for SDL TMS

To install the add-on into Adobe Experience Manager:

1.4 - Post-Installation Tasks

1.4.1 - Configuring the Data Folder and Database Connection

1.4.2 - Verifying that the Bundle and All Connector Components Are Active

Verifying the bundle

Verifying the Connector components

1.4.3 - Verifying that the Connector Nodes are Installed

1.4.4 - Configuring Network Settings for a Firewall

1.5 - Configuring the Connector

1.5.1 - Configuring Connector Global Settings

1.5.1.1 - Server URL

1.5.1.2 - Network Configuration

1.5.1.3 - Translation Platform

1.5.1.4 - JDBC SQL Connection

Upgrading the database while upgrading your version of the Connector

1.5.1.5 - Freeway Config

1.5.1.6 - Folder and Permissions

1.5.1.7 - Translation Settings

1.5.1.8 - Email Notifications for Stuck Jobs

1.5.1.9 - In-Context Preview

1.5.1.10 - Automatic Cleanup Translation Jobs

1.5.1.11 - Mail Server Settings

1.5.1.12 - Automatic Split Job to Reduce Memory Usage and Improve Performance

1.5.1.13 - Log Service

1.5.1.14 - Agent Services

1.5.1.15 - Encryption Keystore (Lionbridge Freeway and SDL TMS only)

1.5.1.16 - UI and Default Settings

1.5.1.16.1 - Sidekick Options

Simple UI

Simple UI with options

Wizard

Wizard with options

Configuring the default value of the Submit Translation dropdown list in the Sidekick wizard

1.5.1.16.2 - MSM and Rollout settings

Adobe Experience Manager’s MSM and the Rollout Process

Why Integrate the Connector with Rollout

How the Connector Fits into MSM and Rollouts

1.5.2 - Configuring Connector Languages

To configure languages for the Connector:

1.5.2.1 - Adding Custom Connector Languages and Codes

1.5.3 - Configuring which Components and Properties to Send Out for Translation

To configure which components and properties the Connector sends out for translation:

1.5.4 - Subscribing to Email Notifications about New Fields and Components

1.5.5 - Configuring Translation Providers and License Keys

1.5.5.1 - Migrating a License Key

To migrate a license key:

1.5.5.2 - Adding a New License Key

To add a new license key:

1.5.5.3 - Editing a License Key

1.5.14.9 - Logging JCR Properties During Translation